Download Samsung Q1233 Service manual
Transcript
RX-8010VBK SERVICE MANUAL AUDIO/VIDEO CONTROL RECEIVER RX-8010VBK Area Suffix J CATV/DBS VCR 1 TV AUDIO POWER POWER POWER POWER DVD DVD MUILTI CD FM/AM TV/DBS VIDEO CDR PHONO VCR 2 TAPE/MD USB VCR 1 SURROUND ON/OFF DSP ANALOG/DIGITAL SLEEP MODE BASS LINE DIF.ECT BOOST INPUT EFFECT ROOM SIZE 2 3 1 RX-8010V MENU MIDNIGHT MODE TEST FM/AM TUNING CTR TONE LIVENESS 4 5 ∗SUBWFR ∗L/R BAL ∗CENTER ∗DIGITALEQ ∗REAR L ∗REAR R 8 7/P 0 10 RETURN TV/VIDEO + FM MODE ∗BAL L ∗ + CH/ LEVEL TV VOL − ∗BAL R MENU FM/AM PRESET STANDBY − PLAY POWER D I G I T A L +10 100+ SURROUND D I G I T A L SPEAKERS ON/OFF 1 + SURROUND ON/OFF VOLUME − EXIT MASTER VOLUME MEMORY 9 DSP MODE /REW PAUSE INPUT ANALOG/DIGITAL DVD MULTI DVD VCR 1 VCR 2 TV SOUND/DBS DIGITAL LEVEL EQ ADJUST LINE DIRECT EFFECT SETTING BASS BOOST INPUT ATT SOUCE NAME VIDEO USB AUDIO VIDEO L—AUDIO—R PHONO CD CDR TAPE / MD USB AUDIO FM / AM FF/ CONTROL DOWN UP SET REC PAUSE VIDEO MIDNIGHT MODE 2 SUBWOOFER OUT ON/OFF S-VIDEO TEXT DISPLAY AUDIO/VIDEO CONTROL RECEIVER FM MODE 6 ENTER SOUND MUTING CATV/DBS CONTROL U.S.A. DOWN – TUNING – UP SOUCE NAME STOP CONTROL PHONES RM-SRX8010J A/V CONTROL RECEIVER D I G I T A L Contents Safety precautions --------------------------------------------------------1-2 Importance administering point on the safety --------------------- 1-3 Disassembly method -----------------------------------------------------1-4 Adjustment method -------------------------------------------------------1-10 Self-diagnose function ----------------------------------------------------1-11 Description of major ICs -------------------------------------------------1-13 COPYRIGHT 2001 VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LTD. No.20921 Mar. 2001 http://getMANUAL.com RX-8010VBK 1. This design of this product contains special hardware and many circuits and components specially for safety purposes. For continued protection, no changes should be made to the original design unless authorized in writing by the manufacturer. Replacement parts must be identical to those used in the original circuits. Services should be performed by qualified personnel only. 2. Alterations of the design or circuitry of the product should not be made. Any design alterations of the product should not be made. Any design alterations or additions will void the manufacturer`s warranty and will further relieve the manufacture of responsibility for personal injury or property damage resulting therefrom. 3. Many electrical and mechanical parts in the products have special safety-related characteristics. These characteristics are often not evident from visual inspection nor can the protection afforded by them necessarily be obtained by using replacement components rated for higher voltage, wattage, etc. Replacement parts which have these special safety characteristics are identified in the Parts List of Service Manual. Electrical components having such features are identified by shading on the schematics and by ( ) on the Parts List in the Service Manual. The use of a substitute replacement which does not have the same safety characteristics as the recommended replacement parts shown in the Parts List of Service Manual may create shock, fire, or other hazards. 4. The leads in the products are routed and dressed with ties, clamps, tubings, barriers and the like to be separated from live parts, high temperature parts, moving parts and/or sharp edges for the prevention of electric shock and fire hazard. When service is required, the original lead routing and dress should be observed, and it should be confirmed that they have been returned to normal, after re-assembling. 5. Leakage currnet check (Electrical shock hazard testing) After re-assembling the product, always perform an isolation check on the exposed metal parts of the product (antenna terminals, knobs, metal cabinet, screw heads, headphone jack, control shafts, etc.) to be sure the product is safe to operate without danger of electrical shock. Do not use a line isolation transformer during this check. Plug the AC line cord directly into the AC outlet. Using a "Leakage Current Tester", measure the leakage current from each exposed metal parts of the cabinet , particularly any exposed metal part having a return path to the chassis, to a known good earth ground. Any leakage current must not exceed 0.5mA AC (r.m.s.) Alternate check method Plug the AC line cord directly into the AC outlet. Use an AC voltmeter having, 1,000 ohms per volt or more sensitivity in the following manner. Connect a 1,500 10W resistor paralleled by a 0.15 F AC-type capacitor between an exposed AC VOLTMETER metal part and a known good earth ground. (Having 1000 Measure the AC voltage across the resistor with the ohms/volts, or more sensitivity) AC voltmeter. Move the resistor connection to eachexposed metal part, particularly any exposed metal part having a 0.15 F AC TYPE return path to the chassis, and meausre the AC Place this voltage across the resistor. Now, reverse the plug in probe on the AC outlet and repeat each measurement. voltage each exposed 1500 10W metal part. measured Any must not exceed 0.75 V AC (r.m.s.). This corresponds to 0.5 mA AC (r.m.s.). Good earth ground 1. This equipment has been designed and manufactured to meet international safety standards. 2. It is the legal responsibility of the repairer to ensure that these safety standards are maintained. 3. Repairs must be made in accordance with the relevant safety standards. 4. It is essential that safety critical components are replaced by approved parts. 5. If mains voltage selector is provided, check setting for local voltage. ! 1-2 Burrs formed during molding may be left over on some parts of the chassis. Therefore, pay attention to such burrs in the case of preforming repair of this system. RX-8010VBK Importance administering point on the safety 131 LVA10222-A6 R61 B3191 132 RY63 113 CN55 B3152 B3151 PW19 B3148 B3147 B3146 B3145 B3144 B3142 PW26 PW18 FC2 D67 112 B3150 6.3A-125V PW30 B3149 FC1 PW17 B3143 B3141 PW20 TA2 RY62 TA1 CN56 CN811 111 R1 B3192 123 122 EP1 LVA10222-A3 121 2A-125V FC62 FC61 134 FC64 2A-125V FC63 133 Caution: For continued protection against risk of fire, replace only with same type 6.3A/125V for F201, 2A/125V for F202 and F203. This symbol specifies type of fast operating fuse. Precaution: Pour eviter risques de feux, remplacez le fusible de surete de F201 comme le meme type que 6.3A/125V, et 2A/125V pour F202 et F203. ^ Ce sont des fusibles suretes qui functionnes rapide. 1-3 RX-8010VBK Disassembly method Top cover B Removing the top cover (See Fig.1) 1. Remove the four screws A attaching the top cover on both sides of the body. 2. Remove the three screws B on the back of the body. A 3. Remove the top cover from behind in the direction of the arrow while pulling both sides outward. 2 A Fig.1 2 Front panel assembly C Removing the front panel assembly (See Fig.2 to 3) Prior to performing the following procedure, remove the top cover. 1. Disconnect the card wire from connector CN400 on the audio board and CN402 on the power supply board in the front panel assembly. a C Tie band CN402 Main board Power supply board CN400 2. Cut off the tie band fixing the harness. Audio board 3. Remove the three screws C attaching the front panel assembly and the screw a fixing a ground. Fig.2 4. Remove the four screws D attaching the front panel assembly on the bottom of the body. Detach the front panel assembly toward the front. Front panel assembly D D Removing the rear panel (See Fig.4) Prior to performing the following procedure, remove the top cover. Fig.3 1. Remove the power cord stopper from the rear panel by moving it in the direction of the arrow. E E E E Cord stopper 2. Remove the thirty four screws E attaching the each boards to the rear panel on the back of the body. 3. Remove the three screws F attaching the rear panel on the back of the body. F F Rear panel F Fig.4 1-4 E RX-8010VBK Removing each board connected to the rear side of the audio board (See Fig.5 to 11) Prior to performing the following procedure, remove the top cover and the rear panel. Tie band 1. Cut off the tie band fixing the harness. 2. Disconnect the connect CN501, CN243, CN205, CN381, CN361 on the DVD board. 3. Disconnect the harness from connector CN721, CN722 and CN723. CN361 CN381 CN205 CN243 CN501 Fig.5 4. Disconnect the tuner board and audio board from connector CN101 and CN301 on the audio board. CN721 CN722 5. Pull out the video audio board, video board, S-video board. 6. Disconnect the DSP board from connector CN601 on the audio board. CN723 CN731 CN732 Fig.6 DVD board Audio board CN416 CN206 Fig.7 CN244 CN303 CN201 CN241 Tuner board Video audio board Video board Fig.9 S Video board CN101 CN301 Audio input board Fig.8 1-5 RX-8010VBK Video audio board Video board S Video board Fig.10 DSP board CN601 Fig.11 Relay board CN814 CN813 CN71 Removing the audio board (See Fig.12 to 13) power supply board Prior to performing the following procedure, remove the top cover and the rear panel. 1. Disconnect the harness from connector CN813 and CN814 on the main board. Main board Tie band 2. Disconnect the card wire from connector CN931 and CN932 on the audio board. 3. Cut off the tie band fixing the harness. Power transformer Audio board CN931/ 932 CN81 Fig.12 4. Disconnect the relay board from the audio board and the power supply board. (CN71,CN81) 5. Disconnect the card wire from connector CN831 on the main board. 6. Remove the three screws G board assembly. 7. Remove the screw H assembly. attaching the audio CN831 attaching the audio board G G Fig.13 1-6 H Power / Fuse board RX-8010VBK Removing the main board (See Fig.14) J I Prior to performing the following procedure, remove the top cover, the rear panel and audio board. I J 1. Cut off the tie band fixing the harness. 3. Disconnect the harness from connector CN881 on the main board. CN811 J 2. Disconnect the harness from connector CN811 on the power supply board respectively. I Main board 4. Remove the four screws I and the two screws J attaching the main board. CN881 Tie band I Fig.14 Removing the Heat sink (See Fig.15 to 16) 1. Remove the ten screws K and four screws L attaching the heat sink. Heat sink K K K L L 2. Remove the two screws L' attaching the heat sink from the rear side of main board. Fig.15 L' L' Main board rear side Fig.16 1-7 RX-8010VBK Removing the power transformer (See Fig.17) Prior to performing the following procedures, remove the top cover. Power Power supply board transformer 1. Unsolder the two harnesses connected to the power board transformer. 2. Disconnect the harness from connector CN55 and CN56 on the power transformer board. 3. Remove the four screws M transformer. CN55 / 56 M attaching the power Power transformer M Removing the power / fuse board (See Fig.17) Prior to performing the following procedure, remove the top cover and the rear panel. 1. Remove the screw N board. N attaching the power / fuse Solder Solder 2. Unsolder the power cord and other harnesses connected to the power / fuse board. Power cord Power / fuse board Fig.17 Removing the power supply board (See Fig.18 to 19) Prior to performing the following procedure, remove the top cover and the front panel. 1. Remove the screws b fixing a bonding ground. 2. Remove the one nut attaching the headphone jack of the power supply board on the front side of the body. b Power supply board Headphone jack Nut Fig.18 3. Disconnect the card wire from connector CN402 on the power supply board. 4. Remove the three screws O attaching the power supply board and pull out the power supply board from the front bracket backward. 5. Unsolder the three harnesses connected to the power supply board. Power supply board Headphone jack O CN402 O Tie band Hook O Tie band Fig.19 1-8 Solder RX-8010VBK Removing the system control board / power switch board (See Fig.20 to 22) Operation switch panel Front panel assembly Nut Prior to performing the following procedure, remove the top cover and the front panel assembly. 1. Pull out the volume knob on the front side of the front panel and remove the nut attaching the system control board. 2. Remove the two screws P switch board. attaching the power 3. Remove the two screws Q board. attaching the switch Volume knob Fig.20 4. Remove the cords from the three hooks a. 5. Remove the eight screws R attaching the system control board on the back of the front panel. 6. On the back of the front panel, release the four joints by pushing the joint tabs inward. Remove the operation switch panel toward the front. Switch board R R Cords Power switch board R Q P 7. Disconnect the harness from connector CN420 and CN422 on the system control board. 8. Release the two hooks b attaching the system control board. Joint Joint Joint Joint Hook a Fig.21 System control board CN420 Hook b Hook b CN422 Fig.22 Matters that require attention during replacement of IC400 In case where there is a resistance array: Both onetime IC and mask IC can be used In case where there is no resistance array: Only mask IC can be used Resistance array 1-9 RX-8010VBK Adjustment method Tuner section 1.Tuner range FM 87.5MHz~108.0MHz AM(MW) 530kHz~1710kHz Power amplifier section Adjustment of idling current Measurement location B2204-B2205(Lch) , B2213-2214(Rch) Adjustment part VR787(Lch) , VR788(Rch) Attention This adjustment does not obtain a correct adjustment value immediately after the amplifier is used (state that an internal temperature has risen). Please adjust immediately after using the amplifier after turning off the power supply of the amplifier and falling an internal temperature. <Adjustment method> 1.Set the volume control to minimum during this adjustment.(No signal & No load) 2.Set the surround mode OFF. 2.Turn VR787 and VR788 fully counterclockwise to warm up before adjustment. If the heat sink is already warm from previous use the correct adjustment can not be made. 3.For L-ch,connect a DC voltmeter between B2204 and B2205 (Lch) And,connect it between B2213 and B2214(Rch). 4.30 minutes later after power on, adjust VR787 for L-ch, or VR788 for R-ch so that the DC voltmeter value has 1mV~10mV. * It is not abnormal though the idling current might not become 0mA even if it is finished to turn variable resistance (VR787,VR788) in the direction of counterclockwise. Heat sink B2213, B2214 VR788 (Rch) VR787 (Lch) B2204, B2205 1-10 RX-8010VBK Self-diagnose function 1. Detection of abnormal power supply and voltage When the power is turned ON, if an abnormality is detected during the signal input at the A/D port (IC901, pin 2-5, 7) for one second continuously, the status will become STANDBY mode immediately. When the power is turned ON again, detection of abnormal power supply and voltage will not be carried out during the first 4 seconds. Given below is a list of threshold values at the detection of abnormalities. Pin 2 Micro-computer+5V Pin 3 Digital+5V Pin 4 Analog+5V Pin 5 +12V Pin 7 Tuner+9V At abnormal state (Low voltage) Analog value 0 - 2.2V Analog value 0 - 2.2V Analog value 0 - 2.2V Analog value 0 - 2.2V Analog value 0 - 2.2V At abnormal state Analog value 2.2 - 2.8V Analog value 2.2 - 2.8V Analog value 2.2 - 2.8V Analog value 2.2 - 2.8V Analog value 2.2 - 2.8V At abnormal state (High voltage) Analog value 2.8 - 5.0V Analog value 2.8 - 5.0V Analog value 2.8 - 5.0V Analog value 2.8 - 5.0V Analog value 2.8 - 5.0V 2. Initial setting on ship To gain the initial setting on ship, put the power plug in the socket while pressing DOWN key and UP key together simultaneously, then turn the power ON. 3. Test mode To enter the test mode, put the power plug in the socket while pressing EFFECT key and UP key together simultaneously, then turn the power ON. Workings of test mode: All FLs are turned ON for 3 seconds. (the FLs, which are divided in two groups, are turned ON alternatively) A Faster volume UP/DOWN operation can be achieved with the remote controller. When the power is turned OFF, the test mode will be released. The FL display returns to normal after the three seconds. Then the STANDBY LED is turned ON (flashing ON and OFF for each one second) to show the present status being a test mode. 1-11 RX-8010VBK 4. Self-diagnose To enter the self-diagnose mode, put the power plug in the socket while pressing SETTING key and UP key together simultaneously, then turn the power ON. With the UP/DOWN key operation, DSP microcomputer, ROM No.of system microcomputer as well as working status of DSP can be displayed for five seconds. While the working status is being displayed, the followings items can be switched with the UP/DOWN key operation. VERSION of system microcomputer Local microcomputer CH0 Local microcomputer CH01 Local microcomputer CH2 Local microcomputer CH3 Local microcomputer CH4 When the power is turned OFF, the self-diagnose mode will be released. During the self-diagnose mode, the STANDBY LED is turned ON . (flashing ON for one second then OFF for three seconds) FL transient display will be carried out as follows. When the transient display is not carried out, normal display/workings are carried out. Upper 1 2 3 4 5 digits Lower 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 digits FL Display S 0 0 1 1 2 0 0 0 1 2 0 9 0 0 Information on VERSION of system microcomputer (IC901) Example : VER1.1 2000/12/9 D 0 0 Display of communication information on DSP microcomputer (IC581) D 0 1 Display of communication information on DIR AK4112A (IC551) D 0 2 Display of communication information on DSP XCA56367 (IC501) D 0 3 Display of communication information on CODEC AK4527 (IC571) D 0 4 1 1 2 0 0 0 1 2 0 9 0 0 1-12 Information on VERSION of DSP microcomputer (IC581) Example :VER1.1 2000/12/9 RX-8010VBK Description of major ICs AK4527 (IC571) : A/D,D/A Converter 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 LOOP1 LOOP0/SDA/CDTI DIF1/SCL/CCLK DIF0/CSN P/S MCLK DZF1 AVSS AVDD VREFH VCOM 1.Pin layout 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 VREFL RIN+ RINLIN+ LINROUT1 LOUT1 ROUT2 LOUT2 ROUT3 LOUT3 DEM1 DEM0 MCKO DVDD DVSS PD XTS ICKS1 ICKS0 CAD1 CAD0 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 SDOS OCKS MIS BCLK LRCK SDTI1 SDTI2 SDTI3 SDTO DAUX DFS 2.Block diagram LIN+ LIN- ADC HPF RIN+ RIN- ADC HPF Audio I/F LRCK LOUT1 LPF DAC DATT BICK DAUX MCLK ROUT1 LPF DAC DATT LOUT2 LPF DAC DATT ROUT2 LPF DAC DATT SDOUT Format Converter SDOS SDTO LOUT3 LPF DAC DATT SDTI1 SDIN1 SDIN2 ROUT3 LPF DAC DATT SDIN3 SDTI2 SDTI3 Block Diagram (DIR and AC-3) DSP are external parts) 1-13 RX-8010VBK 3. Pin function (1/2) 1-14 AK4527(1/2) No. 1 Pin name SDOS 2 OCKS I 3 MIS I 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 BICK LRCK SDTI1 SDTI2 SDTI3 SDTO DAUX DFS I I/O I I I O I I 12 DEM1 I 13 DEM0 I 14 15 16 17 MCKO DVDD DVSS PD O I 18 XTS I 19 20 21 ICKS1 ICKS0 CAD1 I I I 22 CAD0 I 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 LOUT3 ROUT3 LOUT2 ROUT2 LOUT1 ROUT1 LINLIN+ RINRIN+ O O O O O O I I I I I/O I Function SDTO Source select pin "L" : Internal ADC output, "H" : DAUX input ORed with serial control register if P/S="L". MCKO Clock frequency select pin "L" : MCLK, "H" : MCLK/2. ORed with serial control register if P/S= "L". Connect to GND Audio serial data clock pin Input/Output channel clock pin DAC1 Audio serial data input pin DAC2 Audio serial data input pin DAC3 Audio serial data input pin Audio serial data output pin AUX Audio serial data input pin Double speed sampling mode pin "L" : Normal speed, "H" : Double speed, the ADC is powered down. ORed with serial control register if P/S="L". De-emphasis pin ORed with serial control register if P/S="L" De-emphasis Pin ORed with serial control register if P/S="L" Master clock output pin Digital power supply pin Digital ground pin Power-down & Reset pin When "L", the AK4527 is powered-down and the control registers are reset to default state. If the state of CAD0-1 changes, then the AK4527 must be reset by PDN. X'tal oscillator Select/Test mode pin "H" : X'tal Oscillator selected "L" : External clock source selected Input clock select 1 pin Input clock select 0 pin Chip address pin Used during the serial control mode. Chip address pin Used during the serial control mode. Lch #3 analog output pin Rch #3 analog output pin Lch #2 analog output pin Rch #2 analog output pin Lch #2 analog output pin Rch #1 analog output pin Lch analog negative Input Pin Lch analog positive Input Pin Rch analog negative Input Pin Rch analog positive Input Pin RX-8010VBK 3.Pin function (2/2) AK4527(2/2) No. 33 34 Pin Name VREFL VCOM I/O I O 35 36 37 38 39 VREFH AVDD AVSS XTI XTO MCKI P/S I I O I I 43 DIF0 CS DIF1 CCLK LOOP0 I I I I I 44 CDTI LOOP1 I I CDTO O 40 41 42 Function Negative voltage reference Input pin, AVSS Common voltage output pin,AVDD/2 Large external capacitor around 2.2uF is used to reduce power-supply noise Positive voltage reference input pin,AVDD Analog power supply pin Analog ground pin X'tal input pin X'tal output pin if XTS="H" External master clock input pin if XTS="L" Parallel/Serial select pin "L" : Serial control mode, "H" : Parallel control mode Audio data interface format pin in parallel mode Chip select pin in serial mode Audio data interface format pin in parallel mode Control data clock pin in serial mode Loop back mode pin in parallel mode Enables digital loop-back from ADC to 3 DACs. Control data input pin in serial mode Loop back mode pin in parallel mode Enable all 3 DAC channels to be input from SDTII. Control data output pin in serial mode 1-15 RX-8010VBK BA15218F(IC303, IC304, IC372, IC385, IC386) : OP AMP. OUT1 1 -IN1 2 8 VCC 7 OUT2 1 +IN1 3 + - 6 -IN2 + 5 +IN2 2 VEE 4 BA7625 (IC201, IC242) : Video selector MONITOR OUT 1 16 IN1 GND 2 15 CTL A 14 VOUT 1 IN5 3 logic GND 4 13 VCC IN4 5 12 IN2 11 CTL B CTL E 6 logic IN3 7 10 VOUT 2 CTL D 8 11 CTL C A B E MONITOR OUT L H L H H L L H H H * * * L H IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 IN5 C D E VOUT1 L H L H H L L H H H * * * L H -IN2 IN3 IN4 IN5 C D E VOUT2 L H L H H L L H H H * * * L H IN1 -IN3 IN4 IN5 A B E MONITOR OUT L H L H H L L H H H * * * L H IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 IN5 C D E VOUT1 L H L H H L L H H H * * * L H -IN2 IN3 IN4 IN5 C D E VOUT2 L H L H H L L H H H * * * IN1 -IN3 IN4 IN5 BA7626 (IC241) : Video selector MONITOR OUT 1 16 IN1 GND 2 15 CTL A 14 VOUT 1 IN5 3 logic GND 4 13 VCC IN4 5 12 IN2 11 CTL B CTL E 6 logic IN3 7 CTL D 8 1-16 10 VOUT 2 11 CTL C L H RX-8010VBK BU2092(IC402):PORT EXPANDER 1.Terminal Layout 1 18 Vdd DATA 2 17 OE 16 Q11 15 Q10 14 Q9 13 Q8 12 Q7 11 Q6 10 Q5 Vss CLOCK 3 Q0 5 Q1 6 Q2 7 Q3 8 Q4 9 12BIT SHIFT RESISTER 4 12BIT STRAGE RESISTER LCK OUTPUT BUFFER(OPEN DRAIN) CONTROL CIRCUIT 2.Pin Function Pin No. Symbol I/O Function 1 Vss - Connect to GND 2 DATA I Serial Data input 3 CLOCK I Shift Clock of Data 4 LCK I Latch Clock of Data 5~16 Q0~Q11 O Parallel Data Output Latch Data L H OUTPUT ON OFF 17 OE I Output Enable 18 Vdd - Power Supply 1-17 RX-8010VBK MB90088 (IC203) : On screen display controller 1.Terminal Layout YIN VIN CIN AVcc IOUT VOC Vcc EXS XS HSYNC VSYNC EXHSYN EXVSYN Vss 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 AVss YOUT VOUT COUT CS SIN SCLK TEST BOUT ROUT GOUT VOB XD EXD 2.Block Diagram SIN SCLK CS EXHSYN EXVSYN Serial Input Control Each Control, Data H/V Separate VIN YIN CIN HSYNC VSYNC Analog SW NTSC/PAL Signal OSC Video Signal OSC Display Memory Control Output Control VRAM XS EXS XD EXD 1-18 VOUT YOUT COUT CGROM 4FSC CLK OSC Each Block Dot CLK OSC Each Block BOUT ROUT GOUT IOUT VOC VOB RX-8010VBK 3.Functions pin Function no Symbol I/O 1 YIN I Lux signal Input terminal for Superinpause indication 2 VIN I Composite video signal input terminal for Superinpause indication 3 CIN I Contrast signal input terminal for Superinpause indication 4 AVcc - Analog power supply terminal 5 IOUT O Color (Lux) signal output terminal 6 VOC O Character output terminal 7 Vcc 8 EXS I 9 XS Power supply terminal Clock generater outside circuit terminal for color burst O O Horizontal signal output terminal O Vertical signal output terminal 10 HSYNC 11 VSYNC 12 EXHSYN I EXT horizontal signal input terminal 13 EXT vertical signal input terminal 14 EXVSYN I Vss - 15 EXD I Dot clock generater outside circuit signal terminal for indication 16 XD O 17 VOB 18 GOUT O Character & background signal output terminal O Color signal (Green, Red, Blue) 19 ROUT GND 20 BOUT 21 TEST I Test signal input terminal 22 SCLK I Shift clock input terminal for serial transmission 23 SIN I Serial data input terminal 24 CS I Chip select terminal 25 COUT 26 VOUT O Contrast signal output terminal O Composite video signal output terminal 27 YOUT O Lux signal output terminal 28 AVss - Analog GND terminal 1-19 RX-8010VBK MAX4018ESD (IC390) : OP AMP. ENA 1 16 OUTC ENC 2 15 INC- ENB 3 14 INC+ Vcc 4 13 VEE INA+ 5 12 INB+ INA- 6 11 INB- OUTA 7 10 OUTB N.C. 8 9 N.C. NJM2285V-W(IC202) : 2-INPUT 3CHANNEL VIDEO SWITCH IN1A GND1 16 15 IN2B 14 V+ 13 CTL2 IN2A 12 11 H 10 IN3B 9 L CLAMP TYPE BIAS TYPE L GND3 H CLAMP TYPE L H 1-20 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 IN1B CTL1 OUT1 GND2 OUT2 OUT3 CTL3 IN3A RX-8010VBK NJM4580D (IC301) : LPF, Mic and H.phone Amp. 1.Terminal layout A OUT 1 A -IN 2 A 8 V+ 7 B OUT B A +IN 3 6 B -IN V- 4 5 B +IN (TOP VIEW) 2.Block diagram V + INPUT + OUTPUT V- NJU7241F33(IC411) : VOLTAGE REGULATOR 1 5 2 3 PIN FUNCTION 1. GND 2. VIN 3. VOUT 4. +NC 5. STB 4 1-21 RX-8010VBK PCM2702E-X (IC410) : DIGITAL / ANALOG CONVERTER 3 DGNDC AGNDP 26 4 VDD VccL 25 5 DGND AGNDL 24 6 D+ VOUTL 23 7 D- USB packet data D+ DVBUS DGNDU WRCLK audio data FIFO USB I/F 8x Oversampling Digital Filter Multi-level Delta-Sigma Modulator Vcc 22 8 VBUS AGND 20 10 PLYBCK VOUTR 19 11 SSPND AGNDR 18 12 ZERO VccR 17 13 TEST3 TEST0 16 14 TEST2 TEST1 15 DAC Low-pass Filter DAC Low-pass Filter RDCLK VDDC DGNDC USB clock generator SPACT System Clock Audio clock generator Crystal OSC XTI XTO Power supply VDDP DGNDP VCC AGND VDD DGND 3.Pin function PIN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 Symbol XTI VDDC DGNDC VDD DGND D+ DVBUS DGNDU PLYBCK SSPND ZERO TEST3 TEST2 TEST1 TEST0 VccR AGNDR VOUTR AGND VCOM Vcc VOUTL AGNDL VccL AGNDP VccP XTO I/O IN I/O I/O IN OUT OUT OUT IN IN IN IN OUT OUT OUT Function Crystal Oscillator Input. Digital Power Supply for Clock Generator, +3.3V. Digital Ground for Clock Generator. Digital Power Supply, +3.3V. Digital Ground. USB Differential Input/Output Plus. USB Differential Input/Output Minus. USB Bus Power (This pin NEVER consumes the USB bus power). Digital Ground for USB Transceiver. Playback flag, active LOW. (LOW: playback, HIGH: idle). Suspend flag, active LOW. (LOW: suspend, HIGH: operational). Zero flag, (LOW: Normal, HIGH: ZERO). Test pin 3. Connect to digital ground. Test pin 2. Connect to digital ground. Test pin 1. Connect to digital ground. Test pin 0. Connect to digital ground. Analog Supply for R-channel, +5V. Analog Ground for R-channel. Analog Output for R-channel. Analog Ground. Common for DAC. Analog Supply, +5V. Analog output for L-channel. Analog Ground for L-channel. Analog Supply for L-channel, +5V. Analog Ground for PLL. Analog Supply for PLL, +5V. Crystal Oscillator Output. Note: (1) 3.3V tolerant. (2) Schmitt trigger input with internal pull-down, 5V tolerant. 1-22 VOUTL VCOM MCLK VCOM 21 9 DGND VccR AGNDR VccL AGNDL VccP 27 ZERO XTO 28 2 VDDC PLYBCK 1 XTI SSPDN 2. Block diagram 1.Pin layout (1) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) VOUTR RX-8010VBK TC9162AN (IC380) : ANALOG SWITCH VSS L-S1 L-S2 L-COM1 L-S3 L-S4 L-COM2 L-S5 L-S6 L-COM3 L-S7 L-COM4 ST GND 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 VDD R-S1 R-S2 R-COM1 R-S3 R-S4 R-COM2 R-S5 R-S6 R-COM3 R-S7 R-COM4 DATA CK VSS 1 GND 14 VDD 28 L-S1 2 27 R-S1 L-S2 3 26 R-S2 25 R-COM1 L-COM1 4 24 R-S3 LEVEL SHIFTER L-S5 8 LATCH CIRCUIT L-COM2 7 LATCH CIRCUIT L-S4 6 LEVEL SHIFTER L-S3 5 23 R-S4 22 R-COM2 21 R-S5 20 R-S6 L-S6 9 19 R-COM3 L-COM3 10 18 R-S7 L-S7 11 17 R-COM4 L-COM4 12 16 DATA ST 13 SHIFT REGISTER 15 CK 1-23 RX-8010VBK TC9163AF-X (IC371) : ANALOG SWITCH VSS L-S1 L-S2 L-S3 L-COM1 L-S4 L-S5 L-S6 L-COM2 L-S7 L-S8 L-COM3 ST GND 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 VDD R-S1 R-S2 R-S3 R-COM1 R-S4 R-S5 R-S6 R-COM2 R-S7 R-S8 R-COM3 DATA CK VSS 1 GND 14 VDD 28 3 26 R-S2 L-S3 4 25 R-S3 L-COM1 5 24 R-COM1 L-S4 6 L-S5 7 L-S6 8 L-COM2 9 23 R-S4 22 R-S5 21 R-S6 20 R-COM2 L-S7 10 19 R-S7 L-S8 11 18 R-S8 L-COM3 12 17 R-COM3 ST 13 16 DATA SHIFT REGISTER 1-24 LEVEL SHIFTER L-S2 LATCH CIRCUIT 27 R-S1 LATCH CIRCUIT 2 LEVEL SHIFTER L-S1 15 CK RX-8010VBK TC9164AF-X (IC302) : ANALOG SWITCH VSS L-S1 L-S2 L-S3 L-S4 L-COM1 L-S5 L-S6 L-COM2 L-S7 L-S8 L-COM3 ST GND 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 VDD R-S1 R-S2 R-S3 R-S4 R-COM1 R-S5 R-S6 R-COM2 R-S7 R-S8 R-COM3 DATA CK VSS 1 GND 14 VDD 28 3 26 R-S2 L-S3 4 25 R-S3 L-S4 5 24 R-S4 L-COM1 6 L-S5 7 L-S6 8 L-COM2 9 LEVEL SHIFTER L-S2 LATCH CIRCUIT 27 R-S1 LATCH CIRCUIT 2 LEVEL SHIFTER L-S1 23 R-COM1 22 R-S5 21 R-S6 20 R-COM2 L-S7 10 19 R-S7 L-S8 11 18 R-S8 17 R-COM3 L-COM3 12 16 DATA ST 13 SHIFT REGISTER 15 CK 1-25 RX-8010VBK TC9459F (IC381, IC382, IC383) : Electronic volume control 2. Block diagram 1.Terminal layout VSS L-OUT NC L-IN L-LD1 L-LD2 L-A-GND NC CS1 NC GND CK L-ch 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 VDD R-OUT NC R-IN R-LD1 R-LD2 R-A-GND NC CS2 NC STB DATA L-OUT 2 NC 3 L-1N 4 R-ch L-LD1 VSS VDD 1 24 23 R-OUT 22 NC 50k / 915TEP VR 21 R-IN Same as L-ch 5 20 R-LD1 Circuit L-LD2 6 19 R-LD2 L-A-GND 7 18 R-A-GND NC 8 17 NC L-ch 7 to 91 decoder L-ch data latch circuit R-ch 7 to 91 decoder R-ch data latch circuit Shift register (24BIT) Level shift circuit CS1 9 NC 10 15 NC GND 11 14 STB CK 12 13 DATA 16 CS2 3.Pin function Pin No. 1-26 Symbol Function Pin No. Symbol Function 1 VSS Negative power supply pin 13 DATA Data input pin 2 L-OUT Volume output pin 14 STB Strobe input pin 3 NC No connection 15 NC No connection 4 NC No connection 16 CS2 Chip select input pin 5 L-LD1 Loudness tap output pin 17 NC No connection 6 L-LD2 Loudness tap output pin 18 R-A-GND Analog GND pin 7 L-A-GND Analog GND pin 19 R-LD2 Loudness tap output pin 8 NC No connection 20 R-LD1 Loudness tap output pin 9 CS1 Chip select input pin 21 R-IN Volume input pin 10 NC No connection 22 NC No connection 11 NC No connection 23 R-OUT Volume output pin 12 CK Clock input pin 24 VDD Positive power supply pin RX-8010VBK PQ3DZ53 (IC583) : Regulator IC DC INPUT(Vin) 1 3 DC OUTPUT(Vo) 2 ON/OFF CONTROL(Vc) CUSTOM IC 5 GND TC74HC4053AF (IC388, IC389) : MULTIPLEXER 1Y 1 16 Vcc 0Y 2 15 Y-COM IZ 3 14 X-COM Z-COM 4 13 1X 0Z 5 12 0X INH 6 11 A VEE 7 10 B GND 8 9 C CONTROL INPUTS INHIBIT C B L L L L L L H L L H L L L L H L L H H L H H L H X H X A K H K H K H K H X X: Don't Care. W24L010AJ-12 (IC511) : CMOS STATIC RAM 1. Pin layout 2. Block diaglam VDD NC A11 A9 A8 A13 WE CS2 A15 VDD NC A16 A14 A12 A7 A6 A5 A4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 32 VDD Vss A16 2 31 A15 A14 3 30 CS2 A12 4 29 WE A7 5 28 A13 A6 6 27 A8 A5 7 26 A9 A4 8 25 A11 CS2 A3 9 24 OE CS1 A2 10 23 A10 OE A1 11 22 CS1 WE A0 12 21 I/O8 I/O1 13 20 I/O7 I/O2 14 19 I/O6 I/O3 15 18 I/O5 Vss 16 17 I/O4 32-pin TSOP A0 DECODER CORE ARRAY CONTROL DATA I/O A16 I/O1 I/O8 3. Pin function 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 19 18 17 16 OE A10 CS1 I/O8 I/O7 I/O6 I/O5 I/O4 Vss DO3 DO2 DO1 A0 A1 A2 A3 SYMBOL A0 - A16 I/O1 - I/O8 CS1, CS2 WE OE VDD Vss NC DESCRIPTION Address Input Data Input/Output Chip Select Inputs Write Enable Input Output Enable Input Power Supply Ground No Connection 1-27 RX-8010VBK UPD784215AGC132(IC581) : UNIT CPU 1.Pin layout 75 ~ 51 76 50 ~ ~ 100 1 ~ 25 26 2.Pin function Pin No. 1~8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19~22 23 24 25~32 33 34,35 36 37,38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45,46 47 48 49 50,51 52 53 54 55 56 57~63 64,65 66 67 68~70 71 72 73~75 76 77 78 79,80 81 82,83 84 85 86 87 88 89~93 94 95~100 1-28 Symbol VDD X2 X1 VSS XT2 XT1 RESET AUTO ERR Fz96k P03~P06 AVDD AV REF0 P10~P17 AVSS P130, P131 AV REF1 RX, TX DSPCOM DSPSTS DSPCLK DSPRDY MIDIO_IN/OUT MICK HREQ SS DSP_RST D_CS PD/ DIR CDTI/CDTO CCLK CS PD GND EQ CTR TONE 3D VDD ANA_TT LEF_MIX LEF_OUT MIX_OUT S_MUTE TEST I/O I I I I I I I O O O I O I I O I/O O I O O O O O/I O O O O O O O O O O O - Function Non connect Power supply terminal Connecting the crystal oscillator for system main clock Connecting the crystal oscillator for system main clock Connect to GND Connecting the crystal oscillator for system sub clock Connect VSS System reset signal input Output of DSP to general-purpose port Output of DSP to general-purpose port Output of DSP to general-purpose port Output of DSP to general-purpose port Power supply terminal Connect to GND Connect to GND Connect to GND Non connect Power supply terminal Not use Non connect Communication port from IC901 Status communication port to IC901 Clock input from IC901 Ready signal input from IC901 Non connect Interface I/O terminal with microcomputer Interface I/O terminal with microcomputer of clock signal HREQ System slave select Non connect Reset signal output of DSP Non connect Chip setselct output Non connect Reset signal output Non connect Interface I/O terminal with microcomputer Interface I/O terminal with microcomputer of clock signal CS Non connect Reset signal output Connect to GND Non connect EQ CENTER TONE 3D-Phonic Non connect Power supply Non connect Analog./T.TONE Select 1 Select 2 Select 3 S.MUTE Non connect Test terminal Non connect RX-8010VBK Block diagrams CN406 SYSTEM CONTROL & FL COMP LINK TEXT LINK Main section LVA10221-1 CN732 CENTER CN823 CN813 CN702 CN703 CN824 CN814 REAR L RL ch Q1852 Q1854 CN881 Q1851 Q1853 RR ch CN400 FW881 REAR R CN406 SYSTEM CONTROL & FL CN101 SR RY852 LVA1024-2 LVA10009 CEN RY851 CN723 CN351 CN111 Q1751 Q1752 LVA10219-1 CN361 CN301 DATA CN311 CEN SL LVA10219-3 2 CN701 SL/SR IC383 CN721 CN416 SPK2 R DVD REAR AUDIO CN381 CN371 V SIG CPU IC901 CN303 LVA10223 CN313 R RY833 CN722 3 L RY832 SL/SR CEN CEN IC381 MON MON CN501 CEN CN581 SPK1 L IC380 SW CN587 L/R SL/SR CN601 DATA LVA10219-4 CN705 CN206 Q762 Q764 R ch CN706 CN204 L RY831 R CN715 CN200 L/R 4 CN205 CN201 LVA10219-5 IC382 CN242 CN240 CN241 LVA10222-1 CN244 L/R CN243 L ch CN711 LVA10221-2 Q761 Q763 CN712 CN731 CN713 5 CN716 Signal I/O block section A SYSTEM CONTROL & FL CN410 1 B C D E F G 2-1 RX-8010VBK Video section Video input section LVA10219-3 LVA10219-4 5 P MON Y/C IN DATA/CLK VCR1 REC SOUTCE SELECTOR IC 371 CN204 SW IC 201 VCR1 MON Y/C OUT Y/C SEP IC 202 R TV/DBS CN311 DATA IC 203 VCR1 P.B V SIG V SIG R CN351 TV/DBS DVD F CN200 DVD VCR2 REC VCR2 P VCR2 P.B CN206 FRONT VIDEO IN (RCA) USB MON CN416 4 FRONT AUDIO DSP section LVA10223 S Video section 3 SELECTOR IC 551 CN240 DIGITAL IN3 DSP CONTROLLER IC 581 AD/DA CONVERTER IC 571 R/L C SR/SL CN581 DVD DIGITAL IN2 C IC 241 SW (C) DATA DIGITAL IN1 DATA CN587 LVA10219-5 DIGITAL IN4 TV/DBS R FRONT Y/C VCR1 DSP IC 501 CN244 2 SD RAM IC 511 DIGITAL OUT P R VCR2 Y P IC 242 SW (Y) MON Y MON Y/C MON Y/C CN242 C 1 A B C 2-2 D E F G H RX-8010VBK Tuner section System control & FL section LVA10009 LVA10218-1 FM AM/FM DET IC102 MW RF & OSC T111 PLL IC102 FL DISPLAY D400 DATA CN410 AM CN111 TUNER 5 TUNER RF 101 SYSTEM CONTROLLER IC 400 KEY 4 Y/C Audio input section PHONO L/R EQ IC 301 CN406 VIDEO AUDIO LVA10219-2 USB CD L/R DATA/CLK TUNER TAPE P.B 2 TAPE REC CN311 3 SOURCE SELECTOR IC 302 CDR P.B AUDIO CN351 V SIG IC 303 CDR REC 1 DVD REAR A IC 304 B DVD REAR C D E F G 2-3 RX-8010VBK Standard schematic diagrams Power supply section RY62 RY63 QSK0088-001 QSK0088-001 5 CN811 D67 1SS133 PW10 131 PW20 132 PW11 113 PW17 PW12 112 111 PW13 123 4 F61 122 PW14 121 F62 PW15 134 R61 CN55 C69 0.047MY PW40 PW30 TA1 TA2 C1 0.0047 T2 QQT0281-005 1SS133 C54 470/16 C45 0.0047 R53 6.8 C44 470/16 D46 MTZ6.2JB D71 1SR35-400A D72 1SR35-400A Q42 KTD863/Y/ Q52 KTD863/Y/ R44 C52 1000/25 1000/35 KRC105M D56 MTZ6.2JA R72 3.3k 22/50 C73 R73 22K CN491 PW19 D57 TH71 QAD0095-4R7 C71 100/63 D75 MTZ8.2JC Q74 KTC3200/GL/ C74 1/50 2 D53 1SR35-400A D73 C70 1SR35-400A 220/50 Q71 KTA1046/Y/ sheet 3/11 PW29 F1 Q53 RY1 QSK0098-001 820 3300/35 C66 C51 0.0047/100 R54 820 D63 10E2-FD C65 CN71 CN82 PW18 R1 3.3M C55 0.0047 C63 0.1MY Q61 KRC105M C62 0.1MY 1SR35-400A 100K 1SR35-400A D62 D54 1SR35-400A D52 D61 10E2-FD C61 0.1MY R67 12 C68 0.047MY R74 CN72 PW28 FW51 D51 1SR35-400A 3 PW26 CN56 D64 CN402 PW16 133 1SR35-400A sheet 10/11 3.3 D74 C72 MTZ33JC 22/50 EP51 1 SHEET NUMBER 1/11 2/11 3/11 4/11 5/11 6/11 7/11 8/11 9/11 10/11 11/11 A CIRUIT DISCRIPTION Parts are safety assurance parts. When replacing those parts make sure to use the specified one. POWER SUPPLY MAIN AUDIO AUDIO SIGNAL INPUT VIDEO SIGNAL INPUT AUDIO AMP (FRONT CHANNEL) AUDIO AMP (CENTER, REAR CHANNEL) DSP DVD SYSTEM CONTROL TUNER SHEET 1/11 B C 2-4 D E F G H RX-8010VBK sheet 6/11 sheet 7/11 sheet 8/11 sheet 6/11 sheet 8/11 R831 12 C833 0.022 sheet 7/11 C841 220P sheet 8/11 C845 220p Main & Speaker terminal section R833 10 C835 0.022 C842 220P CN706 0.022 CN723 10 CN705 R834 C836 5 CN702 CN721 C834 0.022 D831 1SS133 RY831 CN701 CN703 C846 220P C847 220P 0.022 C837 0.022 C839 0.022 C838 ST831 C840 0.022 C848 220P C844 R838 10 220P D832 1SS133 RY832 12 C843 220P R837 10 R832 CN823 CN813 R835 12 4 D835 12 R816 3.3k C801 R815 RY833 D816 MTZ18JC 1SS133 C816 47/25 D801 R801 100K C891 220P D804 R844 100K C885 0.022 30DF2-FC R845 82K ST851 C892 220P C887 0.022 C884 0.022 220P D852 RY871 QSK0109-001 C888 0.022 C889 R887 10 C883 0.022 4.7/50 D842 1SS133 4.7/50 R860 6.8K C851 C852 4.7/50 C853 CN881 3.9K R855 CN831 Q830 KRC109M R857 6.8K 1SS133 D844 1SS133 Q832 KRC109M D841 MTZ5.1JC 22K D843 22K Q831 KRC109M R863 6.8K R858 4.7K C850 4.7/50 R856 R862 22K D825 Q823 KTC3199/GL/ 47/16 R824 130K Q825 KTA1268/GL/ C823 R864 4.7K 2 R859 S831 1SS133 100K 47k R813 C893 220P R861 4.7K Q824 KTC3200/GL/ R823 10K D871 1SS133 C824 R814 10k Q812 KTC3200/GL/ R826 R825 10K D811 R871 12 10/25 RY852 1SS133 12 R812 3.3K C811 0.0047 R888 10 R852 Q811 2SD2395/EF/ R811 C890 3 220P 100K C886 82K R843 D802 30DF2-FC C881 0.022 220P R842 R885 10 R802 100K C808 CN824 D851 CN814 R841 100K 1SS133 12 RY851 C807 R851 C802 6800/71 CN801 6800/71 D803 30DF2-FC C805 sheet 1/11 30DF2-FC FW881 R865 4.7K D845 1SS133 FRONT Signal sheet 3/11 R91 R92 CENTER Signal REAR Signal R866 4.7K 470 J91 470 FW931 C92 470P C91 470P Parts are safety assurance parts. When replacing those parts make sure to use the specified one. R867 10K D846 1SS133 Q833 KRC109M Q834 KRC109M Q836 Q835 KRC109M KRC109M 1 SHEET 2/11 A B C D E F G 2-5 RX-8010VBK Audio section R916 8.2 R915 8.2 R961 12 R951 12 C952 0.0047 C972 0.0047 R941 33 Q941 2SD2395/EF/ Q961 KTA1046/Y/ C942 0.0047 C962 0.0047 C971 100/25 C951 100/25 D971 MTZ10JC C921 100/25 R943 2.7K D941 MTZ5.6JC R917 10 R932 43 33 C941 100/25 D961 MTZ13JC C932 0.0047 R922 33 C961 100/25 R953 2.2K R931 43 Q931 2SD2395/EF/ C931 100/25 R923 2.7K D921 MTZ5.6JC R933 2.7K D931 MTZ6.2JC D902 1SR35-400A D951 MTZ13JC C922 0.0047 R942 R963 2.2K R973 3.3K R921 33 Q921 2SD2395/EF/ D900 1SR35-400A Q951 2SD2395/EF/ D901 R971 12 Q971 2SD2395/EF/ 1SR35-400A 5 Q908 KRC105M CN81 4 D905 1SS133 4/8_OUT C984 330P C981 330P C982 330P C983 330P EP901 Q903 KRC105M Q904 KRC105M Q905 KRC105M Q906 KRC105M 1.5 C902 sheet 10/11 SUB_RELAY C_RELAY S_MUTE DSPRESET DSPCOMMAND DSPSTATUS DSPCLK DSPREADY SW_MUTE 4/8_OUT TUNER_CK TUNER_CE RDS_DATA RDS_CLK TUNER_DATA PROTECT 4/8_IN M_BUSY TUNED STEREO RDS_ST C905 0.022 TUNER_MUTE SUR_RELAY CN931 R930 10K D904 1SS133 F2_RELAY C904 2.2/50 CN241 CN601 sheet 5/11 R925 220 DSPCLK DSPSTATUS R926 220 DSPCOMMAND R927 220 DSPREADY R928 220 DSPRESET R929 220 VCR1_S/C VCR2_S/C DVD_S/C DBS_S/C OSD_DAT OSD_CLK VIDEO5 VIDEO6 M_BUSY M_RESET STANDBY_LED VCR_S/C F1_RELAY 220 VIDEO2 VIDEO3 VIDEO4 OSD_CS 220 220 220 VIDEO1 D993 1SS133 4/8_IN 100P VIDEO1 PROTECT VIDEO6 VOL_STB VIDEO4 VIDEO3 VIDEO2 C993 sheet 5/11 220 220 R985 R986 R987 MAIN_CLK MAIN_STB VOL_DAT VOL_CLK R936 220 RDS_DATA R935 220 RDS_CLK CN201 R983 R984 M_COMMAND M_STATUS M_CS Q907 KRC105M 330 100/6.3 R903 C901 8MHz RDS_ST R934 220 SUBV_STB SUB_DAT SUB_CLK SUB_STB MAIN_DAT M_CS R910 22k R999 10K CN102 C903 IC903 IC-PST9139 FL992 QQR0590-001 X901 R911 4.7K 22K C991 0.0056 C992 0.0056 Q901 KRC107M R991 4.7K FL991 QQR0590-001 R908 2 sheet 11/11 R937 220 TUNER_DATA TUNER_CE R938 220 TUNER_CK R939 220 TUNER_MUTE TUNED STEREO IC901 MN101C49GHM OSD_DAT OSD_CS OSD_CLK M_COMMAND M_STATUS M_CLK M_RESET C975 470/6.3 R992 4.7K CN101 C985 0.01 2200/6.3 R975 22 SUB_MUTE S_MUTE SW_MUTE M_CLK 220 F1_RELAY HP_RELAY 1SS133 C986 0.1 220 R982 SUR_RELAY C_RELAY F2_RELAY D979 D978 D977 D975 D976 R995 13K SUBV_STB SUB_PRE R980 R981 SUB_PRE SUB_RELAY R993 6.2K sheet 4/11 sheet 2/11 CN400 VIDEO5 SUB_MUTE R976 4.7K R978 4.7K R997 15K HP_RELAY 10K 10K R968 R969 10K R965 STANDBY_LED R924 10K CN303 3 FW831 R998 5.6K R977 4.7K R956 R996 3.3K 220 220 220 R994 5.1K R954 R955 R979 4.7K VOL_CLK VOL_DAT DVD_S/C VCR1_S/C VCR2_S/C DBS_S/C VIDEO_S/C R945 220 R946 220 R947 220 R948 220 R949 220 R966 R967 R944 220 R940 4.7 sheet 4/11 MAIN_STB MAIN_CLK MAIN_DAT SUB_STB SUB_CLK SUB_DAT -15V +15V VOL_STB 10K 10K CN301 CN932 sheet 2/11 C994 270P TUNER Signal sheet 6/11 1 Parts are safety assurance parts. When replacing those parts make sure to use the specified one. SHEET 3/11 A B C 2-6 D E F G H RX-8010VBK Audio / V Audio signal input section 2.2k 470 C331 C332 220p 220p 47/16 R311 C315 100k 47/16 C316 100p 100k 100/10 R312 100/10 C314 C309 47k C313 47k 100p 100p C303 R303 100p R345 100k 100k 100k C344 10/50 C1202 22/25 C339 560p R346 R343 100k 100k R344 R341 R342 TUNER-R 100k IC302 R332 470 CDR.PLAY-R CD-L R331 10/50 C342 IC303 BA15218F 10/50 J303 4 CDR.PLAY-L SUB-R CDR.REC-R R1202 68 C1209 560p TUNER-L 220p 470 PLAY-R R330 470 CDR.PLAY-R 220p CDR.REC-L R328 470 SUB-L R329 C330 PLAY-R 220p 220p 220p CDR.PLAY-L C328 220p C329 CD-R C327 C1201 22/25 J302 CD-L R327 470 REC-R PLAY-L PLAY-L C335 22/25 R326 470 C343 10/50 R1201 68 IC391 TC9164AF-X C326 REC-R C325 CD-R CDR.REC-R 220p R325 470 R335 68 R324 470 CDR.REC-L 220p REC-L IC303 BA15218F C341 J301 REC-L C324 R316 330 470 V.SIG.R C323 470k 4.7/50 TUNER-R R323 470 C312 0.0068MY R310 TUNER-L CD-L 4.7/50 4.7/50 470k IC301 NJM4580DD CDR.PLAY-R 220p 39k V.SIG.L 220p R334 0.0018MY C308 R308 PLAY-R C322 620 R309 39k CDR.PLAY-L 390p C321 C306 CD-R C334 0.0018MY C307 0.0068MY R307 PLAY-L C333 390p 470 C305 IC301 NJM4580DD TC9164AF-X R333 C302 C311 620 C310 R302 R305 R306 C304 5 R315 330 C301 4.7/50 R304 R301 2.2k C336 22/25 R336 68 IC304 BA15218F C361 DVD-LS R365 100k C363 4.7/50 R366 100k C364 sheet 6/11 VOL_STB VOL_CLK VOL_DATA CN311 QGB2510K1-14 TUNER-R CN351 QGB1214K1-16S TUNER-L 4.7/50 4.7/50 DVD-LS DVD-RS IC304 BA15218F VOL_STB VOL_CLK VOL_DATA DVD-RS C362 V.SIG.L V.SIG.R 100k 100k 100k R361 R363 R362 100k R364 4.7/50 sheet 3/11 3 R1229 100k IC395 BA15218F R379 470 VCR2.REC-L R381 VCR2.PLAY-L C378 220p 220p C379 C380 220p 220p C381 C382 220p 220p C1261 C1262 220p 220p J371 R378 R1251 10k R1252 10k Q1250 2SC3576-JVC-T 470 Q1248 2SC3576-JVC-T 1k R1254 R1243 100k 470 R382 470 R1241 100k R1242 100k R1226 100k 1k J372 C1227 4.7/50 47/25 IC395 BA15218F C1245 22/50 C1242 4.7/50 10/50 R1228 68 C1224 10/50 IC394 BA15218F C1228 4.7/50 C1226 47/25 R1231 1k C1229 4.7/50 R1227 68 C1222 SUB-R C1244 4.7/50 VCR1.PLAY-R R380 C1223 10/50 R1225 100k IC393 TC9459F R1244 100k R1250 10k R1248 C1225 C1221 SUB-L 10/50 R1249 10k 470 VCR1.REC-R C1243 4.7/50 1k C1230 4.7/50 C1233 10/50 R1230 100k R1232 470k REAR.SIG.R SUB-R SUB.SIG.R VIDEO-R VCR2.PLAY-R 22/25 VCR1.PLAY-R C1211 USB-R R1211 68 V.SIG.R VCR2.REC-R VCR1.REC-R VIDEO-R VCR2.PLAY-R VCR1.PLAY-R USB-R 22/25 TV/DBS-R C385 DVD.F-R R385 68 REAR.AMP.R R1262 470 DVD.F-R 470 Q1234 2SC3576-JVC-T 1k J373 R1261 R1236 10k R1234 1k R1245 SUB.PRE Q1245 KRA104M Q1233 2SC3576-JVC-T C1232 22/50 VCR2.REC-R VCR2.PLAY-R R1235 10k SUB.MUTE SUB.V.STB SUB.DATA 220p C377 R376 R1247 100k C376 220p 470 TV/DBS-R 1k 2SC3576-JVC-T Q1247 100k C375 R374 2SC3576-JVC-T Q1249 R1223 220p DVD.F-R R1224 C374 220p R1253 470 TV/DBS-R 2 470 C373 R372 Q1231 KRA104M SUB.CLK 470 R377 VCR1.PLAY-L 220p 100k 470 VCR1.REC-L C372 R1221 R375 470 C371 220p C1231 220p 100k R373 TV/DBS-L 470 R1222 R371 DVD.F-L R1233 1k IC394 BA15218F C1241 4.7/50 AUDIO Signal R393 C395 120p C397 10/50 B REAR.AMP.L REAR.SIG.L SUB.SIG.L VIDEO AUDIO Signal sheet 6/11 C Parts are safety assurance parts. When replacing those parts make sure to use the specified one. SUB.V.STB SUB.PRE SUB.MUTE S.MUTE SW.MUTE CN313 QGB2510K1-13 SUB.CLK SUB.DATA S.MUTE SW.MUTE REAR.SIG.L REAR.SIG.R REAR.AMP.L REAR.AMP.R 470 R390 V.SIG.L V.SIG.R SUB-L SUB-R 470 470 CN371 QGB1214K1-14S sheet 10/11 A PHONO Signal C1219 560p VIDEO-L 470 CN416 QGA2501F1-06 R388 R389 1 R387 VIDEO-R R1212 68 SUB-L 10k 22/25 VIDEO-L C1212 R386 68 VCR2.PLAY-L 560p VCR1.PLAY-L C396 120p C389 USB-L 22/25 TV/DBS-L C386 DVD.F-L USB-R V.SIG.L 5.1k R394 R398 100k C398 10/50 VCR2.REC-L 5.1k R396 VCR1.REC-L 10/50 R392 VIDEO-L IC372 BA15218F C394 1200p C392 TUNER Signal USB-L R397 100k VCR2.PLAY-L IC372 BA15218F IC392 TC9163AF-X VCR1.PLAY-L 5.1k C393 1200p IC371 TC9163AF-X USB-L 10k R395 TV/DBS-L R391 5.1k DVD.F-L C391 10/50 SHEET 4/11 sheet 2/11 D E F G 2-7 RX-8010VBK Video / S video signal input section 5 R253 R254 R255 CN200 QGB2510K1-11 2.2 R225 C276 R274 MB90088 15p C271 100P C220 C257 47/16 C256 0.01 BA7625 75 75 C277 4.7/50 C251 R247 0.047 75 R271 47p 27p 0.001 270p 120p C222 C223 C224 C225 C210 4.7/50 C221 22u Q241 KTA1267/YG C260 0.047 C255 L200 10k 4.7/50 75 C270 100P 47k C252 470/6.3 C261 R268 R283 XD EXD Q203 KRC107M R218 330 3.3 R269 10p 3 10k R282 150 150 R250 R248 IC242 R275 R276 300 300 Q202 KRC110M C274 470/6.3 150 R281 R216 C272 0.047 47k C258 0.01 C259 47/16 C219 150 R214 Q201 KTA1267/YG 75 YOUT VOUT COUT CS SIN SCLK 150 Q200 KTA1267/YG R272 75 C273 0.047 47P R273 X200 470/6.3 10k 47k R217 R213 J243 C275 47P R215 75 C226 47P 0.047 C206 C207 4.7/50 R251 150 R221 100 R220 150 C216 4.7/50 75 R206 1SS133 75 75 R246 4.7/50 IC203 330 1SS133 R245 47k R212 D241 C247 470/6.3 C250 470/6.3 R211 D240 C268 47P C217 470/10 C205 R204 IC241 BA7626 47k 150 4.7/50 J202 J203 R266 4.7/50 C214 C218 IN3 VOUT2 D 75 R205 560 560 560 C215 OUT1 IN2B OUT2 OUT3 CTL3 IN3A IN3B IN2 C204 R244 75 1.5 IN4 330 C246 0.047 sheet 3/11 Q246 KRC110M C249 0.047 R267 470/6.3 47k R210 75 C269 47P J242 IN1B Q244 KRC107M Q242 KTA1267/YG 75 C245 4.7/50 Q207 KTA1267/YG R249 R209 R203 C212 47/16 C213 0.01 IC202 NJM2285V-W Q240 KTA1267/YG R243 75 Q205 KTA1267/YG 4 4.7/50 R242 75 4.7/50 C203 R202 75 MOUT IN1 A IN5 VOUT1 sheet 3/11 R222 R223 R224 IC201 BA7625 4.7/50 75 Q206 KTA1267/YG 330 R201 Q204 KTA1267/YG J201 C202 R219 R208 1SS133 75 1SS133 C231 4.7/50 C244 0.047 R231 2.2k 300 C211 100/50 C201 C242 4.7/50 R280 0.01 D201 330 R200 R241 75 OSDCS OSDDATA OSDCLK 47/16 D200 R207 0.047 C254 0.047 C209 CN240 QGB2510K1-12 C241 R240 75 J241 C208 15k 15k 15k Q245 KRC110M Q243 KTA1267/YG Q247 KRC107M sheet 10/11 CN204 QGB1214K1-08S sheet 6/11 VIDE0C CN206 QGA2501F1-02 VIDEOY VIDEO C253 10p CN242 QGB1214K1-10S CN244 QGA2501F1-04 sheet 10/11 sheet 6/11 2 Parts are safety assurance parts. When replacing those parts make sure to use the specified one. 1 SHEET 5/11 A B C 2-8 D E F G H RX-8010VBK VIDEO5 VIDEO6 R1293 1.6k R1294 4.7k DCS TEXT AV_VCR YOSD DVD section 220p C1354 J1390 R1397 5.6 100/10V R1398 1k 100 R1373 220 R1374 220 47/25 0.01 C1377 47P R1380 75 C1384 47/25 R1381 75 C1385 4.7/50 C1387 C1386 4.7/50 C1388 47P R1383 75 C1390 47/25 J1380 C1389 47P R1382 75 C1380 47/25 C1383 47P R1379 75 47P 220p J1371 IC389 TC74HC4053AF R1372 R1394 27k C1371 R1384 75 C1391 4.7/50 C1392 4.7/50 D1370 100/10 R1281 4.7k C1393 IC390 MAX4018ESD R1282 4.7k R1284 C1394 100P R1388 47k C1396 470/6.3 1.1k R1283 1k 100P C1395 R1389 47k 100P 75 C1281 R1399 1.5k R1387 MA3062/H/-X 75 220 R1386 R1375 J1372 75 Q1392 KTA1273/Y/-T R1385 FW481 QUM134-10DGZ4 IC387 NJM2406F-X C1372 R1392 39k Q1391 KRA107M R1391 39k C1351 1000p C1378 C1353 0.1u 5 0.01 220p R1396 10k IC388 TC74HC4053AF R1395 100k C1382 47P 220 47/25 R1393 100k D1392 1SS133 C1381 470 C1375 D1391 1SS133 J1370 R1371 C1376 CN480 QJK017-031301 100/10 C1370 R1370 C1352 R1390 47k C1397 100/10 C1398 100/10 C1282 470/10 R1312 100k C1283 47/25 C1314 4.7/50 C1312 4.7/50 CN243 QGB1214J1-10S Yin VOL_STB VOL_DATA C1284 100/10 C1285 VOL_CLK 47/25 R1289 4.7k IC390 MAX4018ESD R1290 4.7k R1292 1.1k R1291 1k C1286 100/10 R1311 100k DSP_IN_R R1315 10k DATA C1307 22/16 R1308 470k R1323 1k REAR.SIG.R R1330 0 10/50 C1338 10/50 IC384 BA15218F R1321 100k CN732 WJP0026-001A C1336 R1329 0 R1334 10k 100k REAR.SIG.L C1337 10/50 100k Q1333 2SC3576-JVC-T R1336 1k S.MUTE R1337 R1335 10k Q1334 2SC3576-JVC-T IC384 BA15218F C1335 10/50 R1339 VOL_STB VOL_DATA C1325 0.22/50 REAR.SIG.L REAR.SIG.R REAR.AMP.L REAR.AMP.R C1321 4.7/50 C1323 4.7/50 C1306 47/25 CN381 QGB1214J1-14S V.SIG.L V.SIG.R SUB-L SUB-R VOL_CLK IC382 TC9459F Q1323 2SC3576-JVC-T R1340 R1324 10k C1329 220p 100k C1308 10/50 100k C1324 4.7/50 C1322 4.7/50 C1326 0.22/50 CCH R1338 R1322 100k R1333 1k sheet 4/11 sheet 2/11 Q1314 2SC3576-JVC-T R1316 1k STB C1303 220p DSP_IN_L R1303 1.2k DVD-C DSP.C DSP.LS DVD-LS DSP.L R1302 68 C1302 47/25 FRONT-L DSP.L DSP.R DSP.LS DSP.RS DSP.C DSP.SW R1306 68 2 SIG.L R1314 10k Q1307 KRA104M IC380 TC9162AN DSP_IN_L DSP_IN_R sheet 9/11 Q1313 2SC3576-JVC-T SIG.R R1307 1k S.MUTE CLK R1304 1.2k DVD-SW DSP.SW DVD-RS DSP.RS DSP.R R1301 68 C1301 47/25 FRONT-R R1313 1k Ymoni VIDEO5 VIDEO6 CN501 QGB1214J1-12S 3 CN731 QJP001-032301 C1316 0.22/50 C1315 0.22/50 C1313 4.7/50 R1305 68 IC381 TC9459F C1311 4.7/50 C1305 47/25 AV_VCR DCS TEXT CN205 QGB1214J1-08S Yin YOSD Cin Cmoni sheet 5/11 R1288 R1287 1k C1319 220p Ymoni sheet 5/11 IC390 MAX4018ESD R1286 4.7k 1.1k Cin Cmoni 4 R1285 4.7k SIG.C R1332 100k C1334 4.7/50 REAR.AMP.R C1339 220p sheet 8/11 DSP_IN_L IC383 TC9459F R1351 68 FRONT-R R1356 2.2k C1333 4.7/50 R1358 3.9k DSP_IN_R VOL_STB VOL_DATA FRONT-L C1344 47/25 IC385 BA15218F VOL_CLK R1355 2.2k R1357 3.9k C1331 4.7/50 sheet 4/11 FRONT-L FRONT-R DVD-LS DVD-RS STB CLK DATA VOL_STB VOL_CLK VOL_DATA REAR.AMP.L C1332 4.7/50 CN361 QGB1214J1-16S V.SIG.L V.SIG.R SUB-L SUB-R AUDIO Signal R1350 68 R1331 100k C1343 47/25 R1362 560 R1368 C1366 C1364 4.7/50 4.7/50 R1341 100k CENTER Signal R1343 18k 1k R1344 R1346 10k FRONT Signal C1341 4.7/50 R1342 10k 100k R1348 470 100k 100k R1366 100k R1364 C1362 390P J1360 470k Q1343 KRA104M R1349 390P C1345 100k 4.7/50 470 IC385 C1342 BA15218F R1345 Q1341 2SC3576-JVC-T DVD-C Q1342 2SC3576-JVC-T C1365 R1367 R1365 4.7/50 R1347 J1340 100k R1363 IC386 BA15218F C1363 100k 1 390P C1361 R1361 560 Parts are safety assurance parts. When replacing those parts make sure to use the specified one. DVD-SW 4.7/50 IC386 BA15218F REAR Signal SHEET 6/11 A B C D E F G 2-9 RX-8010VBK Audio amplifier section (1/2) Q771 KTC3200/GL/ R771 390 R779 0.22( 7W) C795 0.022 Q773 KTA1268/GL/ R781 390 L791 1 R793 10 R797 15K D773 1SS133 R715 100K R763 10 R711 620 C707 100/16 R795 1K R777 200 R773 390 D791 C719 0.0047MY Q781 2SD637( Q.R) R789 470 Q763 C791 0.047 C793 0.047 C753 47P C741 47/100 390 R729 Q711 KTC3200/GL/ 33K R703 100K R727 C703 100P 390 R709 9.1K R731 Q703 2SC2240-BL/AB D703 R723 1SS133 390 Q701 2SC2240-BL/AB 10P C709 R783 620 TH783 QAD0012-202 Q709 KTA1268/GL/ R725 1.5K Q705 KTA1268/GL/ R717 5.6K C717 22P( 500V) C715 68P C705 100P R787 47K Q791 KTA1268/GL/ R791 33 C713 68P R719 10K R701 C701 2.2K 10/35 Q761 R775 200 VR787 500 D701 1SS133 C751 47P D771 1SS133 Q707 KTA1268/GL R733 220 C711 0.01 5 R761 10 1SS133 R707 2K R721 150 R705 2K C745 47/100 4 CN711 sheet 2/11 3 R762 10 R722 150 Q762 Q772 KTC3200/GL/ KTA1268/GL/ R764 10 R712 620 C708 100/16 R794 10 Q764 C792 0.047 C794 0.047 FRONT Signal C754 47P C742 47/100 R730 D774 1SS133 R716 100K L792 1 R798 15K C720 0.0047MY Q782 2SD637( Q.R) R796 1K R778 200 R774 390 Parts are safety assurance parts. When replacing those parts make sure to use the specified one. C746 47/100 390 R728 Q712 KTC3200/GL/ 33K C796 0.022 D792 C718 22P( 500V) 390 R732 Q704 2SC2240-BL/AB D704 R724 1SS133 390 R704 100K R784 620 R782 390 R710 9.1K C704 100P C710 10P C706 100P Q702 2SC2240-BL/AB R780 0.22( 7W) R790 470 TH784 QAD0012-202 Q710 R726 1.5K Q706 KTA1268/GL/ C712 0.01 R734 220 R718 5.6K R720 10K R702 C702 2.2K 10/35 R772 390 R792 33 C714 68P C716 68P Q792 KTA1268/GL/ R776 200 VR788 500 D702 1SS133 R788 47K D772 1SS133 Q708 KTA1268/GL 2 C752 47P 1SS133 R708 2K Q774 KTA1268/GL/ R706 2K 1 CN712 sheet 2/11 A B C 2-10 D E SHEET 7/11 F G H RX-8010VBK Audio amplifier section (2/2) R1721 220 C1713 2.2/50 R1703 2k C1703 100P Q1701 2SC2240( A,B) CN722 R1731 1K R1723 3.3k C1705 5P Q1772 KTA1268/GL/ C1701 1/50 Q1702 2SC2240( A,B) R1701 2.2K R1722 3.3k R1712 56K Q1751 2SD2390/OPY/-F6 C1715 47/50 R1711 330 R1705 12K R1724 3.3k C1704 100/16 R1702 68K C1702 100P R1795 47K C1741 47/100 D1771 1SS133 Q1771 KTC3200/GL/ D1701 1SS133 Q1731 2SD637( Q,R) C1712 0.01MY R1732 390 C1711 33P TH731 QAD0012-202 5 C1751 47P R1751 10 Q1703 KTA1268/GL/ R1771 Q1791 KTA1268/GL/ 390 R1773 200 R1753 0.22 R1774 200 C1791 0.022 R1791 1K R1772 L1761 0.45u 390 D1772 1SS133 Q1752 2SB1560/OPY/-F6 R1761 33 R1762 10 R1793 18K CENTER Signal C1761 0.047 R1752 10 D1791 1SS133 C1762 0.047 C1752 47p R1725 3.3k REAR Signal C1743 47/100 R1741 220 4 Parts are safety assurance parts. When replacing those parts make sure to use the specified one. CN713 sheet 2/11 R1821 220 Q1801 2SC2240( A,B) C1809 5P C1817 47/50 R1811 330 R1809 12K C1803 R1803 68K R1877 200 R1873 C1891 0.022 R1802 C1802 1/50 2.2K C1806 100P Q1802 2SC2240( A,B) R1891 1K L1861 0.45u 390 Q1853 2SB1560/OPY/-F6 R1814 56K R1861 33 R1863 10 R1810 12K C1861 0.047 C1853 47p R1829 3.3k R1832 1K R1826 3.3k C1810 5P C1818 47/50 R1812 330 R1893 18K D1891 1SS133 R1824 3.3k C1804 C1863 0.047 R1804 68K C1808 100/16 R1872 R1896 47K C1842 47/100 Q1892 KTA1268/GL/ 390 R1876 200 R1856 0.22 R1878 200 R1874 C1892 0.022 R1892 1K Q1854 2SB1560/OPY/-F6 R1862 33 R1864 10 L1862 0.45u 390 D1874 1SS133 R1828 3.3k R1894 18K C1862 0.047 R1854 10 D1892 1SS133 C1864 0.047 C1854 47p R1830 3.3k C1843 47/100 Q1852 2SD2390/OPY/-F6 D1872 1SS133 Q1872 KTC3200Y/GR R1855 0.22 R1853 10 2 D1802 1SS133 Q1891 KTA1268/GL/ 390 C1814 0.01MY Q1832 2SD637( Q,R) R1871 R1875 200 D1873 1SS133 R1827 3.3k C1807 100/16 Q1871 KTC3200Y/GR R1831 1K Q1831 2SD637( Q,R) R1825 3.3k C1812 33P Q1874 KTA1268/GL/ C1805 100P R1823 3.3k Q1851 2SD2390/OPY/-F6 C1841 47/100 D1871 1SS133 Q1873 KTA1268/GL/ R1801 C1801 1/50 2.2K Q1803 2SC2240( A,B) R1813 56K R1833 390 D1801 1SS133 C1813 0.01MY TH831 QAD0012-202 C1811 33P C1852 47P R1852 10 Q1806 KTA1268/GL/ R1895 47K R1834 390 R1851 10 Q1805 KTA1268/GL/ R1822 220 C1816 2.2/50 R1806 2k C1851 47P Q1804 2SC2240( A,B) C1815 2.2/50 R1805 2k TH832 QAD0012-202 3 C1844 47/100 R1841 220 R1842 220 CN715 CN716 sheet 2/11 sheet 2/11 1 SHEET 8/11 A B C D E F G 2-11 RX-8010VBK DSP section R2560 220 C2013 33P C2009 0.1 C2019 0.1 R2024 C2707 0.1 R2433 82K LOUT3 IC529 BA15218F C2440 0.1 IC528 22K BA15218F C2442 0.1 Q2164 2SD1328/ST R2159 11k IC528 BA15218F R2157 100K R2134 10K R2131 100K C2134 0.022 R2127 C2107 4.7/25 C2137 4.7/25 R2105 1K C2133 0.022 R2133 1k SUBWFR C2101 0.01 R2129 22K C2136 10/16 Q2101 2SD1328/ST R2107 100K 2 R2427 100K R2582 R2583 R2584 R2585 R2586 22K R2181 TEST Q2151 DTA114YE R2182 A1 C2512 A5 A4 A3 A2 C2513 A9 A8 A7 A6 R2612 TPPB13 TPHA9 TPHA8 TPHAS TPHAD7 TPHAD6 TPHAD5 C2535 100/4 C2534 0.1 C579 100P Q570 DTC114YE Q2152 DTA114YE 1M R2611 Tx Rx IC581 uPD784215AGC132 C2158 33P 1M 4.3K DSPREADY 4.3K DSPCLK 4.3K DSPCOMMAND C2187 2.2/50 C2189 33P R2158 30k CN588 R574 R575 R576 ROUT3 R2137 10K R2189 220 SS 220 HREQ 220 SCK 220 MOSI 220 MISO R2187 100K IC529 BA15218F C2157 2.2/50 220 C2427 1/50 R2429 10K Q2431 2SD1328/ST C2441 0.1 10K C2533 0.1 8.2K 8.2K R2407 100K DSP_RST 8.2K C2439 0.1 Q2163 2SD1328/ST Q572 DTC114YE R579 R578 10K R2597 1K 220 IC582 TC7SET32FU C2433 33P LC503 NQR0322-001 IC503 TC7S04FU 220 D_CS 2.2K R2136 Q2157 DTA114YE 220 %PD/DIR% R2425 10K R2581 R2130 100k Q2165 2SD1328/ST C2138 4.7/25 R580 C2401 0.001 C2407 1/50 R2132 10K SCK R2589 33P LC502 NQR0322-001 C2505 Q2156 DTA114YE C2354 R2135 R2405 1K R2360 10K DSPSTATUS R2183 Q2154 DTA114YE AUDIO Signal 10K R582 Q2153 DTA114YE R2485 1K C2481 47/6.3 C571 R577 8.2K R573 4.3K CENTER Signal IC583 PQ3DZ53 C581 10/16 C582 10/16 C583 47/6.3 C587 0.1 CN581 QGB1214K3-12W sheet 6/11 A B REAR Signal C588 47/6.3 C584 0.1 C589 C590 0.1 100/4 D.GND SUBWFR C SR SL R L RIN LIN A.-15V A.+15V A.+5V X581 6.14MHz 1 RESET DSPREADY DSPCOMMAND DSPSTATUS DSPCLK RESET 0.01 FRONT Signal R570 10K C577 100P AUTO ERR FS96 1M R2184 1M WRITE A13 A8 A9 A11 READ A10 CE D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 IC505 PQ070XZ1HZ C573 0.1 R2587 R2358 22K C2523 0.1 ROUT2 220 C_CS 220 CCLK 220 CDTO 220 CDTI R2352 11k Q2155 DTA114YE C2358 1/50 IC527 BA15218F IC511 W24L010AJ-12 DSP_RST R2364 100K R2354 C2352 2.2K 1/50 A15 A16 A14 A12 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 D0 D1 D2 C2532 100/4 C2504 TPPB14 C2529 100/4 R2356 10k IC526 BA15218F C2308 1/50 R2128 C2135 22K 10/16 R2101 10K R2502 C2509 C2350 0.1 C2514 C2516 47K 47K R2702 R2701 Q2363 2SD1328/ST C2348 33P R2401 10K 220 220 R2363 100K 0.1 TPHAD4 Q2364 2SD1328/ST R2306 1K C LOUT2 C2356 1/50 R2355 10k R2350 30K Q2401 2SD1328/ST C2357 1/50 R2591 220 SR R2359 10K IC527 BA15218F R2519 R2308 100K 2.2K IC526 BA15218F R2302 10K Q2302 2SD1328/ST 0.1 C2351 TPHAD2 TPHAD3 220 C2302 0.001 R2353 TPHAD0 TPHAD1 C2506 MOSI MISO R2520 R2515 C2355 R2351 11k 30K R2503 R2517 10K LRCK R2307 100K 22k R2593 R2594 R2595 R2596 3 C2301 0.001 33P R2357 R2186 1M Q2301 2SD1328/ST C2307 1/50 C2353 TPTDO TPTDI TPTCK TPTMS C2536 0.1 C2507 C2501 0.01 SCKB SS HREQ D/A0 D/A1 D/A2 R2305 1K R2301 10K C2258 2.2/50 10k R2514 10K R2613 47k R2614 TPMODD 47K TPMODC R2615 47K TPMODB R2616 TPMODA 47K C2284 33P R2349 SL X2501 12.5MHz C2508 TP607 R2276 6.8k 1M C2510 C2521 220 0.1 R2258 100K R2516 C2502 33P C2349 C2706 0.1 R2274 10K R2284 R2264 10K IC501 XCA56367PV150 C2503 ROUT1 R2286 11k R2501 C2705 0.1 R2518 IC525 BA15218F IC524 BA15218F C2262 4.7/25 C2230 4.7/25 C2347 C2704 47/6.3 R2257 100K Q2274 2SD1328/ST EP561 E409182-001SM R2505 C2703 47/6.3 R2511 R2512 R2513 10K 33K R2236 33K IC571 AK4527BVQ 10k 10k R2234 68K C2238 33P C2712 0.1 C2519 R2275 6.8k R2273 10K J564 IC502 TC7S04FU READ WRITE 10k R2222 33K C2208 1/50 R2221 33K 1K LOUT1 Q2273 2SD1328/ST R2262 100K K2606 NQR0269-004 CE C2518 CDTO CDTI CCLK C_CS R2523 R2522 R2521 R2238 R2206 C2257 2.2/50 C2256 0.1 C2254 0.1 RX4 C2511 IC525 BA15218F R2171 1M R R2232 33K R2208 100K R2261 100K R2573 5.1K 220 A0 LC501 NQR0322-001 0.001 IC523 BA15218F 0.1 R2715 4.3K C2701 220P C2202 C2255 R2431 R2202 10K Q2202 2SD1328/ST 10k R2277 1M IC523 BA15218F R2283 IC524 BA15218F C2261 4.7/25 R2231 33K R2207 100K C2252 0.1 0.001 R2285 11k 0.1 R2225 100K R2227 100K C2201 C2253 R2233 33K 68K R2226 100K R2201 10K Q2201 2SD1328/ST R2237 C2251 0.1 C2283 R2278 1M C2207 R2205 1/50 1K L R2263 10k R2235 33K TP_RX4 UN563 GP1FA550RZ R2563 1.1K R2504 RIN- 330 C2563 0.1 TP_RX3 RX3 UN562 GP1FA550RZ C2522 0.01 C2014 33P C2237 33P AUTO R2572 5.1K K2607 NQR0269-004 D7 33P R2553 C2557 33P C2562 0.1 C2605 0.1 C2702 220P C2006 120P 220 C2710 47/6.3 R2008 10K 4 RIN+ 330 R2014 22K R2716 R2717 R2023 IC522 BA15218F R2012 22K 47K R2006 10K R2709 R2004 10K R2172 1M C2002 4.7/25 11k RIN R2010 10K R2703 C2008 390P IC521 BA15218F R2571 5.1K R2562 1.1K R2568 C2568 220 1.0/50 LOUT3 ROUT3 LOUT2 ROUT2 LOUT1 ROUT1 LINLIN+ RINRIN+ C2004 0.0012 R2002 100K C2515 A11 A10 R2017 4.7K A14 A13 A12 R2018 4.7K C2018 47/6.3 A16 A15 C2020 0.1 C2007 390P 0.1 BCK C2010 R2557 R2555 R2554 RX1 RX2 RX3 RX4 LIN+ 330 C2520 R2021 IC522 BA15218F D2 D1 D0 C2003 0.0012 R2001 100K R2013 22K R2011 22K DATA R2009 10K IC521 BA15218F DAUX BCK 220 DATA LRCK 220 ERR 220 FS96 UN561 GP1FA550RZ TP_RX2 RX2 R2559 220 R2551 18k C2005 120P R2005 10K %PD/DIR% C2517 R2003 10K 330 CDTO CDTI CCLK D_CS 256FS X2551 11.2896MHz C2552 27P LIN- D6 D5 D4 D3 C2001 4.7/25 LIN R2022 C2551 27P R2561 1.1K C2564 100P R2007 10K RX1 R2564 75 LC551 NQR0322-001 IC551 AK4112AVF C2556 0.1 C2555 0.1 C2601 0.1 C2553 100/4 UN560 GP1FA550TZ C2561 0.1 TP_RX1 DAUX D/A2 D/A1 D/A0 LRCK BCK 5 C2560 0.1 CN587 QGB1214K3-08W SHEET 9/11 sheet 3/11 C 2-12 D E F G H RX-8010VBK System control & FL display section C400 4.7/50 5 S36 S35 S34 S32 S31 S30 S29 S28 S27 S26 S25 S24 S23 S22 S21 S20 S19 S18 S17 S16 S15 S14 S13 S12 S11 S10 S33 RA403 QRB059J-104 RA402 QRB169J-104 S9 S8 S7 S6 S5 S4 S3 S2 S1 G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 RA401 QRB169J-104 G6 G7 G8 G9 G10 G11 G12 G13 G14 G15 G16 G17 RA400 QRB169J-104 C409 4.7/50 C410 4.7/50 G17 Q403 VCRI VCRO DCSI R457 G16 S16 R456 S15 R455 4 G15 C406 DTC114YKA G14 S14 D405 DTC114YKA 1SS133 Q408 G17 S13 Q404 10k 470 DTC114TKA 10k DTC114YKA 330p Q407 G1 DTC144WKA Q402 G13 G12 G11 G10 G9 G8 G7 G6 G5 G4 G3 G2 G1 S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S9 S10 CN412 QGF1205F1-08 S11 S12 DCSO DI400 QLF0084-001 S17 S18 S19 S20 S21 S22 M_COMMAND S24 IC400 S25 MN101CP35DHL1 (One time) MN101C35DHL1 (Mask) S26 M_CLK M_STATUS VCRI DCSI S27 C443 100/10 BASS_LED S35 DIRECT_LED S36 DSP_LED VPP M_RESET LED_CLK IC402 LED_LCK R444 sheet 4/11 TV_DBS_LED D416 SLR-342VC VIDEO_LED D417 SLR-342VC VCR2_LED D418 SLR-342VC VCR1_LED D419 SLR-342VC DVD_MULTI_LED D420 SLR-342VC DVD_LED D421 SLR-342VC R463 220 M_RESET R464 220 S429 B408 B402 B409 B403 DTA114YKA 220 Q412 DTA114YKA 330 R467 DTA114YKA BASS_LED Q410 R465 R436 1k R437 R438 R439 B407 B401 R440 B400 R442 R428 S428 R441 R431 1k R424 1k R425 1k R426 1.2k R427 B406 R429 R417 1k R418 1k R419 1.2k R420 1.5k B405 S427 S430 B404 R432 1k S423 S426 S431 R433 1.2k S422 S425 R434 1.5k S416 S421 S424 R430 S415 S420 R421 2.2k S414 S419 R422 2.7k R410 1k R411 1k R400 1k R403 1k R404 1k R405 1.2k R412 1.2k R413 1.5k R414 2.2k S413 S418 R435 2.2k S409 S412 S417 R423 3.9k S408 S411 R415 2.7k S407 S410 R416 3.9k S406 R406 1.5k S405 R407 2.2k S404 R408 2.7k DTA114YKA Q414 R469 220 SLR-342VC D422 sheet 5/11 D423 R468 Q413 SURROUND_LED 220 DTA114YKA 47p CN406 WJP0025-001A S403 R409 3.9k S402 DSP_LED SLR-342VC C465 C431 0.022 R401 1k S401 R402 1.2k 75 S400 sheet 5/11 D415 SLR-342VC Q411 R452 10k 470p 470p C422 10k R450 C421 10k R449 470p 10k R448 C463 47p 47p 75 D414 SLR-342VC CD_LED 220 M_BUSY BU2092 C430 0.022 R472 D413 SLR-342VC PHONE_LED 220 R462 sheet 2/11 330 R443 1k C420 10k R447 10k 10k R446 R451 10k C462 220p 2 CDR_LED 0.022 1.5 R445 0.01 C461 220p R471 D412 SLR-342VC 220 R461 M_CS C404 C407 C412 100/6.3 C464 TAPE_LED 220 M_COMMANDR460 M_STATUS LED_DATA C440 C456 0.1 J400 D411 SLR-342VC 0.022 QAX0246-001Z X400 R470 75 USB_LED R466 CS2 CS1 KEY6 KEY5 KEY4 KEY3 KEY2 KEY1 LED_LCK K456 NQR0201-018X C460 C402 0.1 C401 0.1 D410 SLR-342VC R459 C408 LED_DATA 10/16 C441 0.1 R458 10k C438 22 C453 C454 C455 10P 10P 10P 3 DCSO S34 FM_AM_LED C442 100/10 C437 180 DIRECT_LED 22 S33 470p R477 VCRO C425 K453 K454 0.1 M_BUSY S32 B410 22 S31 470p 0.1 R476 IC404 GP1U281X M_CS C424 C436 R475 K452 R479 JS400 QSW0898-001 S30 470p NQR0201-018X K451 RM LED_CLK R473 1.5k 0.1 0.1 C439 0.1 C435 J401 QNZ0503-001 22p 1M PCM2702E-X S29 C423 R474 IC410 C433 K455 22p QAX0320-001Z JOG1 SURROUND_LED X410 NQR0201-018X C432 S28 R454 10k 1k CN410 QGF1205F1-10 M_CLK S23 R478 R453 10k IC411 NJU7241F33 CN422 QJK025-041201 S491 SLR-342VC D491 D490 SLR-342VC R490 2.7k S490 R491 3.9k D480 R481 2.2k SLR-342VC S482 S483 R482 2.7k S481 R483 3.9k S480 1 CN432 QGA2501C1-04 CN420 QJK025-031301 R480 1.5k CN430 QGA2501C1-03 SHEET 10/11 A B C D E F G 2-13 RX-8010VBK Tuner section 5 4 3 2 FM/TUNER Signal 1 AM Signal CN101 SHEET 11/11 sheet 3/11 A B C 2-14 D E F G H RX-8010VBK Printed curcuit boards Main board B521 5 B522 B523 CN491 B241 B524 CN72 B525 B526 B527 CN82 B528 B529 B530 B451 B453 R859 S831 B117 B452 B531 4 C833 C834 ST831 C839 C840 C883 R862 C884 C881 R860 ST851 B118 C853 R863 B119 C847 D844 C843 C886 C885 C848 C893 B116 R837 C846 C842 C838 B115 Q832 R861 C841 C835 R834 C836 R888 C845 B434 B433 R838 C888 C887 C892 C891 C844 B212 C889 B322 C890 B211 R833 C852 D843 B512 C837 R856 RY832 R887 R852 B511 B711 B712 Q831 R864 B113 B432 D852 R885 R857 D842 R802 R801 C851 D851 FW931 B435 RY833 B111 CN823 D835 B114 R832 D803 D802 D801 Q830 R858 R866 R865 D841 C802 C850 Q833 Q836 D846 3 D804 B120 R855 R867 B112 D831 R831 D832 R835 R851 RY831 Q835 RY851 CN824 B431 B321 RY852 B302 Q834 D845 C805 B303 D871 B501 B108 R871 CN831 C801 EP801 C808 CN801 RY871 CN881 CN813 CN814 B851 B760 B761 B305 B759 B755 B801 B802 B425 B803 CN721 CN723 2 B804 C807 CN703 R815 R817 B104 CN701 B751 B752 B103 B502 B430 B107 B429 B428 B805 D811 B852 B203 B301 B753 B758 B902 B307 B757 Q811 B421 B806 C823 B306 B703 B904 R812 C811 B754 B205 R811 R841 B101 B704 D816 R843 B201 R842 R844 B105 R818 C816 B426 R824 B701 B504 R845 C824 R826 R819 B106 Q824 Q825 B901 R816 CN705 B204 R825 D825 B756 CN706 R823 Q823 CN702 B309 B308 B423 B202 Q812 C820 R814 B102 R820 1 R813 B311 B312 A B C D E F G 2-15 RX-8010VBK Micon board FW51 PW28 131 RY1 D61 R66 C1 D63 C65 B3129 C63 C61 PW10 B3122 Q61 B3231 B3234 B3123 B3430 R55 B3232 B3233 D67 Q52 PW11 R54 CN71 B3333 B3332 C55 PW22 D56 PW12 C70 CN56 C54 12 VS1 B3236 D71 B3235 111 CN811 PW23 T2 PW13 PW27 13 112 RY62 FC4 10 CN55 PW29 Q53 TH71 B3334 11 113 PW40 B3124 C66 PW25 132 B3191 RY63 D57 D64 B3125 R67 D62 5 R61 B3120 B3230 B3121 C62 C71 Q71 D73 123 Q42 C72 R73 B3192 B3331 B3130 134 HS51 R51 B3335 B3336 B3337 R74 R53 Q51 FC64 FC63 FC2 D53 PW16 FC62 C51 B3126 C68 16 121 FC61 B3127 C69 CN402 FC1 PW30 C44 C53 D54 PW15 C74 B3238 D52 PW20 D51 PW17 C52 PW18 B3432 PW26 D46 B3431 PW14 133 B3128 B3203 D55 C901 R987 PW901 R911 R981 D904 R982 R980 C904 C905 B3104 EP51 B3103 B3301 R910 C982 R983 B3323 R936 HS971 B3102 B3101 R973 R971 CN101 R934 B3902 R938 C962 B3201 C952 HS951 Q951 D961 B3207 R954 B3208 R955 B3209 R956 B3202 B3306 B3403 B3240 B3241 B3242 CN201 B3109 B3110 B3305 C961 D951 C951 A B C 2-16 D E B3405 B3406 B3407 B3106 B3210 1 C972 B3135 B3205 C993 R992 R945 C992 R963 B3415 B3215 B3216 R917 R961 R951 B3213 B3217 B3131 FL992 B3414 B3319 B3219 R91 R946 R947 R948 R949 CN303 B3107 B3108 B3413 B3318 FW881 B3412 B3416 CN241 R926 R927 R928 C991 B3410 B3411 CN601 R929 J91 R92 R991 B3409 B3516 B3324 EP91 B3408 B3506 B3507 B3316 B3317 B3214 B3422 B3310 B3311 R925 C92 Q961 R944 B3309 B3218 C994 C91 C986 B3212 B3705 B3308 B3220 B3511 B3510 B3512 R940 R975 B3307 B3424 B3601 B3514 B3320 B3515 B3322 C931 R932 B3113 B3505 B3112 R915 Q903 Q904 Q905 Q906 Q907 D931 FL991 B3504 B3132 B3751 C932 PW911 B3343 Q931 R931 D971 C971 B3503 B3404 R933 R939 C975 B3502 B3418 R976 R978 B3321 CN81 R995 R993 B3111 CN301 B3114 R935 D993 B3501 R924 HS931 B3115 R908 R969 B3417 B3221 B3105 R968 R930 R967 D975 R997 B3702 C921 B3303 D921 R923 IC901 R966 D976 B3304 R922 C941 B3133 D941 R943 B3801 R979 R942 R965 D978 D977 R994 C922 R921 R941 CN931 2 R996 R977 B3901 B3508 CN932 C942 C984 R984 R903 B3704 R998 Q921 B3118 B3117 Q971 B3703 R937 B3421 B3211 C903 D979 Q941 C983 R999 B3116 D902 B3602 B3206 B3402 B3340 B3342 B3134 D901 B3341 D905 FW831 B3701 Q908 C985 B3204 HS921 D900 B3419 HS941 B3420 3 CN102 B3302 B3401 R985 X901 HS961 EP1 EP901 CN400 R52 Q901 TA2 TA1 C981 R986 IC903 C902 R1 R953 14 15 D75 PW19 122 D74 Q74 B3237 4 C45 FC6 FC5 PW21 D72 FC3 R44 R72 C73 PW24 F G H RX-8010VBK Front board B1115 R424 B1313 C431 R472 C465 C441 C461 C442 C462 C453 B1214 R431 B1222 B408 B1306 C410 B407 B1401 R459 R461 C401 C402 R440 B400 R438 R441 R439 B1101 B1501 B1701 B1225 B1317 B1905 B1904 B1305 B406 B409 B1221 B1223 CN410 B1402 R454 R453 R442 B1241 R462 R460 JS400 B1220 B410 X400 B1203 B1202 R463 S422 R464 S421 CN422 B1106 R467 B1309 B1403 B1301 B1205 B1302 B1211 B1212 R422 B1217 B1208 B1248 B1304 B1243 R426 D416 B1224 C426 C424 C425 B1245 C423 R421 B1215 R416 B1601 B1407 B1603 B1409 B1308 R444 Q411 R466 B1210 B1405 B1404 B1502 B1605 R443 Q410 R465 B1218 D417 B1116 B1240 B1201 B1410 C422 B1249 C421 B1107 R412 B1604 C432 B1109 R414 Q412 B1219 B405 R437 B404 R436 R432 R433 B401 R434 B402 R435 R427 R479 C408 B1246 R429 C404 B1406 IC400 B1315 IC402 R458 B1110 B1312 R449 B1244 R450 R448 R447 R446 R428 B1314 R430 RA403 B1903 B1906 C409 S426 Q408 C407 C412 C400 D418 S416 R452 B1251 R445 C420 B1250 B1703 S405 S414 B1307 B1267 C406 R405 B1261 B1262 S425 B403 B1253 B1256 S403 S404 B1415 B1310 B1311 B1254 R404 D419 C436 B1252 B1414 S406 R413 D420 R475 S411 R406 S413 R409 R457 R410 S412 R473 C435 S407 B1505 S409 R408 R455 R456 D405 Q404 B1113 B1112 B1111 Q402 D410 D411 B1216 R407 D423 Q403 D412 B1408 D421 R403 R425 B1117 C443 B1265 S402 R468 B1412 K455 R469 CN420 D413 S408 IC410 B1413 S410 S424 S420 D415 B1204 R402 R401 S401 Q414 Q413 R400 B1120 R478 IC411 C463 C430 R470 C456 B1108 D414 C439 R474 X410 R485 R476 C433 C455 C460 B1238 R471 R411 S418 R420 B1102 C464 C438 C437 J400 S400 4 R418 S423 S417 B1104 K456 J401 B1264 S431 S415 S419 C440 B1103 D422 R423 R415 R477 C454 K451 R417 R419 R451 K452 B1235 K454 B1114 B1236 K453 CN406 5 B1118 IC404 S427 S429 S428 S430 B1902 RA400 B1227 RA402 B1255 B1228 Q407 RA401 DI400 CN412 D491 D480 S490 R491 S480 CN430 S491 D490 CN432 3 R490 R480 S481 R481 S482 S483 R482 R483 2 1 A B C D E F G 2-17 A R1366 R1363 B C1341 C 2-18 C1361 J1360 D R1342 J1340 E Q1342 C1362 R1343 C1381 C1382 R1379 R1380 C1383 R1381 J1380 F J1370 R1370 R1374 R1292 R1291 C1285 R1392 C231 IC203 C220 C219 J202 CN480 D1391 D1370 R1373 J1372 G R1395 C222 C221 R275 CN200 C217 C218 R276 J242 C225 X200 C224 C216 L200 C271 R269 R268 C277 C207 C209 C223 C276 C273 C226 C206 Q202 R273 C275 C270 IC390 R1399 Q1392 R255 R247 C251 C252 C272 Q242 R251 R250 Q243 Q240 Q246 Q244 R282 R280 R283 Q247 Q245 R281 CN240 IC242 R206 R213 R215 Q203 R217 R272 Q1391 R1294 R212 C208 Q201 CN206 R254 C249 C274 C250 R248 R249 R1244 R1397 IC389 IC387 R1293 R205 R214 R216 R244 R245 C205 R253 IC391 R204 J241 R274 R246 Q241 R284 R1396 R1393 C1281 R211 C204 R218 C247 R266 R267 R285 C1376 R210 C269 C246 C268 C244 R342 R344 R1201 R335 R336 R1202 R316 R315 C254 Q1231 R341 R343 C255 R1232 CN244 C1378 R1336 C1375 R203 C212 C211 C268 R241 R202 R209 Q200 C213 C1377 C1380 C202 C203 C329 R1289 CN242 C342 C258 C1371 C1283 R1285 R219 C245 C241 C242 CN311 R242 R1290 Q204 R220 C311 C1209 R1371 C1284 R1286 R208 R201 Q205 R243 R243 C305 C1201 C335 C1232 C1243 R387 C1372 R1348 R221 C307 R307 C1202 C336 C344 R1231 C1233 R1235 C1241 C260 R1372 R1346 C1386 R1287 R1282 R1284 R1281 J303 C1398 R1288 C1286 R1283 R1390 R1387 C201 Q206 R231 C1385 C1392 3 CN204 R312 C1395 Q1341 R1384 R1344 R207 C308 C315 R311 C1389 R1349 C1397 R1322 R200 R332 R331 R330 R329 C312 C330 R1386 IC382 C1391 R1389 C1282 R1334 C1394 IC385 C332 C331 R328 C316 C364 C1384 Q1343 R1383 R1365 Q1333 R1335 C328 C306 R308 R325 C313 R305 R303 C303 R1250 C1388 R1345 R1385 R1321 R1388 IC386 C1393 R1332 C1396 IC384 C1390 R1340 Q1334 R1329 R1324 R1337 C1335 J302 R1347 C1339 R1333 CN732 R310 R1338 CN731 R1330 C326 C1336 C327 R306 C310 R327 R326 R324 C363 R309 R1382 R1303 C324 C304 C339 C1387 C1329 IC301 C1342 CN501 R1306 C325 C1338 R1313 C309 C1343 R1302 R365 IC302 R1341 R1305 C1334 J301 R304 R364 C314 R363 R323 Q1247 C323 R362 R366 IC304 C1344 C1306 R346 C1333 R1315 C334 C301 R1245 C302 CN351 R395 R396 C322 C333 R302 R361 C362 R1242 C321 C378 R301 C361 C389 IC303 C1337 R334 R333 C1244 Q1234 R345 R1351 C1305 R1248 CN313 C1242 R1236 R1233 Q1233 C341 C343 R388 Q1323 R1316 Q1248 C1245 CN243 C1332 R1314 R1323 R1312 C1331 R1311 Q1245 CN205 C1319 Q1313 R381 Q1314 R1261 R1308 C382 R1252 Q1250 R1262 C1261 C1262 R1253 R1254 R397 R1234 C1228 C1308 R1247 R1249 R1251 Q1249 R382 IC371 R398 C395 C1307 IC392 C397 R1241 IC395 C1324 R1301 C396 C381 R394 IC372 CN416 R1243 C1323 R1304 C398 R1229 C1223 C1227 CN381 IC381 Q1307 C377 R1230 R380 C393 C1225 C1229 C1231 C1322 IC380 C394 R392 R393 R1357 C373 R379 C385 R1224 C380 C376 R378 C386 C391 C1226 C1230 C1221 R1221 R1227 C1321 2 R391 R389 R1355 R1307 C374 C379 C1219 R377 C392 R1228 CN361 R376 C1224 C1222 IC393 R1356 R1358 C372 R386 R1212 R1226 C1301 C1314 C1211 R1223 R375 R374 4 C1212 CN371 R1222 R390 C1326 C1302 C1313 C375 R373 R372 R371 R385 C1345 R1364 R1350 C1365 C1366 C1325 C1303 R1225 IC394 C1363 C1312 C1316 R1211 C1346 R1361 1 C1311 C1315 C371 C1364 R1367 5 R1362 R1368 RX-8010VBK Input board (Reverse side) C259 C253 C257 C261 C256 R271 D240 D241 IC241 J243 C210 C215 Q207 IC202 C214 R225 D200 IC201 R222 D201 R223 R224 R1339 J201 J203 R1331 IC383 IC388 FW481 D1392 R1394 R1391 C1351 C1354 C1353 C1352 R1398 C1370 J1371 R1375 J1390 H A J1390 J1372 J1371 B Q1341 Q1342 Q1392 J1370 J1340 C D R1306 C1306 C1284 E R1301 R1302 F J373 J372 G C1316 C1312 C1314 C1212 C1211 C385 R1212 R386 C392 C398 CN351 C336 CN313 C391 C397 C335 C1201 CN371 Q1234 C1222 C1224 C1226 C1228 C1242 C1244 C1230 C1225 C1221 C1223 C1229 C1232 C1241 Q1233 C1227 C1233 C344 C342 R316 R315 R1202 R336 R335 R1201 C1243 Q1231 C343 C341 C255 R1227 C1315 C1311 CN731 C1313 J301 C1301 Q1245 C386 C363 C1302 CN732 CN361 C361 C313 C1202 C261 Q1307 J302 C1307 Q207 C1326 J201 C1308 Q1313 C301 C364 C1325 CN381 J303 C362 C314 IC301 Q1314 C216 C302 4 C1322 Q1323 C315 C305 C260 C1321 C1324 CN205 C1332 CN206 C316 C306 C311 C307 CN311 CN242 C258 C1331 C1334 C1337 C1338 C312 C308 C242 C241 C256 C1323 CN243 C1333 C1335 Q206 C245 C254 C259 C1364 J1380 C1363 Q1343 R1351 C208 C1336 Q1334 Q1333 C215 R1350 C1354 C1344 C1283 C1341 C1285 CN501 J202 C1390 C212 C1396 IC201 CN204 J242 C1384 C1282 C213 Q205 Q241 Q240 Q245 IC242 C1391 D1391 C1397 C210 Q204 J243 C201 C247 Q243 Q247 CN240 D241 C1385 J203 C244 C274 Q242 Q244 Q246 IC241 C246 C250 C249 C273 C252 D240 C1286 C221 C272 CN244 C1342 C1353 C1392 Q200 C211 C218 C222 C251 R271 C202 C203 C204 C205 C217 CN200 C257 C1343 C1352 C1398 CN480 C1375 2 Q201 Q202 Q203 C220 C1376 C206 D200 C1380 D1392 C277 C1377 C1378 Q1391 C207 5 C1386 R1397 RX-8010VBK Input board (Forward side) R385 CN416 R1211 R1228 J241 C1245 Q1248 Q1247 Q1250 Q1249 C231 J371 R225 X200 C214 D201 C219 3 C209 R1305 C1305 FW481 C1281 IC380 C1365 C1366 J1360 1 2-19 C1854 R1854 C1814 R2261 C2253 C2255 R2017 C2553 C2568 J564 R1830 C2256 C2254 C2207 R2505 R2507 R2506 UN561 R2018 C2704 R2552 R2559 B2143 B2142 R1812 Q1874 R1878 D1874 R1894 D1892 R1826 B2762 R1842 B2761 C2556 R1856 Q1854 C2018 C2555 R2553 Q1806 CN581 C1892 R1892 R2551 C2557 C1812 C2251 R2207 R2205 C2201 R2277 R2257 R2503 Q1832 R1834 TH832 R1836 UN562 R1828 C2257 Q1852 C2252 R2208 R2206 C2202 R2258 R2278 C1804 R702 C704 R772 B2753 B2760 R1872 D772 Q762 C708 C752 R762 Q702 Q704 C2501 R2502 TPHAD5 TPHAD2 C2506 R2611 TPHA8 IC582 C573 TPHAD3 TPHAD6 TPHAS TPHAD1 TPHAD4 TPHA9 TPHAD7 C1852 IC501 TPHAD0 R1852 R1804 C2509 Q1892 IC551 R2554 R2555 R2557 TPPB14 Q1804 C2349 R2307 C2301 C2350 R2308 C2302 R2364 R2363 IC526 C2358 C2357 C2707 C2523 IC503 R2519 R2518 R2515 R2520 R2516 R2522 R2521 R780 TH784 R790 R782 Q782 Q572 R2591 R1822 C583 C746 EP561 R2597 C2441 C2427 R2523 R2513 R2512 R2511 R2407 C2401 R778 B111 C712 D704 R706 R577 C577 R570 R730 B2605 B2606 R708 C2101 R2107 B2114 X581 C2136 C2442 R2129 C2187 C1752 R1752 R1722 R1723 C1795 C1715 R2133 Q708 R722 R726 R2135 C716 R774 Q712 C714 B2805 Q1731 R728 R732 C742 R788 R796 B2121 D1772 Q1772 B2422 D1791 TH731 R1732 Q710 B2112 R1733 B2124 C1743 Q1703 C1711 R1721 C1713 B2123 R1774 B2214 C1712 R1793 R784 R764 C754 Q1752 Q764 UN560 R718 R720 B2110 B2122 C1704 R1711 Q1701 R1705 Q1702 R1795 D774 Q774 R2431 R2187 IC529 C2439 C2440 IC528 R2427 R1791 C1791 B2607 R1702 C1702 C1701 Q1791 R582 R1802 C571 B2315 R2285 R2263 B583 R1896 C2261 R2275 R2283 C2283 C2237 R2237 R2233 R2221 IC525 IC524 IC523 R2286 R2264 R2514 TPMODD TPMODC TPMODB TPMODA R2613 R2614 C2258 Q570 Q1802 C2710 C2208 R573 CN587 UN563 R2305 C2520 C2284 R2284 C2262 R2262 R2234 R2615 C2347 R2504 R2232 C2238 R2238 R2222 R2359 R2357 C2353 IC527 C2355 R2349 R2351 C2307 CN588 C1816 R2306 R2360 C2354 R2358 C2356 R2139 R2352 R2350 C2135 C2348 C2407 C2308 G R2405 R2616 R2517 TPTDO TPTDI TPTCK TPTMS R2593 R2589 R2587 C2134 R2127 R2138 C2133 R2595 R2596 R2594 R2429 R2433 C2433 F C588 E R2140 B2141 C2107 D C2481 R1832 R2105 B2430 R2137 C1896 R2157 R2159 C702 R2158 C2158 2-20 R704 C2189 R2189 C CN712 C2138 B R776 C2137 R1874 R1741 R1751 C1751 R1753 Q1751 R2560 B2505 R2531 C1844 R710 R2532 L1862 B2803 R1771 R580 C2560 C703 R771 B2751 B2701 C587 B2226 R712 D702 R2485 R1814 C722 Q2164 R2183 D1872 C794 C706 R2184 R1862 C792 R716 R2132 B2809 R794 C710 R2134 Q1872 Q772 B2210 R2131 C1818 R1876 L792 R734 R576 R701 C2533 Q2101 R2101 R2130 Q2163 R761 Q701 Q703 IC583 IC505 IC581 C2605 C707 C751 R2171 D771 Q761 R575 R1810 R792 R724 R2182 R1864 D792 Q706 R2136 CN716 R798 Q2165 C1862 B2212 R579 2 C720 C718 Q2154 Q2153 Q2152 Q2151 C1864 B2320 C701 R2181 CN722 Q792 R703 C2157 R1701 B2115 CN711 R2401 R2128 R779 TH783 R789 R781 Q781 C2534 B102 C711 D703 C2502 R2581 R2563 R2573 R705 R2302 LC502 Q2301 Q2363 R2301 R717 R719 C2562 B2101 R2274 R2353 C2351 Q2274 C2504 Q763 C1851 Q1851 R1801 C1803 R2508 TPPB13 R2612 R729 B2601 R707 Q2302 R777 Q773 R1871 B2755 B2105 D773 B2603 B2602 Q2364 C2563 Q2431 R2354 Q2401 C745 R2425 LC503 R578 C579 R574 B2225 R775 Q2156 Q2157 C1810 B2302 B2215 B2213 R709 R2172 R1772 R711 C589 C1808 B2303 R793 Q2155 D1701 B2801 R2186 B2506 R1731 D701 C2352 R1724 C721 C2535 L1761 C793 C705 C590 R1761 TPRX3 C1741 C791 R715 R2356 Q771 B2201 R2586 R2585 R2584 R2583 R2582 C2536 Q1771 L791 C709 C2532 D1771 D791 R733 LC501 R1762 R791 Q705 C2505 CN715 R723 R2355 R1773 R797 C2503 C2510 R2562 R2572 R721 Q707 R725 Q711 C2230 R2226 Q2202 R1855 R1835 TH831 R1833 Q1831 R727 R731 TPRX2 X2501 Q2273 R2273 Q2201 C2008 C2010 C2517 C2511 C2702 R2012 R2023 R2201 B2133 R1827 R1825 R1829 R2235 R2231 D1891 R1893 C2551 C2705 C2004 R2002 C2003 R2001 IC521 IC522 C2020 C2706 TPRX4 K2607 TP607 C584 C2516 C2515 C2514 C2513 C2512 TPRX1 B2756 R1841 D1873 R1877 Q1873 B2757 B2132 R2561 R2571 C2522 IC502 R2718 C2007 C2009 R2225 R2227 C2701 R787 R795 C2561 C2508 C741 Q709 B2103 R2202 R2236 R2010 R2008 R2006 R2276 IC571 C2712 B2205 Q1801 Q1803 C715 R773 C713 R1851 R783 R763 C753 R2501 B2301 B2203 C2507 C1802 C1761 C1801 C2529 R1803 R2703 C1703 B2502 C719 C2006 R1824 B2220 B2206 IC511 C1705 C1863 B2319 C2521 A R1809 C717 R2709 R1863 Q791 R2024 R2014 C2014 1 C1762 C1807 B2204 C2518 R1712 R1861 B2106 C2519 B2140 VR787 R2702 R2701 B2421 D1801 R2716 R2717 CN713 R1813 R1811 R2715 4 C1805 R2004 D1802 C1806 C1809 C2002 R1725 C1861 C1895 C795 R1853 C1853 C2552 C1841 R1821 C1811 Q1805 R2007 X2551 C2601 R2568 C1815 B2310 C1813 Q1853 LC551 R1805 C582 R1806 B2807 B2130 C581 C1817 C2703 R1703 R1875 B2221 R1823 C2019 L1861 R2564 C2564 K2606 B2120 D1871 C1843 R2021 R1831 C2001 B2425 C2013 R2013 R2022 3 B2501 R2011 R1873 R2009 5 B2131 R2005 C2005 R1895 R1891 Power board R2003 C1842 RX-8010VBK DSP board Reverse side C796 VR788 Forward side H RX-8010VBK Tuner board R115 E B191 B190 C101 Q102 B Q121 R114 R104 B172 R106 R111 RF101 B196 B124 CF102 B104 C103 CF101 1 C165 C141 T142 C150 B103 C143 C144 C134 C184 15 R122 R143 C123 R126 R184 R124 C146 C164 R145 C121 B182 B181 C128 C148 R144 C122 C147 C149 R182 R134 B132 B131 R127 R183 C130 C196 B112 C192 IC191 B113 C191 C197 C199 C195 R193 R194 D131 T2D B111 C193 1 1 C B106 R130 D123 R192 C129 B102 D121 CN112 R191 D129 C126 IC121 CF103 C163 16 R128 R132 B187 C140 R142 R150 IC102 C185 D125 R112 Q113 [DOM] B176 R108 [DOM] B177 R147 R140 R162 B122 B188 X121 R161 B174 B175 B178 C111 B183 CN111 C194 X191 B186 C112 D127 30 C186 B121 B133 R157 B A 2-21 B199 R158 2 C113 T111 C162 B135 B151 C161 R129 B192 R133 B134 C135 R119 B194 E B193 B189 C138 B E D124 B R103 C133 Q103 B197 C107 B171 C136 B195 C168 R105 C158 R109 E B B Q111 L111 R107 C105 R146 B180 C157 C137 C139 3 C118 C117 [DOM] B105 Q112 E L112 B123 4 B198 [DOM] B173 AT101 D126 5 R141 RX-8010VBK PARTS LIST [ RX-8010VBK ] * All printed circuit boards and its assemblies are not available as service parts. Area suffix J ----------------------------- U.S.A. - Contents Exploded view of general assembly and parts list Electrical parts list Packing materials and accessories parts list 3- 3 3- 5 3-21 3-1 RX-8010VBK < MEMO > 3-2 RX-8010VBK Exploded view of general assembly and parts list Block No. M 1 M M 63 72 Power trans board 64 I/O board 50 71 66 71 5 51 52 Power trans board 49 60 61 47 59 69 67 58 70 49 57 51 56 55 Power/Fuse board 60 53 48 62 rd oa Pb DS Speaker board 4 67 o ide S V ard o b 51 eo Vid ard bo 54 t 44 45 Relay board 42 65 pu io in d u V A oard b 74 put io in Aud oard b 75 46 3 39 13 33 38 46 5 33 ard 26 45 40 nt Fro rd (L) boa 33 42 33 33 nt Fro rd (R) boa 25 r Rea rd (L) boa 24 43 35 r Rea rd (R) boa 1 32 2 34 28 27 38 28 28 41 16 8 e Tun r bo te Cen 22 19 6 2 ard r bo Audio board Main board 37 power switch board 3 41 Power supply board 21 39 27 73 7 15 36 73 Front key & System control board 20 14 17 12 23 Switch board 9 1 11 10 29 18 30 4 31 68 A 31 B C D E F G 3-3 RX-8010VBK Parts list (General assembly) A A A Item Parts number Parts list (General assembly) Block No. M1MM Parts name Q'ty Description A Area Item Parts number Block No. M1MM Parts name Q'ty Description 1 LV10469-001A FRONT PANEL 1 49 QYSDSTL4008Z SPECIAL SCREW 4 2 VJD5429-001SS JVC MARK 1 50 LV10472-008A REAR PANEL 1 3 LV20949-004A LENS 1 51 QYSBSGY3008M SPECIAL SCREW 3 R.P-C.BASE 4 LV10470-001A SUB PANEL 1 52 QYSBSGY3008M SPECIAL SCREW 1 R.P-ud--- 5 LV20939-001A PUSH BUTTON 1 POWER BK 53 QYSBSGY3008M SPECIAL SCREW 2 TUNER 6 LV42096-001A INDICATOR 1 POWER 54 FMYH4004-001 PLASTIC RIVET 1 7 LV20951-001A PUSH BUTTON 1 TUNER 55 QYSBSGY3008M SPECIAL SCREW 4 A.INPUT 8 LV20940-001A P.BUTTON ASSY 1 DOLBY 56 QYSBSGY3008M SPECIAL SCREW 3 V.INPUT 9 LV20944-001A P.BUTTON ASSY 1 SOURCE 57 QYSBSGY3008M SPECIAL SCREW 3 VIDEO 10 LV20942-001A PUSH BUTTON 1 SEA 58 QYSBSGY3008M SPECIAL SCREW 4 S VIDEO 11 LV32486-001A P.BUTTON ASSY 1 LINE STRAIGHT 59 QYSBSGY3008M SPECIAL SCREW 6 DIGITAL P.TRANS 12 LV42095-002A FL SCREEN 1 FL 60 QYSBSGY3008M SPECIAL SCREW 7 COMPONENT 13 QYSDSF2608Z SCREW 2 FRONT C.B 61 QYSBSGY3008M SPECIAL SCREW 4 SPK C.B 14 QYSDSF2608Z SCREW 2 62 E409257-001 GND TERMINAL 1 15 QYSDSF2608Z SCREW 8 63 QMPD220-200-JD POWER CORD 1 16 QUQ412-0815CJ FFC WIRE 1 64 QZW0033-001 STRAIN RELIEF 1 17 QUQ412-1030CJ FFC WIRE 1 65 LV20038-009A/S/ TOP COVER 1 18 QYSDSG3006Z SCREW 4 FRONT D 66 QYSBSGY3008M SPECIAL SCREW 3 19 QYSBSG3006Z T.SCREW 3 FRONT U 67 E406308-003 SPECIAL SCREW 4 20 LV10019-003A CHASSIS BASE 1 68 LV32435-003A VOL KNOB 1 BK 21 EXO150010H09S11 FELT SPACER 1 69 QMF51U1-6R3-J8 FUSE 1 F1 22 LV10471-001A FRONT BRACKET 1 70 QMF51U1-2R0-J8 FUSE 2 F61 F62 23 QYSDSG3006Z SCREW 7 71 LV42388-001A FUSE CAUTION 2 24 LV42094-002A H.P. BKT 1 72 E409394-001 CAUTION LABEL 1 25 QYSBSG3006Z T.SCREW 1 73 E3400-444 FELT SPACER 2 26 VKZ4150-001 SPECIAL NUT 1 74 QYSBSG3008E T.SCREW 3 27 E68587-223SM CB BKT 3 75 QYSBSG3008E T.SCREW 3 28 QYSBST3006Z T.SCREW 3 29 QZF6018-001 FOOT 2 30 E47227-036 FOOT 2 31 QYSBST3010Z T.SCREW 4 32 LV20984-002A HEAT SINK 1 33 E73525-003SS SCREW 10 34 LV42098-001A C.B BKT 1 PRI/SEC C.B 35 QYSBST3006Z T.SCREW 1 C.B BKT 36 LV32433-001A H.S BRACKET(R) 1 37 LV32434-001A H.S BRACKET(L) 1 38 QYSBSG3008Z T.SCREW 4 H.S-BKT 39 QYSBSG3006Z T.SCREW 2 H.S BKT-F.BKT 40 QYSBSG3006Z T.SCREW 2 H.S BKT 41 QYSBST3006Z T.SCREW 4 H.S BKT-CHASSIS 42 QYSBSG3006Z T.SCREW 2 M.C.B M.C.B A A FRONT C.B FL A A FOR C.BASE C.B-F.B H.P BKT-F.B C.B-BKT FOOT TR 43 E65923-003 TAPPING SCREW 1 44 LV30225-0B2A SPACER 1 45 QYSBSG3006Z T.SCREW 3 H.S-C.B 46 QYSBSG3006Z T.SCREW 3 P.C.B 47 QYSBSG3006Z T.SCREW 1 C.B-CHASSIS 48 QQT0325-001 POWER TRANS. 1 3-4 FS400 FS401 Area RX-8010VBK Electrical parts list (Main board) A A A A A A A Item Parts number Parts name Block No. 01 Remarks Area A Item Parts number Parts name Remarks C 801 QCE22HP-103 C CAPACITOR .010MF +100:-0% R 851 QRJ146J-120X UNF C RESISTOR 12 5% 1/4W C 802 QCE22HP-103 C CAPACITOR .010MF +100:-0% R 852 QRJ146J-120X UNF C RESISTOR 12 5% 1/4W C 805 QCE22HP-103 C CAPACITOR .010MF +100:-0% R 871 QRJ146J-120X UNF C RESISTOR 12 5% 1/4W C 807 QEZ0462-688 E CAPACITOR 6800MF RY831 QSK0109-001 RELAY C 808 QEZ0462-688 E CAPACITOR 6800MF RY832 QSK0109-001 RELAY C 811 QCF31HZ-472Z C CAPACITOR 4700PF +80:-20% RY851 QSK0109-001 RELAY C 816 QETN1EM-476Z E CAPACITOR 47MF 20% 25V RY852 QSK0109-001 RELAY C 823 QETN1CM-476Z E CAPACITOR 47MF 20% 16V RY871 QSK0109-001 RELAY C 824 QETN1EM-106Z E CAPACITOR 10MF 20% 25V S 831 QSW0509-001 SLIDE SWITCH CN 72 QGB2510K1-11 CONNECTOR ST831 QNB0105-002 SPK TERMINAL CN 82 QGB2510K1-09 CONNECTOR ST851 QNB0078-001 SPK TERMINAL CN701 QGB2510J1-14 CONNECTOR CN702 QGB2510J1-14 CONNECTOR CN703 QGB2510J1-10 CONNECTOR CN705 QGB2510J1-12 CONNECTOR CN706 QGB2510J1-12 CONNECTOR CN721 QGA2501C1-03 3P CONNECTOR CN723 QGA2501C1-04 4P CONNECTOR CN801 QJK012-032403 SKT WIRE ASSY CN813 QGA3901C1-04 4P CONNECTOR CN814 QGA3901C1-06 6P PLUG ASSY CN823 QJK015-043004 SKT WIRE ASSY CN824 QJK015-063504 SKT WIRE ASSY CN831 QGD2501C1-04Z SOCKET CN881 QGD2501C1-03Z SOCKET D 801 30DF2-FC DIODE D 802 30DF2-FC DIODE D 803 30DF2-FC DIODE D 804 30DF2-FC DIODE D 811 MTZJ24C-T2 Z DIODE D 816 MTZJ18C-T2 Z DIODE D 825 1SS133-T2 SI DIODE D 831 1SS133-T2 SI DIODE D 832 1SS133-T2 SI DIODE D 851 1SS133-T2 SI DIODE D 852 1SS133-T2 SI DIODE D 871 1SS133-T2 SI DIODE EP801 QNZ0136-001Z EARTH PLATE FW931 QUM137-08DGZ4 PARA RIBON WIRE Q 811 2SD2395/EF/ TRANSISTOR Q 812 KTC3200/GL/-T TRANSISTOR Q 823 KTC3199/GL/-T TRANSISTOR Q 824 KTC3200/GL/-T TRANSISTOR Q 825 KTA1268/GL/-T TRANSISTOR R 801 QRE141J-104Y C RESISTOR 100K 5% 1/4W R 802 QRE141J-104Y C RESISTOR 100K 5% 1/4W R 811 QRJ146J-150X UNF C RESISTOR 15 5% 1/4W R 812 QRK126J-332X UNF C RESISTOR 3.3K 5% 1/2W R 813 QRE141J-473Y C RESISTOR 47K 5% 1/4W R 814 QRE141J-103Y C RESISTOR 10K 5% 1/4W R 815 QRJ146J-120X UNF C RESISTOR 12 5% 1/4W R 816 QRL022J-332 UNF OMF RESISTOR 3.3K 5% 1/2W R 823 QRE141J-103Y C RESISTOR 10K 5% 1/4W R 824 QRE141J-134Y C RESISTOR 130K 5% 1/4W R 825 QRE141J-103Y C RESISTOR 10K 5% 1/4W R 826 QRE141J-104Y C RESISTOR 100K 5% 1/4W R 831 QRJ146J-120X UNF C RESISTOR 12 5% 1/4W R 832 QRJ146J-120X UNF C RESISTOR 12 5% 1/4W R 841 QRE141J-104Y C RESISTOR 100K 5% 1/4W R 842 QRE141J-823Y C RESISTOR 82K 5% 1/4W R 843 QRE141J-104Y C RESISTOR 100K 5% 1/4W R 844 QRE141J-104Y C RESISTOR 100K 5% 1/4W R 845 QRE141J-823Y C RESISTOR 82K 5% 1/4W Area 3-5 RX-8010VBK Electrical parts list (Front board) A Item BK400 3-6 Parts number LV42092-001A Block No. 02 Remarks Parts name FL HOLDER(R) Area A Item IC410 Parts number Parts name PCM2702E-X IC IC411 NJU7241F33-X IC J 400 QND0026-001 S JACK Remarks BK401 LV42093-001A FL HOLDER(L) C 400 QEKC1HM-475Z E CAPACITOR C 401 NCB31CK-104X C CAPACITOR J 401 QNZ0503-001 USB JACK C 402 NCB31CK-104X C CAPACITOR JS400 QSW0898-001 JOG VOLUME C 404 NCB31EK-223X C CAPACITOR K 451 NQR0201-018X INDUCTOR C 406 NCB31HK-331X C CAPACITOR K 452 NQR0201-018X INDUCTOR C 407 QCZ0205-155Z ML C CAPACITOR K 453 NQR0201-018X INDUCTOR C 408 NCB31EK-223X C CAPACITOR K 454 NQR0201-018X INDUCTOR C 409 QEKC1HM-475Z E CAPACITOR 4.7MF 20% 50V K 455 NQR0201-018X INDUCTOR C 410 QEKC1HM-475Z E CAPACITOR 4.7MF 20% 50V K 456 NQR0201-018X INDUCTOR C 411 QCZ0205-155Z ML C CAPACITOR 1.5MF Q 402 DTC114TKA-X TRANSISTOR C 412 QEKC0JM-107Z E CAPACITOR 100MF 20% 6.3V Q 403 DTC144WKA-X TRANSISTOR C 420 NCB31HK-471X C CAPACITOR Q 404 DTC114YKA-X CHIP D TRANSIST C 421 NCB31HK-471X C CAPACITOR Q 407 DTC114YKA-X CHIP D TRANSIST C 422 NCB31HK-471X C CAPACITOR Q 408 DTC114YKA-X CHIP D TRANSIST C 423 NCB31HK-471X C CAPACITOR Q 410 DTA114YKA-X TRANSISTOR (DIRECT) C 424 NCB31HK-471X C CAPACITOR Q 411 DTA114YKA-X TRANSISTOR (BASS) C 425 NCB31HK-471X C CAPACITOR Q 412 DTA114YKA-X TRANSISTOR (STANBY) C 430 NCB31EK-223X C CAPACITOR Q 413 DTA114YKA-X TRANSISTOR (SURROUND) C 431 NCB31EK-223X C CAPACITOR Q 414 DTA114YKA-X TRANSISTOR (DSP) C 432 NCS31HJ-220X C CAPACITOR R 400 NRSA63J-102X MG RESISTOR C 433 NCS31HJ-220X C CAPACITOR R 401 NRSA63J-102X MG RESISTOR C 435 NCB31EK-104X C CAPACITOR R 402 NRSA63J-122X MG RESISTOR C 436 NCB31EK-104X C CAPACITOR R 403 NRSA63J-102X MG RESISTOR C 437 NCB31EK-104X C CAPACITOR R 404 NRSA63J-102X MG RESISTOR C 438 NCB31EK-104X C CAPACITOR R 405 NRSA63J-122X MG RESISTOR C 439 NCB31EK-104X C CAPACITOR R 406 NRSA63J-152X MG RESISTOR C 440 NCB31EK-104X C CAPACITOR R 407 NRSA63J-222X MG RESISTOR C 441 QEK41CM-106 E CAPACITOR 10MF 20% 16V R 408 NRSA63J-272X MG RESISTOR C 442 QETN1AM-107Z E CAPACITOR 100MF 20% 10V R 409 NRSA63J-392X MG RESISTOR C 443 QETN1AM-107Z E CAPACITOR 100MF 20% 10V R 410 NRSA63J-102X MG RESISTOR C 456 NCB31EK-104X C CAPACITOR R 411 NRSA63J-102X MG RESISTOR CN406 WJP0031-001A C-B WIRE ASSY R 412 NRSA63J-122X MG RESISTOR CN410 QGF1205F1-10 CONNECTOR R 413 NRSA63J-152X MG RESISTOR CN412 QGF1205F1-08 CONNECTOR R 414 NRSA63J-222X MG RESISTOR CN420 QJK025-031301 C-B WIRE ASSY (LEFT) R 415 NRSA63J-272X MG RESISTOR CN422 QJK025-041201 SIN ID C-B WIRE (RIGHT) R 416 NRSA63J-392X MG RESISTOR CN430 QGA2501C1-03 3P CONNECTOR R 417 NRSA63J-102X MG RESISTOR CN432 QGA2501C1-04 4P CONNECTOR R 418 NRSA63J-102X MG RESISTOR D 405 1SS133-T2 SI DIODE R 419 NRSA63J-122X MG RESISTOR D 410 SLR-342VC-T LED (FM/AM) R 420 NRSA63J-152X MG RESISTOR D 411 SLR-342VC-T LED (USB) R 421 NRSA63J-222X MG RESISTOR D 412 SLR-342VC-T LED (TAPE) R 422 NRSA63J-272X MG RESISTOR D 413 SLR-342VC-T LED (CDR) R 423 NRSA63J-392X MG RESISTOR D 414 SLR-342VC-T LED (PHONE) R 424 NRSA63J-102X MG RESISTOR D 415 SLR-342VC-T LED (CD) R 425 NRSA63J-102X MG RESISTOR D 416 SLR-342VC-T LED (TV/DBS) R 426 NRSA63J-122X MG RESISTOR D 417 SLR-342VC-T LED (VIDEO) R 431 NRSA63J-102X MG RESISTOR D 418 SLR-342VC-T LED (VCR2) R 432 NRSA63J-102X MG RESISTOR D 419 SLR-342VC-T LED (VCR1) R 433 NRSA63J-122X MG RESISTOR D 420 SLR-342VC-T LED (DVD MULTI) R 434 NRSA63J-152X MG RESISTOR D 421 SLR-342VC-T LED (DVD) R 435 NRSA63J-222X MG RESISTOR D 422 SLR-342VC-T LED (SURROUND) R 436 NRSA63J-102X MG RESISTOR D 423 SLR-342VC-T LED (DSP) R 443 NRSA63J-102X MG RESISTOR D 480 SLR-342VC-T LED (STANDBY) R 445 NRSA63J-103X MG RESISTOR D 490 SLR-342VC-T LED (DIRECT) R 446 NRSA63J-103X MG RESISTOR D 491 SLR-342VC-T LED (BASS) R 447 NRSA63J-103X MG RESISTOR DI400 QLF0084-001 FL TUBE R 448 NRSA63J-103X MG RESISTOR IC400 MN101C35DHL1 IC MASUKU R 449 NRSA63J-103X MG RESISTOR IC400 MN101CP35DHL1 IC ONE TIME R 450 NRSA63J-103X MG RESISTOR IC402 BU2092 IC R 451 NRSA63J-103X MG RESISTOR IC404 GP1U281X IC R 452 NRSA63J-103X MG RESISTOR 4.7MF 20% 50V 1.5MF Area RX-8010VBK Block No. 02 Electrical parts list (Front board) A Item Parts number Remarks Parts name Area A Item Parts number Parts name Remarks R 453 NRSA63J-103X MG RESISTOR S 482 QSW0683-001Z PUSH SWITCH (SPK2) R 454 NRSA63J-103X MG RESISTOR S 483 QSW0683-001Z PUSH SWITCH (SUBWFR) R 455 NRSA63J-471X MG RESISTOR S 490 QSW0683-001Z PUSH SWITCH (DIRECT) R 456 NRSA63J-103X MG RESISTOR S 491 QSW0683-001Z PUSH SWITCH (BASS) R 457 NRSA63J-103X MG RESISTOR X 400 QAX0246-001Z RESONATOR R 458 NRSA63J-103X MG RESISTOR X 410 QAX0320-001Z CRYSTAL R 459 NRSA63J-221X MG RESISTOR R 460 NRSA63J-221X MG RESISTOR R 461 NRSA63J-221X MG RESISTOR R 462 NRSA63J-221X MG RESISTOR R 463 NRSA63J-221X MG RESISTOR R 464 NRSA63J-221X MG RESISTOR RA400 QRB169J-104 RESISTOR ARRAY 100K 5% 1/6W R 465 NRSA63J-331X MG RESISTOR RA401 QRB169J-104 RESISTOR ARRAY 100K 5% 1/6W R 466 NRSA63J-331X MG RESISTOR RA402 QRB169J-104 RESISTOR ARRAY 100K 5% 1/6W R 467 NRSA63J-221X MG RESISTOR RA403 QRB059J-104 RESISTOR ARRAY 100K 5% 1/5W R 468 NRSA63J-221X MG RESISTOR R 469 NRSA63J-221X MG RESISTOR R 470 NRSA63J-750X MG RESISTOR R 471 NRSA63J-750X MG RESISTOR R 472 NRSA63J-750X MG RESISTOR R 473 NRSA63J-152X MG RESISTOR R 474 NRSA63J-105X MG RESISTOR R 475 NRSA63J-220X MG RESISTOR R 476 NRSA63J-220X MG RESISTOR R 477 NRSA63J-220X MG RESISTOR R 479 NRSA63J-181X MG RESISTOR R 480 NRSA63J-152X MG RESISTOR R 481 NRSA63J-222X MG RESISTOR R 482 NRSA63J-272X MG RESISTOR R 483 NRSA63J-392X MG RESISTOR R 490 NRSA63J-272X MG RESISTOR R 491 NRSA63J-392X MG RESISTOR R 495 QRE141J-102Y C RESISTOR 1.0K 5% 1/4W S 400 QSW0683-001Z PUSH SWITCH (SURROUND) S 401 QSW0683-001Z PUSH SWITCH (DSP MODE) S 402 QSW0683-001Z PUSH SWITCH (INPUT MODE) S 403 QSW0683-001Z PUSH SWITCH (TUNING UP) S 404 QSW0683-001Z PUSH SWITCH (PRESET UP) S 405 QSW0683-001Z PUSH SWITCH (FM MODE) S 406 QSW0683-001Z PUSH SWITCH (MEMORY) S 407 QSW0683-001Z PUSH SWITCH (MIDNIGHT MODE) S 408 QSW0683-001Z PUSH SWITCH (DVD) S 409 QSW0683-001Z PUSH SWITCH (DVD MULTI) S 410 QSW0683-001Z PUSH SWITCH (TUNING DOWN) S 411 QSW0683-001Z PUSH SWITCH (PRESET DOWN) S 412 QSW0683-001Z PUSH SWITCH (VCR1) S 413 QSW0683-001Z PUSH SWITCH (VCR2) S 414 QSW0683-001Z PUSH SWITCH (VIDEO) S 415 QSW0683-001Z PUSH SWITCH (CD) S 416 QSW0683-001Z PUSH SWITCH (TV/DBS) S 417 QSW0683-001Z PUSH SWITCH (CDR) S 418 QSW0683-001Z PUSH SWITCH (USB AUDIO) S 419 QSW0683-001Z PUSH SWITCH (PHONE) S 420 QSW0683-001Z PUSH SWITCH (FM/AM) S 421 QSW0683-001Z PUSH SWITCH (DIGITAL SEA) S 422 QSW0683-001Z PUSH SWITCH (LEVEL ADJUST) S 423 QSW0683-001Z PUSH SWITCH (TAPE/MD) S 424 QSW0683-001Z PUSH SWITCH (DOWN) S 425 QSW0683-001Z PUSH SWITCH (EFECT) S 426 QSW0683-001Z PUSH SWITCH (SETTING) S 431 QSW0683-001Z PUSH SWITCH (UP) S 480 QSW0683-001Z PUSH SWITCH (POWER) S 481 QSW0683-001Z PUSH SWITCH (SPK1) Area When IC400 uses "one time micon",this list is used. 3-7 RX-8010VBK Electrical parts list (Power board) A Item C 701 3-8 Parts number Parts name Block No. 03 Remarks QTE1V06-106Z E CAPACITOR C 702 QTE1V06-106Z E CAPACITOR C 703 QCS11HJ-101 C CAPACITOR 100PF 5% 50V C 704 QCS11HJ-101 C CAPACITOR C 705 QCS11HJ-101 C 706 Area A Item Parts number Parts name Remarks C1808 QETN1CM-107Z E CAPACITOR 100MF 20% 16V C1809 QCS31HJ-5R0Z C CAPACITOR 5.0PF 5% 50V C1810 QCS31HJ-5R0Z C CAPACITOR 5.0PF 5% 50V 100PF 5% 50V C1811 QCS32HJ-330Z C CAPACITOR 33PF 5% 500V C CAPACITOR 100PF 5% 50V C1812 QCS32HJ-330Z C CAPACITOR 33PF 5% 500V QCS11HJ-101 C CAPACITOR 100PF 5% 50V C1813 QFLC1HJ-103Z M CAPACITOR .010MF 5% 50V C 707 QETN1CM-107Z E CAPACITOR 100MF 20% 16V C1814 QFLC1HJ-103Z M CAPACITOR .010MF 5% 50V C 708 QETN1CM-107Z E CAPACITOR 100MF 20% 16V C1815 QETN1HM-225Z E CAPACITOR 2.2MF 20% 50V C 709 QCS11HJ-100 C CAPACITOR 10PF 5% 50V C1816 QETN1HM-225Z E CAPACITOR 2.2MF 20% 50V C 710 QCS11HJ-100 C CAPACITOR 10PF 5% 50V C1817 QETN1HM-476Z E CAPACITOR 47MF 20% 50V C 711 QFLC1HJ-103Z M CAPACITOR .010MF 5% 50V C1818 QETN1HM-476Z E CAPACITOR 47MF 20% 50V C 712 QFLC1HJ-103Z M CAPACITOR .010MF 5% 50V C1841 QETN2AM-476Z E CAPACITOR 47MF 20% 100V C 713 QCS11HJ-680 C CAPACITOR 68PF 5% 50V C1842 QETN2AM-476Z E CAPACITOR 47MF 20% 100V C 714 QCS11HJ-680 C CAPACITOR 68PF 5% 50V C1843 QETN2AM-476Z E CAPACITOR 47MF 20% 100V C 715 QCS11HJ-680 C CAPACITOR 68PF 5% 50V C1844 QETN2AM-476Z E CAPACITOR 47MF 20% 100V C 716 QCS11HJ-680 C CAPACITOR 68PF 5% 50V C1851 QCS32HJ-470Z C CAPACITOR 47PF 5% 500V C 717 QCS32HJ-220Z C CAPACITOR 22PF 5% 500V C1852 QCS32HJ-470Z C CAPACITOR 47PF 5% 500V C 718 QCS32HJ-220Z C CAPACITOR 22PF 5% 500V C1853 QCS32HJ-470Z C CAPACITOR 47PF 5% 500V C 719 QFLC1HJ-472Z M CAPACITOR 4700PF 5% 50V C1854 QCS32HJ-470Z C CAPACITOR 47PF 5% 500V C 720 QFLC1HJ-472Z M CAPACITOR 4700PF 5% 50V C1861 QFLC1HJ-473Z M CAPACITOR .047MF 5% 50V C 741 QETN2AM-476Z E CAPACITOR 47MF 20% 100V C1862 QFLC1HJ-473Z M CAPACITOR .047MF 5% 50V C 742 QETN2AM-476Z E CAPACITOR 47MF 20% 100V C1863 QFLC1HJ-473Z M CAPACITOR .047MF 5% 50V C 745 QETN2AM-476Z E CAPACITOR 47MF 20% 100V C1864 QFLC1HJ-473Z M CAPACITOR .047MF 5% 50V C 746 QETN2AM-476Z E CAPACITOR 47MF 20% 100V C1891 QCF31HZ-223Z C CAPACITOR .022MF +80:-20% C 751 QCS32HJ-470Z C CAPACITOR 47PF 5% 500V C1892 QCF31HZ-223Z C CAPACITOR .022MF +80:-20% C 752 QCS32HJ-470Z C CAPACITOR 47PF 5% 500V D 701 1SS133-T2 SI DIODE C 753 QCS32HJ-470Z C CAPACITOR 47PF 5% 500V D 702 1SS133-T2 SI DIODE C 754 QCS32HJ-470Z C CAPACITOR 47PF 5% 500V D 703 1SS133-T2 SI DIODE C 791 QFLC1HJ-473Z M CAPACITOR .047MF 5% 50V D 704 1SS133-T2 SI DIODE C 792 QFLC1HJ-473Z M CAPACITOR .047MF 5% 50V D 771 1SS133-T2 SI DIODE C 793 QFLC1HJ-473Z M CAPACITOR .047MF 5% 50V D 772 1SS133-T2 SI DIODE C 794 QFLC1HJ-473Z M CAPACITOR .047MF 5% 50V D 773 1SS133-T2 SI DIODE C 795 QCF31HZ-223Z C CAPACITOR .022MF +80:-20% D 774 1SS133-T2 SI DIODE C 796 QCF31HZ-223Z C CAPACITOR .022MF +80:-20% D 791 1SS133-T2 SI DIODE CN711 QGB2510K1-14 CONNECTOR D 792 1SS133-T2 SI DIODE CN712 QGB2510K1-14 CONNECTOR D1701 1SS133-T2 SI DIODE CN713 QGB2510K1-10 CONNECTOR D1771 1SS133-T2 SI DIODE CN715 QGB2510K1-12 CONNECTOR D1772 1SS133-T2 SI DIODE CN716 QGB2510K1-12 CONNECTOR D1791 1SS133-T2 SI DIODE CN722 QGA2501F1-02 CONNECTOR D1801 1SS133-T2 SI DIODE C1701 QETN1HM-105Z E CAPACITOR 1.0MF 20% 50V D1802 1SS133-T2 SI DIODE C1702 QCS11HJ-101 C CAPACITOR 100PF 5% 50V D1871 1SS133-T2 SI DIODE C1703 QCS11HJ-101 C CAPACITOR 100PF 5% 50V D1872 1SS133-T2 SI DIODE C1704 QETN1CM-107Z E CAPACITOR 100MF 20% 16V D1873 1SS133-T2 SI DIODE C1705 QCS31HJ-5R0Z C CAPACITOR 5.0PF 5% 50V D1874 1SS133-T2 SI DIODE C1711 QCS32HJ-330Z C CAPACITOR 33PF 5% 500V D1891 1SS133-T2 SI DIODE C1712 QFLC1HJ-103Z M CAPACITOR .010MF 5% 50V D1892 1SS133-T2 SI DIODE C1713 QETN1HM-225Z E CAPACITOR 2.2MF 20% 50V L 791 QQLZ003-1R0 INDUCTOR C1715 QETN1HM-476Z E CAPACITOR 47MF 20% 50V L 792 QQLZ003-1R0 INDUCTOR C1741 QETN2AM-476Z E CAPACITOR 47MF 20% 100V L1761 QQLZ005-R45 INDUCTOR INDUCTOR C1743 QETN2AM-476Z E CAPACITOR 47MF 20% 100V L1861 QQLZ005-R45 C1751 QCS32HJ-470Z C CAPACITOR 47PF 5% 500V L1862 QQLZ005-R45 INDUCTOR C1752 QCS32HJ-470Z C CAPACITOR 47PF 5% 500V Q 701 2SC2240-BL/AB/T TRANSISTOR C1761 QFLC1HJ-473Z M CAPACITOR .047MF 5% 50V Q 702 2SC2240-BL/AB/T TRANSISTOR C1762 QFLC1HJ-473Z M CAPACITOR .047MF 5% 50V Q 703 2SC2240-BL/AB/T TRANSISTOR C1791 QCF31HZ-223Z C CAPACITOR .022MF +80:-20% Q 704 2SC2240-BL/AB/T TRANSISTOR C1801 QETN1HM-105Z E CAPACITOR 1.0MF 20% 50V Q 705 KTA1268/GL/-T TRANSISTOR C1802 QETN1HM-105Z E CAPACITOR 1.0MF 20% 50V Q 706 KTA1268/GL/-T TRANSISTOR C1803 QCS11HJ-101 C CAPACITOR 100PF 5% 50V Q 707 KTA1268/GL/-T TRANSISTOR C1804 QCS11HJ-101 C CAPACITOR 100PF 5% 50V Q 708 KTA1268/GL/-T TRANSISTOR C1805 QCS11HJ-101 C CAPACITOR 100PF 5% 50V Q 709 KTA1268/GL/-T TRANSISTOR C1806 QCS11HJ-101 C CAPACITOR 100PF 5% 50V Q 710 KTA1268/GL/-T TRANSISTOR C1807 QETN1CM-107Z E CAPACITOR 100MF 20% 16V Q 711 KTC3200/GL/-T TRANSISTOR Area RX-8010VBK Electrical parts list (Power board) A A A A A A A A A A A Item Parts number Parts name Block No. 03 Remarks Area A Item Parts number Parts name Remarks Q 712 KTC3200/GL/-T TRANSISTOR R 726 QRE141J-152Y C RESISTOR 1.5K 5% 1/4W Q 761 2SD2560/OPY/-F6 TRANSISTOR R 727 QRE141J-333Y C RESISTOR 33K 5% 1/4W Q 762 2SD2560/OPY/-F6 TRANSISTOR R 728 QRE141J-333Y C RESISTOR 33K 5% 1/4W Q 763 2SB1647/OPY/-F6 TRANSISTOR R 729 QRE141J-391Y C RESISTOR 390 5% 1/4W Q 764 2SB1647/OPY/-F6 TRANSISTOR R 730 QRE141J-391Y C RESISTOR 390 5% 1/4W Q 771 KTC3200/GL/-T TRANSISTOR R 731 QRE141J-391Y C RESISTOR 390 5% 1/4W Q 772 KTC3200/GL/-T TRANSISTOR R 732 QRE141J-391Y C RESISTOR 390 5% 1/4W Q 773 KTA1268/GL/-T TRANSISTOR R 733 QRE141J-221Y C RESISTOR 220 5% 1/4W Q 774 KTA1268/GL/-T TRANSISTOR R 734 QRE141J-221Y C RESISTOR 220 5% 1/4W Q 781 2SD637/QR/ TRANSISTOR R 761 QRJ146J-100X UNF C RESISTOR 10 5% 1/4W Q 782 2SD637/QR/ TRANSISTOR R 762 QRJ146J-100X UNF C RESISTOR 10 5% 1/4W Q 791 KTA1268/GL/-T TRANSISTOR R 763 QRJ146J-100X UNF C RESISTOR 10 5% 1/4W Q 792 KTA1268/GL/-T TRANSISTOR R 764 QRJ146J-100X UNF C RESISTOR 10 5% 1/4W Q1701 2SC2240-BL/AB/T TRANSISTOR R 771 QRE141J-391Y C RESISTOR 390 5% 1/4W Q1702 2SC2240-BL/AB/T TRANSISTOR R 772 QRE141J-391Y C RESISTOR 390 5% 1/4W Q1703 KTA1268/GL/-T TRANSISTOR R 773 QRE141J-391Y C RESISTOR 390 5% 1/4W Q1731 2SD637/QR/ TRANSISTOR R 774 QRE141J-391Y C RESISTOR 390 5% 1/4W Q1751 2SD2390/OPY/-F6 TRANSISTOR R 775 QRE141J-201Y C RESISTOR 200 5% 1/4W Q1752 2SB1560/OPY/-F6 TRANSISTOR R 776 QRE141J-201Y C RESISTOR 200 5% 1/4W Q1771 KTC3200/GL/-T TRANSISTOR R 777 QRE141J-201Y C RESISTOR 200 5% 1/4W Q1772 KTA1268/GL/-T TRANSISTOR R 778 QRE141J-201Y C RESISTOR 200 5% 1/4W Q1791 KTA1268/GL/-T TRANSISTOR R 779 QRZ0218-R22 EMIT RESISTOR Q1801 2SC2240-BL/AB/T TRANSISTOR R 780 QRZ0218-R22 EMIT RESISTOR Q1802 2SC2240-BL/AB/T TRANSISTOR R 781 QRE141J-391Y C RESISTOR 390 5% 1/4W Q1803 2SC2240-BL/AB/T TRANSISTOR R 782 QRE141J-391Y C RESISTOR 390 5% 1/4W Q1804 2SC2240-BL/AB/T TRANSISTOR R 783 QRE141J-621Y C RESISTOR 620 5% 1/4W Q1805 KTA1268/GL/-T TRANSISTOR R 784 QRE141J-621Y C RESISTOR 620 5% 1/4W Q1806 KTA1268/GL/-T TRANSISTOR R 787 QRE141J-473Y C RESISTOR 47K 5% 1/4W Q1831 2SD637/QR/ TRANSISTOR R 788 QRE141J-473Y C RESISTOR 47K 5% 1/4W Q1832 2SD637/QR/ TRANSISTOR R 789 QRE141J-471Y C RESISTOR 470 5% 1/4W Q1851 2SD2390/OPY/-F6 TRANSISTOR R 790 QRE141J-471Y C RESISTOR 470 5% 1/4W Q1852 2SD2390/OPY/-F6 TRANSISTOR R 791 QRJ125J-330 UNF C RESISTOR 33 5% 1/2W Q1853 2SB1560/OPY/-F6 TRANSISTOR R 792 QRJ125J-330 UNF C RESISTOR 33 5% 1/2W Q1854 2SB1560/OPY/-F6 TRANSISTOR R 793 QRL022J-100 UNF OMF RESISTOR 10 5% 1/2W Q1871 KTC3200/GL/-T TRANSISTOR R 794 QRL022J-100 UNF OMF RESISTOR 10 5% 1/2W Q1872 KTC3200/GL/-T TRANSISTOR R 795 QRE141J-102Y C RESISTOR 1.0K 5% 1/4W Q1873 KTA1268/GL/-T TRANSISTOR R 796 QRE141J-102Y C RESISTOR 1.0K 5% 1/4W Q1874 KTA1268/GL/-T TRANSISTOR R 797 QRE141J-153Y C RESISTOR 15K 5% 1/4W Q1891 KTA1268/GL/-T TRANSISTOR R 798 QRE141J-153Y C RESISTOR 15K 5% 1/4W Q1892 KTA1268/GL/-T TRANSISTOR R1701 QRE141J-222Y C RESISTOR 2.2K 5% 1/4W R 701 QRE141J-222Y C RESISTOR 2.2K 5% 1/4W R1702 QRE141J-683Y C RESISTOR 68K 5% 1/4W R 702 QRE141J-222Y C RESISTOR 2.2K 5% 1/4W R1703 QRE141J-202Y C RESISTOR 2.0K 5% 1/4W R 703 QRE141J-104Y C RESISTOR 100K 5% 1/4W R1705 QRE141J-123Y C RESISTOR 12K 5% 1/4W R 704 QRE141J-104Y C RESISTOR 100K 5% 1/4W R1711 QRE141J-331Y C RESISTOR 330 5% 1/4W R 705 QRE141J-202Y C RESISTOR 2.0K 5% 1/4W R1712 QRE141J-563Y C RESISTOR 56K 5% 1/4W R 706 QRE141J-202Y C RESISTOR 2.0K 5% 1/4W R1721 QRJ146J-221X UNF C RESISTOR 220 5% 1/4W R 707 QRE141J-202Y C RESISTOR 2.0K 5% 1/4W R1722 QRE141J-332Y C RESISTOR 3.3K 5% 1/4W R 708 QRE141J-202Y C RESISTOR 2.0K 5% 1/4W R1723 QRE141J-332Y C RESISTOR 3.3K 5% 1/4W R 709 QRE141J-912Y C RESISTOR 9.1K 5% 1/4W R1724 QRE141J-332Y C RESISTOR 3.3K 5% 1/4W R 710 QRE141J-912Y C RESISTOR 9.1K 5% 1/4W R1725 QRE141J-332Y C RESISTOR 3.3K 5% 1/4W R 711 QRE141J-621Y C RESISTOR 620 5% 1/4W R1731 QRE141J-102Y C RESISTOR 1.0K 5% 1/4W R 712 QRE141J-621Y C RESISTOR 620 5% 1/4W R1732 QRE141J-391Y C RESISTOR 390 5% 1/4W R 715 QRE141J-104Y C RESISTOR 100K 5% 1/4W R1741 QRJ146J-221X UNF C RESISTOR 220 5% 1/4W R 716 QRE141J-104Y C RESISTOR 100K 5% 1/4W R1751 QRJ146J-100X UNF C RESISTOR 10 5% 1/4W R 717 QRJ146J-562X UNF C RESISTOR 5.6K 5% 1/4W R1752 QRJ146J-100X UNF C RESISTOR 10 5% 1/4W R 718 QRJ146J-562X UNF C RESISTOR 5.6K 5% 1/4W R1753 QRZ0218-R22 EMIT RESISTOR R 719 QRK126J-103X UNF C RESISTOR 10K 5% 1/2W R1761 QRJ125J-330 UNF C RESISTOR 33 5% 1/2W Area 1/2W 1/2W 1/2W R 720 QRK126J-103X UNF C RESISTOR 10K 5% 1/2W R1762 QRL022J-100 UNF OMF RESISTOR 10 5% 1/2W R 721 QRJ146J-151X UNF C RESISTOR 150 5% 1/4W R1771 QRE141J-391Y C RESISTOR 390 5% 1/4W R 722 QRJ146J-151X UNF C RESISTOR 150 5% 1/4W R1772 QRE141J-391Y C RESISTOR 390 5% 1/4W R 723 QRE141J-391Y C RESISTOR 390 5% 1/4W R1773 QRE141J-201Y C RESISTOR 200 5% 1/4W R 724 QRE141J-391Y C RESISTOR 390 5% 1/4W R1774 QRE141J-201Y C RESISTOR 200 5% 1/4W R 725 QRE141J-152Y C RESISTOR 1.5K 5% 1/4W R1791 QRE141J-102Y C RESISTOR 1.0K 5% 1/4W 3-9 RX-8010VBK Electrical parts list (Power board) A 3-10 Item Parts number Parts name Block No. 03 Remarks R1793 QRE141J-183Y C RESISTOR 18K 5% 1/4W R1795 QRE141J-473Y C RESISTOR 47K 5% 1/4W R1801 QRE141J-222Y C RESISTOR 2.2K 5% 1/4W R1802 QRE141J-222Y C RESISTOR 2.2K 5% 1/4W R1803 QRE141J-683Y C RESISTOR 68K 5% 1/4W R1804 QRE141J-683Y C RESISTOR 68K 5% 1/4W R1805 QRE141J-202Y C RESISTOR 2.0K 5% 1/4W R1806 QRE141J-202Y C RESISTOR 2.0K 5% 1/4W R1809 QRE141J-123Y C RESISTOR 12K 5% 1/4W R1810 QRE141J-123Y C RESISTOR 12K 5% 1/4W R1811 QRE141J-331Y C RESISTOR 330 5% 1/4W R1812 QRE141J-331Y C RESISTOR 330 5% 1/4W R1813 QRE141J-563Y C RESISTOR 56K 5% 1/4W R1814 QRE141J-563Y C RESISTOR 56K 5% 1/4W R1821 QRJ146J-221X UNF C RESISTOR 220 5% 1/4W R1822 QRJ146J-221X UNF C RESISTOR 220 5% 1/4W R1823 QRE141J-332Y C RESISTOR 3.3K 5% 1/4W R1824 QRE141J-332Y C RESISTOR 3.3K 5% 1/4W R1825 QRE141J-332Y C RESISTOR 3.3K 5% 1/4W R1826 QRE141J-332Y C RESISTOR 3.3K 5% 1/4W R1827 QRE141J-332Y C RESISTOR 3.3K 5% 1/4W R1828 QRE141J-332Y C RESISTOR 3.3K 5% 1/4W R1829 QRE141J-332Y C RESISTOR 3.3K 5% 1/4W R1830 QRE141J-332Y C RESISTOR 3.3K 5% 1/4W R1831 QRE141J-102Y C RESISTOR 1.0K 5% 1/4W R1832 QRE141J-102Y C RESISTOR 1.0K 5% 1/4W R1833 QRE141J-391Y C RESISTOR 390 5% 1/4W R1834 QRE141J-391Y C RESISTOR 390 5% 1/4W R1841 QRJ146J-221X UNF C RESISTOR 220 5% 1/4W R1842 QRJ146J-221X UNF C RESISTOR 220 5% 1/4W R1851 QRJ146J-100X UNF C RESISTOR 10 5% 1/4W R1852 QRJ146J-100X UNF C RESISTOR 10 5% 1/4W R1853 QRJ146J-100X UNF C RESISTOR 10 5% 1/4W R1854 QRJ146J-100X UNF C RESISTOR 10 5% 1/4W R1855 QRZ0218-R22 EMIT RESISTOR R1856 QRZ0218-R22 EMIT RESISTOR R1861 QRJ125J-330 UNF C RESISTOR 33 5% 1/2W R1862 QRJ125J-330 UNF C RESISTOR 33 5% 1/2W R1863 QRL022J-100 UNF OMF RESISROR 10 5% 1/2W R1864 QRL022J-100 UNF OMF RESISTOR 10 5% 1/2W R1871 QRE141J-391Y C RESISTOR 390 5% 1/4W R1872 QRE141J-391Y C RESISTOR 390 5% 1/4W R1873 QRE141J-391Y C RESISTOR 390 5% 1/4W R1874 QRE141J-391Y C RESISTOR 390 5% 1/4W R1875 QRE141J-201Y C RESISTOR 200 5% 1/4W R1876 QRE141J-201Y C RESISTOR 200 5% 1/4W R1877 QRE141J-201Y C RESISTOR 200 5% 1/4W R1878 QRE141J-201Y C RESISTOR 200 5% 1/4W R1891 QRE141J-102Y C RESISTOR 1.0K 5% 1/4W R1892 QRE141J-102Y C RESISTOR 1.0K 5% 1/4W R1893 QRE141J-183Y C RESISTOR 18K 5% 1/4W R1894 QRE141J-183Y C RESISTOR 18K 5% 1/4W R1895 QRE141J-473Y C RESISTOR 47K 5% 1/4W R1896 QRE141J-473Y C RESISTOR 47K 5% 1/4W TH731 QAD0012-202 THERMISTOR TH783 QAD0012-202 THERMISTOR TH784 QAD0012-202 THERMISTOR TH831 QAD0012-202 THERMISTOR TH832 QAD0012-202 THERMISTOR VR787 QVP0008-501Z SEMI V RESISTOR VR788 QVP0008-501Z SEMI V RESISTOR 1/2W 1/2W Area RX-8010VBK Electrical parts list (Input board) A Item Parts number Parts name Block No. 04 Remarks Area A Item Parts number Parts name Remarks C 201 QETN1HM-475Z E CAPACITOR 4.7MF 20% 50V C 308 QFLC1HJ-682Z M CAPACITOR C 202 QETN1HM-475Z E CAPACITOR 4.7MF 20% 50V C 309 NCS31HJ-101X C CAPACITOR C 203 QETN0JM-477Z E CAPACITOR 470MF 20% 6.3V C 310 NCS31HJ-101X C CAPACITOR C 204 QETN1HM-475Z E CAPACITOR 4.7MF 20% 50V C 311 QETN1HM-475Z E CAPACITOR 4.7MF 20% 50V C 205 QETN0JM-477Z E CAPACITOR 470MF 20% 6.3V C 312 QETN1HM-475Z E CAPACITOR 4.7MF 20% 50V C 206 QETN1HM-475Z E CAPACITOR 4.7MF 20% 50V C 313 QETN1AM-107Z E CAPACITOR 100MF 20% 10V C 207 QETN0JM-477Z E CAPACITOR 470MF 20% 6.3V C 314 QETN1AM-107Z E CAPACITOR 100MF 20% 10V C 208 QETN1CM-476Z E CAPACITOR 47MF 20% 16V C 315 QETN1CM-476Z E CAPACITOR 47MF 20% 16V C 209 QCF11HZ-103 C CAPACITOR .010MF +80:-20% C 316 QETN1CM-476Z E CAPACITOR 47MF 20% 16V C 210 QETN1HM-475Z E CAPACITOR 4.7MF 20% 50V C 321 NCB31HK-221X C CAPACITOR C 211 QETN1HM-475Z E CAPACITOR 4.7MF 20% 50V C 322 NCB31HK-221X C CAPACITOR C 212 QETN1CM-476Z E CAPACITOR 47MF 20% 16V C 333 NCB31HK-391X C CAPACITOR C 213 QCF11HZ-103 C CAPACITOR .010MF +80:-20% C 334 NCB31HK-391X C CAPACITOR C 214 QETN1HM-475Z E CAPACITOR 4.7MF 20% 50V C 335 QETN1EM-226Z E CAPACITOR 22MF 20% 25V C 215 QETN1HM-475Z E CAPACITOR 4.7MF 20% 50V C 336 QETN1EM-226Z E CAPACITOR 22MF 20% 25V C 216 QDX31EM-473Z C CAPACITOR C 339 NCB31HK-561X C CAPACITOR C 217 QETN1AM-477Z E CAPACITOR 470MF 20% 10V C 341 QETN1HM-106Z E CAPACITOR 10MF 20% 50V C 218 QCZ0202-155Z ML C CAPACITOR 1.5MF C 342 QETN1HM-106Z E CAPACITOR 10MF 20% 50V C 219 QDC31HJ-150Z C CAPACITOR C 343 QETN1HM-106Z E CAPACITOR 10MF 20% 50V C 220 QDC31HJ-100Z C CAPACITOR C 344 QETN1HM-106Z E CAPACITOR 10MF 20% 50V C 221 QDC31HJ-470Z C CAPACITOR C 361 QETN1HM-475Z E CAPACITOR 4.7MF 20% 50V C 222 QDC31HJ-270Z C CAPACITOR C 362 QETN1HM-475Z E CAPACITOR 4.7MF 20% 50V C 223 NCB31HK-102X C CAPACITOR C 363 QETN1HM-475Z E CAPACITOR 4.7MF 20% 50V C 224 NCB31HK-271X C CAPACITOR C 364 QETN1HM-475Z E CAPACITOR 4.7MF 20% 50V C 225 NCS31HJ-121X C CAPACITOR C 385 QETN1EM-226Z E CAPACITOR 22MF 20% 25V C 226 NCS31HJ-470X C CAPACITOR C 386 QETN1EM-226Z E CAPACITOR 22MF 20% 25V C 231 QETN1HM-475Z E CAPACITOR C 389 NCB31HK-561X C CAPACITOR C 241 QDX31EM-473Z C CAPACITOR C 391 QETN1HM-106Z E CAPACITOR 10MF 20% 50V C 242 QETN1HM-475Z E CAPACITOR C 392 QETN1HM-106Z E CAPACITOR 10MF 20% 50V C 244 QDX31EM-473Z C CAPACITOR C 393 NCB31HK-122X C CAPACITOR C 245 QETN1HM-475Z E CAPACITOR C 394 NCB31HK-122X C CAPACITOR C 246 QDX31EM-473Z C CAPACITOR C 395 NCS31HJ-121X C CAPACITOR C 247 QETN0JM-477Z E CAPACITOR C 396 NCS31HJ-121X C CAPACITOR C 249 QDX31EM-473Z C CAPACITOR C 397 QETN1HM-106Z E CAPACITOR 10MF 20% 50V C 250 QETN1HM-475Z E CAPACITOR C 398 QETN1HM-106Z E CAPACITOR 10MF 20% 50V C 251 QDX31EM-473Z C CAPACITOR CN200 QGB2510K1-11 CONNECTOR C 252 QETN0JM-477Z E CAPACITOR CN204 QGB1214K1-08S CONNECTOR C 253 NCS31HJ-100X C CAPACITOR CN205 QGB1214J1-08S CONNECTOR C 254 QDX31EM-473Z C CAPACITOR CN206 QGA2501F1-02 CONNECTOR C 255 QETN1HM-475Z E CAPACITOR 4.7MF 20% 50V CN240 QGB2510K1-12 CONNECTOR C 256 QCF11HZ-103 C CAPACITOR .010MF +80:-20% CN242 QGB1214K1-10S CONNECTOR C 257 QETN1CM-476Z E CAPACITOR 47MF 20% 16V CN243 QGB1214J1-10S CONNECTOR C 258 QCF11HZ-103 C CAPACITOR .010MF +80:-20% CN244 QGA2501F1-04 CONNECTOR C 259 QETN1CM-476Z E CAPACITOR 47MF 20% 16V CN311 QGB2510K1-14 CONNECTOR C 260 QDX31EM-473Z C CAPACITOR CN313 QGB2510K1-13 CONNECTOR C 261 QETN1HM-475Z E CAPACITOR CN351 QGB1214K1-16S CONNECTOR C 268 NCS31HJ-470X C CAPACITOR CN361 QGB1214J1-16S CONNECTOR C 269 NCS31HJ-470X C CAPACITOR CN371 QGB1214K1-14S CONNECTOR C 270 NCS31HJ-101X C CAPACITOR CN381 QGB1214J1-14S CONNECTOR C 271 NCS31HJ-101X C CAPACITOR CN416 QGA2501F1-06 CONNECTOR C 272 QDX31EM-473Z C CAPACITOR CN501 QGB1214J1-12S CONNECTOR C 273 QDX31EM-473Z C CAPACITOR CN731 QJP001-032301 SHI CR C-B WIRE C 274 QETN0JM-477Z E CAPACITOR CN732 WJP0026-001A CONNECTOR C 275 NCS31HJ-470X C CAPACITOR C1281 QETN1AM-107Z E CAPACITOR 100MF 20% 10V C 276 NCS31HJ-470X C CAPACITOR C1282 QETN1AM-477Z E CAPACITOR 470MF 20% 10V C 277 QETN1HM-475Z E CAPACITOR 4.7MF 20% 50V C1283 QETN1EM-476Z E CAPACITOR 47MF 20% 25V C 301 QETN1HM-475Z E CAPACITOR 4.7MF 20% 50V C1284 QETN1AM-107Z E CAPACITOR 100MF 20% 10V C 302 QETN1HM-475Z E CAPACITOR 4.7MF 20% 50V C1285 QETN1EM-476Z E CAPACITOR 47MF 20% 25V C 303 NCS31HJ-101X C CAPACITOR C1286 QETN1AM-107Z E CAPACITOR 100MF 20% 10V C 304 NCS31HJ-101X C CAPACITOR C1301 QETN1EM-476Z E CAPACITOR 47MF 20% 25V C 305 QFLC1HJ-182Z M CAPACITOR 1800PF 5% 50V C1302 QETN1EM-476Z E CAPACITOR 47MF 20% 25V C 306 QFLC1HJ-182Z M CAPACITOR 1800PF 5% 50V C1303 NCB31HK-221X C CAPACITOR C 307 QFLC1HJ-682Z M CAPACITOR 6800PF 5% 50V C1305 QETN1EM-476Z E CAPACITOR 4.7MF 20% 50V 4.7MF 20% 50V 4.7MF 20% 50V 470MF 20% 6.3V 4.7MF 20% 50V 470MF 20% 6.3V 4.7MF 20% 50V 470MF 20% 6.3V Area 6800PF 5% 50V 47MF 20% 25V 3-11 RX-8010VBK Electrical parts list (Input board) A 3-12 Item Parts number Parts name Block No. 04 Remarks Area A Item Parts number Parts name C1306 QETN1EM-476Z E CAPACITOR 47MF 20% 25V HL203 VYH7653-005 IC HOLDER C1307 QETN1CM-476Z E CAPACITOR 47MF 20% 16V IC201 BA7625 IC C1311 QETN1HM-475Z E CAPACITOR 4.7MF 20% 50V IC202 NJM2285V-W IC C1312 QETN1HM-475Z E CAPACITOR 4.7MF 20% 50V IC203 MB90088PF-131 IC C1313 QETN1HM-475Z E CAPACITOR 4.7MF 20% 50V IC241 BA7626 IC C1314 QETN1HM-475Z E CAPACITOR 4.7MF 20% 50V IC242 BA7625 IC C1315 QER61HM-224Z E CAPACITOR .22MF 20% 50V IC301 NJM4580D-D IC C1316 QER61HM-224Z E CAPACITOR .22MF 20% 50V IC302 TC9164AF-X IC C1319 NCB31HK-221X C CAPACITOR IC303 BA15218F-XE IC C1321 QETN1HM-475Z E CAPACITOR 4.7MF 20% 50V IC304 BA15218F-XE IC C1322 QETN1HM-475Z E CAPACITOR 4.7MF 20% 50V IC371 TC9163AF-X IC C1323 QETN1HM-475Z E CAPACITOR 4.7MF 20% 50V IC372 BA15218F-XE IC C1324 QETN1HM-475Z E CAPACITOR 4.7MF 20% 50V IC380 TC9162AN IC C1325 QER61HM-224Z E CAPACITOR .22MF 20% 50V IC381 TC9459F-X IC C1326 QER61HM-224Z E CAPACITOR .22MF 20% 50V IC382 TC9459F-X IC C1329 NCB31HK-221X C CAPACITOR IC383 TC9459F-X IC C1331 QETN1HM-475Z E CAPACITOR 4.7MF 20% 50V IC385 BA15218F-XE IC C1332 QETN1HM-475Z E CAPACITOR 4.7MF 20% 50V IC386 BA15218F-XE IC C1333 QETN1HM-475Z E CAPACITOR 4.7MF 20% 50V IC388 TC74HC4053AF-X IC C1334 QETN1HM-475Z E CAPACITOR 4.7MF 20% 50V IC389 TC74HC4053AF-X IC C1339 NCB31HK-221X C CAPACITOR IC390 MAX4018ESD-X IC C1341 QETN1HM-475Z E CAPACITOR 4.7MF 20% 50V J 201 QNN0078-001 PIN JACK C1342 QETN1HM-475Z E CAPACITOR 4.7MF 20% 50V J 202 QNN0011-001 PIN JACK C1343 QETN1EM-476Z E CAPACITOR 47MF 20% 25V J 203 QNN0011-001 PIN JACK C1344 QETN1EM-476Z E CAPACITOR 47MF 20% 25V J 241 QND0002-001 S-CONNECTOR C1345 NCB31HK-391X C CAPACITOR J 242 QND0028-001 DIN CONNECTOR C1361 NCB31HK-391X C CAPACITOR J 243 QND0088-001 S JACK C1362 NCB31HK-391X C CAPACITOR J 301 QNN0056-001 PIN JACK C1363 QETN1HM-475Z E CAPACITOR 4.7MF 20% 50V J 302 QNN0056-001 PIN JACK C1364 QETN1HM-475Z E CAPACITOR 4.7MF 20% 50V J 303 QNN0058-001 PIN JACK C1365 QETN1HM-475Z E CAPACITOR 4.7MF 20% 50V J 371 QNN0056-001 PIN JACK C1366 QETN1HM-475Z E CAPACITOR 4.7MF 20% 50V J 372 QNN0056-001 PIN JACK C1370 NCB31HK-221X C CAPACITOR J 373 QNN0056-001 PIN JACK C1371 NCB31HK-221X C CAPACITOR J1340 QNN0060-001 PIN JACK C1372 NCB31HK-221X C CAPACITOR J1360 QNN0390-001 PIN JACK C1375 QCF11HZ-103 C CAPACITOR .010MF +80:-20% J1370 QNS0083-001 3.5 JACK C1376 QETN1EM-476Z E CAPACITOR 47MF 20% 25V J1371 QNS0077-001 3.5 JACK C1377 QCF11HZ-103 C CAPACITOR .010MF +80:-20% J1372 QNS0083-001 3.5 JACK C1378 QETN1EM-476Z E CAPACITOR 47MF 20% 25V J1380 QNN0391-001 PIN JACK C1380 QETN1EM-476Z E CAPACITOR 47MF 20% 25V L 200 NQL085J-220X INDUCTOR C1381 NCS31HJ-470X C CAPACITOR Q 200 KTA1267/YG/-T TRANSISTOR C1382 NCS31HJ-470X C CAPACITOR Q 201 KTA1267/YG/-T TRANSISTOR C1383 NCS31HJ-470X C CAPACITOR Q 202 KRC110M-T TRANSISTOR C1384 QETN1EM-476Z E CAPACITOR 47MF 20% 25V Q 203 KRC107M-T D TRANSISTOR C1385 QETN1HM-475Z E CAPACITOR 4.7MF 20% 50V Q 204 KTA1267/YG/-T TRANSISTOR C1386 QETN1HM-475Z E CAPACITOR 4.7MF 20% 50V Q 205 KTA1267/YG/-T TRANSISTOR C1387 NCS31HJ-470X C CAPACITOR Q 206 KTA1267/YG/-T TRANSISTOR C1388 NCS31HJ-470X C CAPACITOR Q 207 KTA1267/YG/-T TRANSISTOR C1389 NCS31HJ-470X C CAPACITOR Q 208 DTC123YSA-T D TRANSISTOR C1390 QETN1EM-476Z E CAPACITOR 47MF 20% 25V Q 240 KTA1267/YG/-T TRANSISTOR C1391 QETN1HM-475Z E CAPACITOR 4.7MF 20% 50V Q 241 KTA1267/YG/-T TRANSISTOR C1392 QETN1HM-475Z E CAPACITOR 4.7MF 20% 50V Q 242 KTA1267/YG/-T TRANSISTOR C1393 NCS31HJ-101X C CAPACITOR Q 243 KTA1267/YG/-T TRANSISTOR C1394 NCS31HJ-101X C CAPACITOR Q 244 KRC110M-T TRANSISTOR C1395 NCS31HJ-101X C CAPACITOR Q 245 KRC110M-T TRANSISTOR C1396 QETN0JM-477Z E CAPACITOR 470MF 20% 6.3V Q 246 KRC107M-T D TRANSISTOR C1397 QETN1AM-107Z E CAPACITOR 100MF 20% 10V Q 247 KRC107M-T D TRANSISTOR C1398 QETN1AM-107Z E CAPACITOR 100MF 20% 10V Q1307 KRA104M-T D TRANSISTOR D 200 1SS133-T1 SI DIODE Q1313 2SC3576-JVC-T TRANSISTOR D 201 1SS133-T1 SI DIODE Q1314 2SC3576-JVC-T TRANSISTOR D 240 1SS133-T1 SI DIODE Q1323 2SC3576-JVC-T TRANSISTOR D 241 1SS133-T1 SI DIODE Q1333 2SC3576-JVC-T TRANSISTOR D1370 MA3062/H/-X ZENER DIODE Q1334 2SC3576-JVC-T TRANSISTOR Remarks Area RX-8010VBK Electrical parts list (Input board) A Item Q1341 A A Parts number Parts name Block No. 04 Remarks Area A Item Parts number Parts name Remarks 2SC3576-JVC-T TRANSISTOR R 302 NRSA63J-222X MG RESISTOR Q1342 2SC3576-JVC-T TRANSISTOR R 303 NRSA63J-473X MG RESISTOR Q1343 KRA104M-T D TRANSISTOR R 304 NRSA63J-473X MG RESISTOR R 200 NRSA63J-750X MG RESISTOR R 305 NRSA63J-621X MG RESISTOR R 201 NRSA63J-750X MG RESISTOR R 306 NRSA63J-621X MG RESISTOR R 202 NRSA63J-750X MG RESISTOR R 307 NRSA63J-393X MG RESISTOR R 203 NRSA63J-750X MG RESISTOR R 308 NRSA63J-393X MG RESISTOR R 204 NRSA63J-750X MG RESISTOR R 309 NRSA63J-474X MG RESISTOR R 205 NRSA63J-750X MG RESISTOR R 310 NRSA63J-474X MG RESISTOR R 206 NRSA63J-750X MG RESISTOR R 311 NRSA63J-104X MG RESISTOR R 207 NRSA63J-331X MG RESISTOR R 312 NRSA63J-104X MG RESISTOR R 208 NRSA63J-331X MG RESISTOR R 315 QRJ146J-331X UNF C RESISTOR 330 5% 1/4W R 209 NRSA63J-473X MG RESISTOR R 316 QRJ146J-331X UNF C RESISTOR 330 5% 1/4W R 210 NRSA63J-331X MG RESISTOR R 323 NRSA63J-471X MG RESISTOR R 211 NRSA63J-473X MG RESISTOR R 324 NRSA63J-471X MG RESISTOR R 212 NRSA63J-331X MG RESISTOR R 325 NRSA63J-471X MG RESISTOR R 213 NRSA63J-473X MG RESISTOR R 326 NRSA63J-471X MG RESISTOR R 214 NRSA63J-151X MG RESISTOR R 327 NRSA63J-471X MG RESISTOR R 215 NRSA63J-151X MG RESISTOR R 328 NRSA63J-471X MG RESISTOR R 216 NRSA63J-301X MG RESISTOR R 329 NRSA63J-471X MG RESISTOR R 217 NRSA63J-103X MG RESISTOR R 330 NRSA63J-471X MG RESISTOR R 218 NRSA63J-331X MG RESISTOR R 331 NRSA63J-471X MG RESISTOR R 219 NRSA63J-101X MG RESISTOR R 332 NRSA63J-471X MG RESISTOR R 220 NRSA63J-151X MG RESISTOR R 333 NRSA63J-471X MG RESISTOR R 221 NRSA63J-151X MG RESISTOR R 334 NRSA63J-471X MG RESISTOR R 222 NRSA63J-561X MG RESISTOR R 335 QRZ9005-680X F RESISTOR 68 1/0W R 223 NRSA63J-561X MG RESISTOR R 336 QRZ9005-680X F RESISTOR 68 1/0W R 224 NRSA63J-561X MG RESISTOR R 341 NRSA63J-104X MG RESISTOR R 225 QRJ146J-2R2X UNF C RESISTOR R 342 NRSA63J-104X MG RESISTOR R 231 NRSA63J-222X MG RESISTOR R 343 NRSA63J-104X MG RESISTOR R 232 NRSA63J-470X MG RESISTOR R 344 NRSA63J-104X MG RESISTOR R 240 NRSA63J-750X MG RESISTOR R 345 NRSA63J-104X MG RESISTOR R 241 NRSA63J-750X MG RESISTOR R 346 NRSA63J-104X MG RESISTOR R 242 NRSA63J-750X MG RESISTOR R 361 NRSA63J-104X MG RESISTOR R 243 NRSA63J-750X MG RESISTOR R 362 NRSA63J-104X MG RESISTOR R 244 NRSA63J-750X MG RESISTOR R 363 NRSA63J-104X MG RESISTOR R 245 NRSA63J-750X MG RESISTOR R 364 NRSA63J-104X MG RESISTOR R 246 NRSA63J-750X MG RESISTOR R 365 NRSA63J-104X MG RESISTOR R 247 NRSA63J-750X MG RESISTOR R 366 NRSA63J-104X MG RESISTOR R 248 NRSA63J-151X MG RESISTOR R 371 NRSA63J-471X MG RESISTOR R 249 NRSA63J-151X MG RESISTOR R 372 NRSA63J-471X MG RESISTOR R 250 NRSA63J-151X MG RESISTOR R 373 NRSA63J-471X MG RESISTOR R 251 NRSA63J-151X MG RESISTOR R 374 NRSA63J-471X MG RESISTOR R 253 NRSA63J-153X MG RESISTOR R 375 NRSA63J-471X MG RESISTOR R 254 NRSA63J-153X MG RESISTOR R 376 NRSA63J-471X MG RESISTOR R 255 NRSA63J-153X MG RESISTOR R 377 NRSA63J-471X MG RESISTOR R 266 NRSA63J-750X MG RESISTOR R 378 NRSA63J-471X MG RESISTOR R 267 NRSA63J-473X MG RESISTOR R 379 NRSA63J-471X MG RESISTOR R 268 NRSA63J-750X MG RESISTOR R 380 NRSA63J-471X MG RESISTOR R 269 NRSA63J-473X MG RESISTOR R 381 NRSA63J-471X MG RESISTOR R 271 QRJ146J-3R3X UNF C RESISTOR R 382 NRSA63J-471X MG RESISTOR R 272 NRSA63J-750X MG RESISTOR R 385 QRZ9005-680X F RESISTOR 68 1/0W R 273 NRSA63J-473X MG RESISTOR R 386 QRZ9005-680X F RESISTOR 68 1/0W R 274 NRSA63J-750X MG RESISTOR R 387 NRSA63J-471X MG RESISTOR R 275 NRSA63J-750X MG RESISTOR R 388 NRSA63J-471X MG RESISTOR R 276 NRSA63J-750X MG RESISTOR R 389 NRSA63J-471X MG RESISTOR R 280 NRSA63J-301X MG RESISTOR R 390 NRSA63J-471X MG RESISTOR R 281 NRSA63J-301X MG RESISTOR R 391 NRSA63J-512X MG RESISTOR R 282 NRSA63J-103X MG RESISTOR R 392 NRSA63J-512X MG RESISTOR R 283 NRSA63J-103X MG RESISTOR R 393 NRSA63J-103X MG RESISTOR R 284 NRSA63J-301X MG RESISTOR R 394 NRSA63J-103X MG RESISTOR R 285 NRSA63J-301X MG RESISTOR R 395 NRSA63J-512X MG RESISTOR R 301 NRSA63J-222X MG RESISTOR R 396 NRSA63J-512X MG RESISTOR A A A A 2.2 5% 1/4W 3.3 5% 1/4W A A Area 3-13 RX-8010VBK Electrical parts list (Input board) A A A A A A A 3-14 Item Parts number Parts name Block No. 04 Remarks Area A Item Parts number Parts name R 397 NRSA63J-104X MG RESISTOR R1368 NRSA63J-104X MG RESISTOR R 398 NRSA63J-104X MG RESISTOR R1370 NRSA63J-471X MG RESISTOR R1281 NRSA63J-472X MG RESISTOR R1371 NRSA63J-221X MG RESISTOR R1282 NRSA63J-472X MG RESISTOR R1372 NRSA63J-101X MG RESISTOR R1283 NRSA63J-102X MG RESISTOR R1373 NRSA63J-221X MG RESISTOR R1284 NRSA63J-112X MG RESISTOR R1374 NRSA63J-221X MG RESISTOR R1285 NRSA63J-472X MG RESISTOR R1375 NRSA63J-221X MG RESISTOR R1286 NRSA63J-472X MG RESISTOR R1379 NRSA63J-750X MG RESISTOR R1287 NRSA63J-102X MG RESISTOR R1380 NRSA63J-750X MG RESISTOR R1288 NRSA63J-112X MG RESISTOR R1381 NRSA63J-750X MG RESISTOR R1289 NRSA63J-472X MG RESISTOR R1382 NRSA63J-750X MG RESISTOR R1290 NRSA63J-472X MG RESISTOR R1383 NRSA63J-750X MG RESISTOR R1291 NRSA63J-102X MG RESISTOR R1384 NRSA63J-750X MG RESISTOR R1292 NRSA63J-112X MG RESISTOR R1385 NRSA63J-750X MG RESISTOR R1293 NRSA63J-162X MG RESISTOR R1386 NRSA63J-750X MG RESISTOR R1294 NRSA63J-472X MG RESISTOR R1387 NRSA63J-750X MG RESISTOR R1301 QRZ9005-680X F RESISTOR 68 1/0W R1388 NRSA63J-473X MG RESISTOR R1302 QRZ9005-680X F RESISTOR 68 1/0W R1389 NRSA63J-473X MG RESISTOR R1303 NRSA63J-122X MG RESISTOR R1390 NRSA63J-473X MG RESISTOR R1304 NRSA63J-122X MG RESISTOR X 200 QAX0260-001Z CRYSTAL R1305 QRZ9005-680X F RESISTOR 68 1/0W R1306 QRZ9005-680X F RESISTOR 68 1/0W R1307 NRSA63J-102X MG RESISTOR R1311 NRSA63J-104X MG RESISTOR R1312 NRSA63J-104X MG RESISTOR R1313 NRSA63J-102X MG RESISTOR R1314 NRSA63J-103X MG RESISTOR R1315 NRSA63J-103X MG RESISTOR R1316 NRSA63J-102X MG RESISTOR R1321 NRSA63J-104X MG RESISTOR R1322 NRSA63J-104X MG RESISTOR R1323 NRSA63J-102X MG RESISTOR R1324 NRSA63J-103X MG RESISTOR R1329 NRSA63J-0R0X MG RESISTOR R1330 NRSA63J-0R0X MG RESISTOR R1331 NRSA63J-104X MG RESISTOR R1332 NRSA63J-104X MG RESISTOR R1333 NRSA63J-102X MG RESISTOR R1334 NRSA63J-103X MG RESISTOR R1335 NRSA63J-103X MG RESISTOR R1336 NRSA63J-102X MG RESISTOR R1341 NRSA63J-104X MG RESISTOR R1342 NRSA63J-102X MG RESISTOR R1343 NRSA63J-183X MG RESISTOR R1344 NRSA63J-104X MG RESISTOR R1345 NRSA63J-471X MG RESISTOR R1346 NRSA63J-103X MG RESISTOR R1347 NRSA63J-471X MG RESISTOR R1348 NRSA63J-103X MG RESISTOR R1349 NRSA63J-474X MG RESISTOR R1350 QRZ9005-680X F RESISTOR 68 1/0W R1351 QRZ9005-680X F RESISTOR 68 1/0W R1355 NRSA63J-222X MG RESISTOR R1356 NRSA63J-222X MG RESISTOR R1357 NRSA63J-392X MG RESISTOR R1358 NRSA63J-392X MG RESISTOR R1361 NRSA63J-561X MG RESISTOR R1362 NRSA63J-561X MG RESISTOR R1363 NRSA63J-104X MG RESISTOR R1364 NRSA63J-104X MG RESISTOR R1365 NRSA63J-104X MG RESISTOR R1366 NRSA63J-104X MG RESISTOR R1367 NRSA63J-104X MG RESISTOR Remarks Area RX-8010VBK Electrical parts list (DSP board) A Item Parts number Parts name Block No. 05 Remarks Area A Item Parts number Parts name C 571 NCB31HK-103X C CAPACITOR C2308 NEA71EM-475X E CAPACITOR C 573 NCF31CZ-104X C CAPACITOR C2347 NCS31HJ-330X C CAPACITOR C 577 NCS31HJ-101X C CAPACITOR C2348 NCS31HJ-330X C CAPACITOR C 579 NCS31HJ-101X C CAPACITOR C2349 NCF31CZ-104X C CAPACITOR C 581 NEA71CM-106X E CAPACITOR C2350 NCF31CZ-104X C CAPACITOR C 582 NEA71CM-106X E CAPACITOR C2351 NEA71HM-105X E CAPACITOR C 583 NEA70JM-476X E CAPACITOR C2352 NEA71HM-105X E CAPACITOR C 584 NCB31CK-104X C CAPACITOR C2353 NCS31HJ-330X C CAPACITOR C 587 NCF31CZ-104X C CAPACITOR C2354 NCS31HJ-330X C CAPACITOR C 588 NEA70JM-476X E CAPACITOR C2355 NCF31CZ-104X C CAPACITOR C 589 NCF31CZ-104X C CAPACITOR C2356 NCF31CZ-104X C CAPACITOR C 590 NEA70GM-107X E CAPACITOR C2357 NEA71EM-475X E CAPACITOR CN581 QGB1214K3-12W CONNECTOR C2358 NEA71EM-475X E CAPACITOR CN587 QGB2510K1-07 CONNECTOR C2401 NCB31HK-102X C CAPACITOR C2001 NEA71EM-475X E CAPACITOR C2407 NEA71EM-475X E CAPACITOR C2002 NEA71EM-475X E CAPACITOR C2427 NEA71HM-225X E CAPACITOR C2003 NCB31HK-122X C CAPACITOR C2433 NCS31HJ-330X C CAPACITOR C2004 NCB31HK-122X C CAPACITOR C2439 NCF31CZ-104X C CAPACITOR C2005 NCS31HJ-121X C CAPACITOR C2440 NCF31CZ-104X C CAPACITOR C2006 NCS31HJ-121X C CAPACITOR C2441 NCF31CZ-104X C CAPACITOR C2007 NCS31HJ-391X C CAPACITOR C2442 NCF31CZ-104X C CAPACITOR C2008 NCS31HJ-391X C CAPACITOR C2481 NEA70JM-476X E CAPACITOR C2009 NCF31CZ-104X C CAPACITOR C2501 NCB31HK-103X C CAPACITOR C2010 NCF31CZ-104X C CAPACITOR C2502 NCB31HK-103X C CAPACITOR C2013 NCS31HJ-330X C CAPACITOR C2503 NCB31HK-103X C CAPACITOR C2014 NCS31HJ-330X C CAPACITOR C2504 NCB31HK-103X C CAPACITOR C2018 NEA70JM-476X E CAPACITOR C2505 NCB31HK-103X C CAPACITOR C2019 NCF31CZ-104X C CAPACITOR C2506 NCB31HK-103X C CAPACITOR C2020 NCF31CZ-104X C CAPACITOR C2507 NCB31HK-103X C CAPACITOR C2101 NCB31HK-103X C CAPACITOR C2508 NCB31HK-103X C CAPACITOR C2107 NEA71EM-475X E CAPACITOR C2509 NCB31HK-103X C CAPACITOR C2133 NCB31EK-223X C CAPACITOR C2510 NCB31HK-103X C CAPACITOR C2134 NCB31EK-223X C CAPACITOR C2511 NCB31HK-103X C CAPACITOR C2135 NEA71CM-106X E CAPACITOR C2512 NCB31HK-103X C CAPACITOR C2136 NEA71CM-106X E CAPACITOR C2513 NCB31HK-103X C CAPACITOR C2137 NEA71EM-475X E CAPACITOR C2514 NCB31HK-103X C CAPACITOR C2138 NEA71EM-475X E CAPACITOR C2515 NCB31HK-103X C CAPACITOR C2157 NEA71HM-225X E CAPACITOR C2516 NCB31HK-103X C CAPACITOR C2158 NCS31HJ-330X C CAPACITOR C2517 NCB31HK-103X C CAPACITOR C2187 NEA71HM-225X E CAPACITOR C2518 NCB31HK-103X C CAPACITOR C2189 NCS31HJ-330X C CAPACITOR C2519 NCB31HK-103X C CAPACITOR C2201 NCB31HK-102X C CAPACITOR C2520 NCB31HK-103X C CAPACITOR C2202 NCB31HK-102X C CAPACITOR C2521 NCB31HK-103X C CAPACITOR C2207 NEA71HM-225X E CAPACITOR C2522 NCB31HK-103X C CAPACITOR C2208 NEA71HM-225X E CAPACITOR C2523 NCF31CZ-104X C CAPACITOR C2230 NEA71EM-475X E CAPACITOR C2529 NEA70GM-107X E CAPACITOR C2237 NCS31HJ-330X C CAPACITOR C2532 NEA70GM-107X E CAPACITOR C2238 NCS31HJ-330X C CAPACITOR C2533 NCF31CZ-104X C CAPACITOR C2251 NCF31CZ-104X C CAPACITOR C2534 NCF31CZ-104X C CAPACITOR C2252 NCF31CZ-104X C CAPACITOR C2535 NEA70GM-107X E CAPACITOR C2253 NCF31CZ-104X C CAPACITOR C2536 NCF31CZ-104X C CAPACITOR C2254 NCF31CZ-104X C CAPACITOR C2551 NCS31HJ-270X C CAPACITOR C2255 NCF31CZ-104X C CAPACITOR C2552 NCS31HJ-270X C CAPACITOR C2256 NCF31CZ-104X C CAPACITOR C2553 NEA70GM-107X E CAPACITOR C2257 NEA71HM-225X E CAPACITOR C2555 NCF31CZ-104X C CAPACITOR C2258 NEA71HM-225X E CAPACITOR C2556 NCF31CZ-104X C CAPACITOR C2261 NEA71EM-475X E CAPACITOR C2557 NCS31HJ-330X C CAPACITOR C2262 NEA71EM-475X E CAPACITOR C2560 NCF31CZ-104X C CAPACITOR C2283 NCS31HJ-330X C CAPACITOR C2561 NCF31CZ-104X C CAPACITOR C2284 NCS31HJ-330X C CAPACITOR C2562 NCF31CZ-104X C CAPACITOR C2301 NCB31HK-102X C CAPACITOR C2563 NCF31CZ-104X C CAPACITOR C2302 NCB31HK-102X C CAPACITOR C2564 NCS31HJ-101X C CAPACITOR C2307 NEA71EM-475X E CAPACITOR C2568 NEA71HM-105X E CAPACITOR Remarks Area 3-15 RX-8010VBK Electrical parts list (DSP board) A 3-16 Item Parts number Parts name Block No. 05 Remarks Area A Item Parts number Parts name C2601 NCB31CK-104X C CAPACITOR R 574 NRSA63J-432X MG RESISTOR C2605 NCB31CK-104X C CAPACITOR R 575 NRSA63J-432X MG RESISTOR C2701 NCB31HK-221X C CAPACITOR R 576 NRSA63J-432X MG RESISTOR C2702 NCB31HK-221X C CAPACITOR R 577 NRSA63J-822X MG RESISTOR C2703 NEA70JM-476X E CAPACITOR R 578 NRSA63J-822X MG RESISTOR C2704 NEA70JM-476X E CAPACITOR R 579 NRSA63J-822X MG RESISTOR C2705 NCF31CZ-104X C CAPACITOR R 580 NRSA63J-822X MG RESISTOR C2706 NCF31CZ-104X C CAPACITOR R 582 NRSA63J-103X MG RESISTOR C2707 NCB31CK-104X C CAPACITOR R2001 NRSA63J-104X MG RESISTOR C2710 NEA70JM-476X E CAPACITOR R2002 NRSA63J-104X MG RESISTOR C2712 NCF31CZ-104X C CAPACITOR R2003 NRSA63J-103X MG RESISTOR EP561 E409182-001SM GRAND TERMINAL R2004 NRSA63J-103X MG RESISTOR IC501 XCA56367PV150 IC R2005 NRSA63J-103X MG RESISTOR IC502 TC7S04FU-X IC R2006 NRSA63J-103X MG RESISTOR IC503 TC7S04FU-X IC R2007 NRSA63J-103X MG RESISTOR IC505 PQ070XZ1HZ-X IC R2008 NRSA63J-103X MG RESISTOR IC511 W24L010AJ-12-X IC R2009 NRSA63J-103X MG RESISTOR IC521 BA15218F-XE IC R2010 NRSA63J-103X MG RESISTOR IC522 BA15218F-XE IC R2011 NRSA63J-223X MG RESISTOR IC523 BA15218F-XE IC R2012 NRSA63J-223X MG RESISTOR IC524 BA15218F-XE IC R2013 NRSA63J-223X MG RESISTOR IC525 BA15218F-XE IC R2014 NRSA63J-223X MG RESISTOR IC526 BA15218F-XE IC R2017 NRSA63J-472X MG RESISTOR IC527 BA15218F-XE IC R2018 NRSA63J-472X MG RESISTOR IC528 BA15218F-XE IC R2021 NRSA63J-331X MG RESISTOR IC529 BA15218F-XE IC R2022 NRSA63J-331X MG RESISTOR IC551 AK4112AVF-X IC R2023 NRSA63J-331X MG RESISTOR IC571 AK4527BVQ IC R2024 NRSA63J-331X MG RESISTOR IC581 UPD784215AGC132 IC R2101 NRSA63J-103X MG RESISTOR IC582 TC7SET32FU-X IC R2105 NRSA63J-102X MG RESISTOR IC583 PQ3DZ53-X IC R2107 NRSA63J-104X MG RESISTOR J 564 QNN0347-001 PIN JACK R2127 NRSA63J-223X MG RESISTOR K2606 NQR0269-004X FERRITE BEADS R2128 NRSA63J-223X MG RESISTOR K2607 NQR0269-004X FERRITE BEADS R2129 NRSA63J-223X MG RESISTOR LC501 NQR0322-001X EMI FILTER R2130 NRSA63J-104X MG RESISTOR LC502 NQR0322-001X EMI FILTER R2131 NRSA63J-104X MG RESISTOR LC503 NQR0322-001X EMI FILTER R2132 NRSA63J-103X MG RESISTOR LC551 NQR0322-001X EMI FILTER R2133 NRSA63J-102X MG RESISTOR Q 570 DTC114YE-X TRANSISTOR R2134 NRSA63J-103X MG RESISTOR Q 572 DTC114YE-X TRANSISTOR R2135 NRSA63J-222X MG RESISTOR Q2101 2SD1328/ST/-X TRANSISTOR R2136 NRSA63J-103X MG RESISTOR Q2151 DTA114YE-X TRANSISTOR R2137 NRSA63J-103X MG RESISTOR Q2152 DTA114YE-X TRANSISTOR R2138 NRSA63J-223X MG RESISTOR Q2153 DTA114YE-X TRANSISTOR R2139 NRSA63J-103X MG RESISTOR Q2154 DTA114YE-X TRANSISTOR R2140 NRSA63J-105X MG RESISTOR Q2155 DTA114YE-X TRANSISTOR R2157 NRSA63J-104X MG RESISTOR Q2156 DTA114YE-X TRANSISTOR R2158 NRSA63J-303X MG RESISTOR Q2157 DTA114YE-X TRANSISTOR R2159 NRSA63J-113X MG RESISTOR Q2163 2SD1328/ST/-X TRANSISTOR R2171 NRSA63J-105X MG RESISTOR Q2164 2SD1328/ST/-X TRANSISTOR R2172 NRSA63J-105X MG RESISTOR Q2165 2SD1328/ST/-X TRANSISTOR R2181 NRSA63J-105X MG RESISTOR Q2201 2SD1328/ST/-X TRANSISTOR R2182 NRSA63J-105X MG RESISTOR Q2202 2SD1328/ST/-X TRANSISTOR R2183 NRSA63J-105X MG RESISTOR Q2273 2SD1328/ST/-X TRANSISTOR R2184 NRSA63J-105X MG RESISTOR Q2274 2SD1328/ST/-X TRANSISTOR R2186 NRSA63J-105X MG RESISTOR Q2301 2SD1328/ST/-X TRANSISTOR R2187 NRSA63J-104X MG RESISTOR Q2302 2SD1328/ST/-X TRANSISTOR R2189 NRSA63J-223X MG RESISTOR Q2363 2SD1328/ST/-X TRANSISTOR R2201 NRSA63J-103X MG RESISTOR Q2364 2SD1328/ST/-X TRANSISTOR R2202 NRSA63J-103X MG RESISTOR Q2401 2SD1328/ST/-X TRANSISTOR R2205 NRSA63J-102X MG RESISTOR Q2431 2SD1328/ST/-X TRANSISTOR R2206 NRSA63J-102X MG RESISTOR R 570 NRSA63J-103X MG RESISTOR R2207 NRSA63J-104X MG RESISTOR R 573 NRSA63J-432X MG RESISTOR R2208 NRSA63J-104X MG RESISTOR Remarks Area RX-8010VBK Electrical parts list (DSP board) A Item Parts number Parts name Block No. 05 Remarks Area A Item Parts number Parts name R2221 NRSA63J-333X MG RESISTOR R2506 NRSA63J-473X MG RESISTOR R2222 NRSA63J-333X MG RESISTOR R2507 NRSA63J-473X MG RESISTOR R2225 NRSA63J-104X MG RESISTOR R2508 NRSA63J-473X MG RESISTOR R2226 NRSA63J-104X MG RESISTOR R2511 NRSA63J-221X MG RESISTOR R2512 NRSA63J-221X MG RESISTOR R2513 NRSA63J-221X MG RESISTOR R2514 NRSA63J-103X MG RESISTOR R2515 NRSA63J-103X MG RESISTOR R2227 NRSA63J-104X MG RESISTOR R2231 NRSA63J-333X MG RESISTOR R2232 NRSA63J-333X MG RESISTOR R2233 NRSA63J-333X MG RESISTOR R2516 NRSA63J-103X MG RESISTOR R2234 NRSA63J-333X MG RESISTOR R2517 NRSA63J-103X MG RESISTOR R2235 NRSA63J-333X MG RESISTOR R2518 NRSA63J-221X MG RESISTOR R2236 NRSA63J-333X MG RESISTOR R2519 NRSA63J-221X MG RESISTOR R2237 NRSA63J-683X MG RESISTOR R2520 NRSA63J-221X MG RESISTOR R2238 NRSA63J-683X MG RESISTOR R2521 NRSA63J-103X MG RESISTOR R2257 NRSA63J-104X MG RESISTOR R2522 NRSA63J-103X MG RESISTOR R2523 NRSA63J-103X MG RESISTOR R2531 NRSA63F-511X MG RESISTOR R2532 NRSA63F-102X MG RESISTOR R2551 NRSA63J-183X MG RESISTOR R2258 NRSA63J-104X MG RESISTOR R2261 NRSA63J-104X MG RESISTOR R2262 NRSA63J-104X MG RESISTOR R2263 NRSA63J-103X MG RESISTOR R2552 NRSA63J-221X MG RESISTOR R2264 NRSA63J-103X MG RESISTOR R2553 NRSA63J-221X MG RESISTOR R2273 NRSA63J-103X MG RESISTOR R2554 NRSA63J-221X MG RESISTOR R2274 NRSA63J-103X MG RESISTOR R2555 NRSA63J-221X MG RESISTOR R2275 NRSA63J-682X MG RESISTOR R2557 NRSA63J-221X MG RESISTOR R2276 NRSA63J-682X MG RESISTOR R2559 NRSA63J-221X MG RESISTOR R2277 NRSA63J-105X MG RESISTOR R2560 NRSA63J-221X MG RESISTOR R2278 NRSA63J-105X MG RESISTOR R2561 NRSA63J-112X MG RESISTOR R2562 NRSA63J-112X MG RESISTOR R2563 NRSA63J-112X MG RESISTOR R2564 NRSA63J-750X MG RESISTOR R2283 NRSA63J-103X MG RESISTOR R2284 NRSA63J-103X MG RESISTOR R2285 NRSA63J-113X MG RESISTOR R2568 NRSA63J-221X MG RESISTOR R2286 NRSA63J-113X MG RESISTOR R2571 NRSA63J-512X MG RESISTOR R2301 NRSA63J-103X MG RESISTOR R2572 NRSA63J-512X MG RESISTOR R2302 NRSA63J-103X MG RESISTOR R2573 NRSA63J-512X MG RESISTOR R2305 NRSA63J-102X MG RESISTOR R2581 NRSA63J-221X MG RESISTOR R2306 NRSA63J-102X MG RESISTOR R2582 NRSA63J-221X MG RESISTOR R2307 NRSA63J-104X MG RESISTOR R2583 NRSA63J-221X MG RESISTOR R2308 NRSA63J-104X MG RESISTOR R2584 NRSA63J-221X MG RESISTOR R2585 NRSA63J-221X MG RESISTOR R2586 NRSA63J-221X MG RESISTOR R2587 NRSA63J-221X MG RESISTOR R2589 NRSA63J-221X MG RESISTOR R2349 NRSA63J-303X MG RESISTOR R2350 NRSA63J-303X MG RESISTOR R2351 NRSA63J-113X MG RESISTOR R2352 NRSA63J-113X MG RESISTOR R2591 NRSA63J-221X MG RESISTOR R2353 NRSA63J-222X MG RESISTOR R2593 NRSA63J-221X MG RESISTOR R2354 NRSA63J-222X MG RESISTOR R2594 NRSA63J-221X MG RESISTOR R2355 NRSA63J-103X MG RESISTOR R2595 NRSA63J-221X MG RESISTOR R2356 NRSA63J-103X MG RESISTOR R2596 NRSA63J-221X MG RESISTOR R2357 NRSA63J-223X MG RESISTOR R2597 NRSA63J-102X MG RESISTOR R2358 NRSA63J-223X MG RESISTOR R2611 NRSA63J-473X MG RESISTOR R2359 NRSA63J-103X MG RESISTOR R2612 NRSA63J-473X MG RESISTOR R2613 NRSA63J-473X MG RESISTOR R2614 NRSA63J-473X MG RESISTOR R2615 NRSA63J-473X MG RESISTOR R2360 NRSA63J-103X MG RESISTOR R2363 NRSA63J-104X MG RESISTOR R2364 NRSA63J-104X MG RESISTOR R2616 NRSA63J-473X MG RESISTOR R2401 NRSA63J-103X MG RESISTOR R2701 NRSA63J-473X MG RESISTOR R2405 NRSA63J-102X MG RESISTOR R2702 NRSA63J-473X MG RESISTOR R2407 NRSA63J-104X MG RESISTOR R2703 NRSA63J-473X MG RESISTOR R2425 NRSA63J-103X MG RESISTOR R2709 NRSA63J-221X MG RESISTOR R2427 NRSA63J-104X MG RESISTOR R2715 NRSA63J-432X MG RESISTOR R2429 NRSA63J-103X MG RESISTOR R2716 NRSA63J-221X MG RESISTOR R2431 NRSA63J-113X MG RESISTOR R2717 NRSA63J-221X MG RESISTOR R2718 NRSA63J-221X MG RESISTOR UN560 GP1FA550TZ OPT TRANSMITTER UN561 GP1FA550RZ OPT RECEIVER UN562 GP1FA550RZ OPT RECEIVER R2433 NRSA63J-823X MG RESISTOR R2485 NRSA63J-102X MG RESISTOR R2501 NRSA63J-105X MG RESISTOR R2502 NRSA63J-473X MG RESISTOR UN563 GP1FA550RZ OPT RECEIVER R2503 NRSA63J-473X MG RESISTOR X 581 NAX0275-001X 1COSCIALLATOR R2504 NRSA63J-473X MG RESISTOR X2501 NAX0308-001X CRYSTAL R2505 NRSA63J-473X MG RESISTOR X2551 NAX0213-001X CRYSTAL Remarks Area 3-17 RX-8010VBK Electrical parts list (Micon board) A A A A A A 3-18 Item C 1 Parts number QCZ9104-472 Parts name Block No. 06 Remarks C CAPACITOR 4700PF C 51 QFLC2AJ-472Z M CAPA CITOR 4700PF 5% 100V C 52 QETM1EM-108 E CAPACITOR 1000MF 20% 25V C 54 QETN1CM-477Z E CAPACITOR 470MF 20% 16V C 55 QCF31HZ-472Z C CAPACITOR 4700PF +80:-20% C 61 QFLC2AJ-104Z M CAPACITOR .10MF 5% 100V C 62 QFLC2AJ-104Z M CAPACITOR C 63 QFLC2AJ-104Z C 65 C 66 Area A Item D 56 Parts number MTZJ6.2B-T2 D 57 1SS133-T2 SI DIODE D 61 10E2-FD DIODE D 62 1SR35-400A-T5 DIODE D 63 10E2-FD DIODE D 64 1SR35-400A-T5 DIODE .10MF 5% 100V D 67 1SS133-T2 SI DIODE M CAPACITOR .10MF 5% 100V D 71 1SR35-400A-T5 DIODE QETM1VM-338 E CAPACITOR 3300MF 20% 35V D 72 1SR35-400A-T5 DIODE QETM1VM-108 E CAPACITOR 1000MF 20% 35V D 73 1SR35-400A-T5 DIODE C 68 QFLC1HJ-473Z M CAPACITOR .047MF 5% 50V D 74 MTZJ33C-T2 Z DIODE C 69 QFLC1HJ-473Z M CAPACITOR .047MF 5% 50V D 75 MTZJ8.2C-T2 ZENER DIODE C 70 QETN1HM-227Z E CAPACITOR 220MF 20% 50V D 900 1SR35-400A-T5 DIODE C 71 QETN1JM-107Z E CAPACITOR 100MF 20% 63V D 901 1SR35-400A-T5 DIODE C 72 QETN1HM-226Z E CAPACITOR 22MF 20% 50V D 902 1SR35-400A-T5 DIODE C 73 QETN1HM-226Z E CAPACITOR 22MF 20% 50V D 904 1SS133-T2 SI DIODE C 74 QETN1HM-105Z E CAPACITOR 1.0MF 20% 50V D 921 MTZJ5.6C-T2 ZENER DIODE A A A A Remarks Parts name ZENER DIODE C 901 QETN0JM-107Z E CAPACITOR 100MF 20% 6.3V D 931 MTZJ6.2C-T2 Z DIODE C 902 QCZ0205-155Z ML C CAPACITOR 1.5MF D 941 MTZJ5.6C-T2 ZENER DIODE C 903 QETN0JM-228Z E CAPACITOR 2200MF 20% 6.3V D 951 MTZJ13C-T2 ZENER DIODE C 904 QETN1HM-225Z E CAPACITOR 2.2MF 20% 50V D 961 MTZJ13C-T2 ZENER DIODE C 905 QDVB1EZ-223Y C CAPACITOR D 971 MTZJ10C-T2 Z DIODE C 921 QETN1EM-107Z E CAPACITOR 100MF 20% 25V D 975 1SS133-T2 SI DIODE C 922 QCF31HZ-472Z C CAPACITOR 4700PF +80:-20% D 976 1SS133-T2 SI DIODE C 931 QETN1EM-107Z E CAPACITOR 100MF 20% 25V D 977 1SS133-T2 SI DIODE C 932 QCF31HZ-472Z C CAPACITOR 4700PF +80:-20% D 978 1SS133-T2 SI DIODE C 941 QETN1EM-107Z E CAPACITOR 100MF 20% 25V D 979 1SS133-T2 SI DIODE C 942 QCF31HZ-472Z C CAPACITOR 4700PF +80:-20% D 993 1SS133-T2 SI DIODE C 951 QETN1EM-107Z E CAPACITOR 100MF 20% 25V EP 1 E409182-001SM GRAND TERMINAL C 952 QCF31HZ-472Z C CAPACITOR 4700PF +80:-20% EP 51 QNZ0136-001Z EARTH PLATE C 961 QETN1EM-107Z E CAPACITOR 100MF 20% 25V EP 91 E406523-001SM GND BKT C 962 QCF31HZ-472Z C CAPACITOR 4700PF +80:-20% EP901 QNZ0136-001Z EARTH PLATE C 971 QETN1EM-107Z E CAPACITOR 100MF 20% 25V FC 1 QNG0020-001Z FUSE CLIP F001 C 972 QCF31HZ-472Z C CAPACITOR 4700PF +80:-20% FC 2 QNG0020-001Z FUSE CLIP F001 C 975 QETN0JM-477Z E CAPACITOR 470MF 20% 6.3V FC 61 QNG0020-001Z FUSE CLIP F061 C 981 QCBB1HK-331Y C CAPACITOR 330PF 10% 50V FC 62 QNG0020-001Z FUSE CLIP F061 C 982 QCBB1HK-331Y C CAPACITOR 330PF 10% 50V FC 63 QNG0020-001Z FUSE CLIP F062 C 983 QCBB1HK-331Y C CAPACITOR 330PF 10% 50V FC 64 QNG0020-001Z FUSE CLIP F062 C 984 QCBB1HK-331Y C CAPACITOR 330PF 10% 50V FL991 QQR0590-001 FILTER C 985 QCBB1HK-103Y C CAPACITOR .010MF 10% 50V FL992 QQR0590-001 FILTER C 991 QFLC1HJ-562Z M CAPACITOR 5600PF 5% 50V FW 51 QUM137-10DGZ4 PARA RIBON WIRE C 992 QFLC1HJ-562Z M CAPACITOR 5600PF 5% 50V FW831 QUM134-08DGZ4 PARA RIBON WIRE C 993 QCBB1HK-101Y C CAPACITOR 100PF 10% 50V FW881 QUM133-44DGZ4 PARA RIBON WIRE C 994 QCBB1HK-271Y C CAPACITOR 270PF 10% 50V HL901 VYH7237-002 IC HOLDER CN 55 QGD2501C1-03Z SOCKET HS921 E70945-H40B HEAT SINK CN 56 QGD2501C1-04Z SOCKET HS931 E70945-H40B HEAT SINK CN 71 QGB2510J1-11 CONNECTOR HS941 E70945-H40B HEAT SINK CN 81 QGB2510J1-09 CONNECTOR HS951 E70306-001 HEAT SINK CN101 QGB2501J1-12 CONNECTOR HS961 E70306-001 HEAT SINK CN201 QGB2510J1-11 CONNECTOR HS971 E70306-001 HEAT SINK CN241 QGB2510J1-12 CONNECTOR IC901 MN101C49GHM IC CN301 QGB2510J1-14 CONNECTOR IC903 IC-PST9139-T IC CN303 QGB2510J1-13 CONNECTOR J 91 QNS0022-001 JACK CN400 QGF1205C1-10 CONNECTOR Q 52 KTD863/Y/-T TRANSISTOR CN402 QGF1205C1-08 CONNECTOR Q 53 KRC105M-T D TRANSISTOR CN601 QGB2510J1-07 CONNECTOR Q 61 KRC105M-T D TRANSISTOR CN811 QGA3901F2-03 CONNECTOR Q 71 KTA1046/Y/ TRANSISTOR CN931 QGD2501C1-04Z SOCKET Q 74 KTC3200/GL/-T TRANSISTOR CN932 QGD2501C1-03Z SOCKET Q 901 KRC107M-T D TRANSISTOR D 51 1SR35-400A-T5 DIODE Q 903 KRC105M-T D TRANSISTOR D 52 1SR35-400A-T5 DIODE Q 904 KRC105M-T D TRANSISTOR D 53 1SR35-400A-T5 DIODE Q 905 KRC105M-T D TRANSISTOR D 54 1SR35-400A-T5 DIODE Q 906 KRC105M-T D TRANSISTOR A Area RX-8010VBK Electrical parts list (Micon board) A Item Q 907 A A A A A A Parts number KRC105M-T Parts name Block No. 06 Remarks Area A Item Parts number Parts name Remarks D TRANSISTOR R 973 QRJ146J-332X UNF C RESISTOR 3.3K 5% 1/4W Q 908 KRC105M-T D TRANSISTOR R 975 QRJ146J-220X UNF C RESISTOR 22 5% 1/4W Q 921 2SD2395/EF/ TRANSISTOR R 976 QRE141J-472Y C RESISTOR 4.7K 5% 1/4W Q 931 2SD2395/EF/ TRANSISTOR R 977 QRE141J-472Y C RESISTOR 4.7K 5% 1/4W Q 941 2SD2395/EF/ TRANSISTOR R 978 QRE141J-472Y C RESISTOR 4.7K 5% 1/4W Q 951 2SD2395/EF/ TRANSISTOR R 979 QRE141J-472Y C RESISTOR 4.7K 5% 1/4W Q 961 KTA1046/Y/ TRANSISTOR R 980 QRE141J-221Y C RESISTOR 220 5% 1/4W Q 971 2SD2395/EF/ TRANSISTOR R 981 QRE141J-221Y C RESISTOR 220 5% 1/4W R 1 QRZ9044-335 COMP RESISTOR 3.3M 1/0W R 982 QRE141J-221Y C RESISTOR 220 5% 1/4W R 53 QRJ146J-6R8X UNF C RESISTOR 6.8 5% 1/4W R 983 QRE141J-221Y C RESISTOR 220 5% 1/4W R 54 QRE141J-821Y C RESISTOR 820 5% 1/4W R 984 QRE141J-221Y C RESISTOR 220 5% 1/4W R 61 QRJ146J-3R3X UNF C RESISTOR 3.3 5% 1/4W R 985 QRE141J-221Y C RESISTOR 220 5% 1/4W R 67 QRJ146J-120X UNF C RESISTOR 12 5% 1/4W R 986 QRE141J-221Y C RESISTOR 220 5% 1/4W R 72 QRJ146J-332X UNF C RESISTOR 3.3K 5% 1/4W R 987 QRE141J-221Y C RESISTOR 220 5% 1/4W R 73 QRE141J-223Y C RESISTOR 22K 5% 1/4W R 991 QRE141J-472Y C RESISTOR 4.7K 5% 1/4W R 74 QRE141J-104Y C RESISTOR 100K 5% 1/4W R 992 QRE141J-472Y C RESISTOR 4.7K 5% 1/4W R 91 QRL022J-471 UNF OMF RESISTOR 470 5% 1/2W R 993 QRE141J-622Y C RESISTOR 6.2K 5% 1/4W R 92 QRL022J-471 UNF OMF RESISTOR 470 5% 1/2W R 994 QRE141J-512Y C RESISTOR 5.1K 5% 1/4W R 903 QRE141J-331Y C RESISTOR 330 5% 1/4W R 995 QRE141J-133Y C RESISTOR 13K 5% 1/4W R 908 QRE141J-223Y C RESISTOR 22K 5% 1/4W R 996 QRE141J-332Y C RESISTOR 3.3K 5% 1/4W R 910 QRE141J-223Y C RESISTOR 22K 5% 1/4W R 997 QRE141J-153Y C RESISTOR 15K 5% 1/4W R 911 QRE141J-472Y C RESISTOR 4.7K 5% 1/4W R 998 QRE141J-562Y C RESISTOR 5.6K 5% 1/4W R 915 QRT022J-8R2 UNF MF RESISTOR 8.2 5% 1/2W R 999 QRE141J-103Y C RESISTOR 10K 5% 1/4W R 916 QRT022J-8R2 UNF MF RESISTOR 8.2 5% 1/2W RY 1 QSK0098-001 RELAY R 921 QRK126J-330X UNF C RESISTOR 33 5% 1/2W RY 62 QSK0088-001 RELAY R 922 QRK126J-330X UNF C RESISTOR 33 5% 1/2W RY 63 QSK0088-001 RELAY R 923 QRJ146J-272X UNF C RESISTOR 2.7K 5% 1/4W T 2 QQT0317-001 POWER TRANSF R 924 QRE141J-103Y C RESISTOR 10K 5% 1/4W TA 1 QNZ0079-001Z TAB R 925 QRE141J-221Y C RESISTOR 220 5% 1/4W TA 2 QNZ0079-001Z TAB R 926 QRE141J-221Y C RESISTOR 220 5% 1/4W TH 71 QAD0095-4R7Z POSISTOR R 927 QRE141J-221Y C RESISTOR 220 5% 1/4W X 901 QAX0246-001Z RESONATOR R 928 QRE141J-221Y C RESISTOR 220 5% 1/4W R 929 QRE141J-221Y C RESISTOR 220 5% 1/4W R 930 QRE141J-103Y C RESISTOR 10K 5% 1/4W R 931 QRL017J-430 UNF OMF RESISTOR 43 5% 1/1W R 932 QRL017J-430 UNF OMF RESISTOR 43 5% 1/1W R 933 QRJ146J-272X UNF C RESISTOR 2.7K 5% 1/4W R 937 QRE141J-221Y C RESISTOR 220 5% 1/4W R 938 QRE141J-221Y C RESISTOR 220 5% 1/4W R 939 QRE141J-221Y C RESISTOR 220 5% 1/4W R 940 QRJ146J-4R7X UNF C RESISTOR 4.7 5% 1/4W R 941 QRK126J-330X UNF C RESISTOR 33 5% 1/2W R 942 QRK126J-330X UNF C RESISTOR 33 5% 1/2W R 943 QRJ146J-272X UNF C RESISTOR 2.7K 5% 1/4W R 944 QRE141J-221Y C RESISTOR 220 5% 1/4W R 945 QRE141J-221Y C RESISTOR 220 5% 1/4W R 946 QRE141J-221Y C RESISTOR 220 5% 1/4W R 947 QRE141J-221Y C RESISTOR 220 5% 1/4W R 948 QRE141J-221Y C RESISTOR 220 5% 1/4W R 949 QRE141J-221Y C RESISTOR 220 5% 1/4W R 951 QRK126J-120X UNF C RESISTOR 12 5% 1/2W R 953 QRJ146J-222X UNF C RESISTOR 2.2K 5% 1/4W R 954 QRE141J-221Y C RESISTOR 220 5% 1/4W R 955 QRE141J-221Y C RESISTOR 220 5% 1/4W R 956 QRE141J-221Y C RESISTOR 220 5% 1/4W R 961 QRK126J-120X UNF C RESISTOR 12 5% 1/2W R 963 QRJ146J-222X UNF C RESISTOR 2.2K 5% 1/4W R 965 QRE141J-103Y C RESISTOR 10K 5% 1/4W R 966 QRE141J-103Y C RESISTOR 10K 5% 1/4W R 967 QRE141J-103Y C RESISTOR 10K 5% 1/4W R 968 QRE141J-103Y C RESISTOR 10K 5% 1/4W R 969 QRE141J-103Y C RESISTOR 10K 5% 1/4W R 971 QRJ146J-120X UNF C RESISTOR 12 5% 1/4W A A A Area 3-19 RX-8010VBK Electrical parts list (Tuner board) A 3-20 Item Parts number AT101 QNB0014-001 BK 1 C 101 Parts name Block No. 07 Remarks Area A Item Parts number Parts name ANT TERMINAL R 115 NRSA02J-104X MG RESISTOR LV31618-001A SHIELD BKT R 119 NRSA02J-103X MG RESISTOR NCB21HK-103X C CAPACITOR R 122 NRSA02J-472X MG RESISTOR C 103 NCB21HK-223X C CAPACITOR R 124 NRSA02J-222X MG RESISTOR C 105 NCB21HK-223X C CAPACITOR R 126 NRSA02J-562X MG RESISTOR C 107 QEKC1CM-226Z E CAPACITOR R 127 NRSA02J-822X MG RESISTOR C 111 NCB21HK-473X C CAPACITOR R 128 NRSA02J-472X MG RESISTOR C 112 NDC21HJ-120X C CAPACITOR R 129 NRSA02J-222X MG RESISTOR C 121 NDC21HJ-120X C CAPACITOR R 130 QRZ9005-680X F RESISTOR C 122 NDC21HJ-120X C CAPACITOR R 132 NRSA02J-393X MG RESISTOR C 123 NCB21HK-473X C CAPACITOR R 133 NRSA02J-392X MG RESISTOR C 126 NCS21HJ-101X C CAPACITOR R 134 NRSA02J-102X MG RESISTOR C 128 QENC1HM-474Z NP E CAPACITOR R 140 NRSA02J-183X MG RESISTOR C 129 NCB21HK-102X C CAPACITOR R 141 NRSA02J-102X MG RESISTOR C 130 QEKC1AM-107Z E CAPACITOR 100MF 20% 10V R 142 NRSA02J-470X MG RESISTOR C 133 QEKC1CM-226Z E CAPACITOR 22MF 20% 16V R 143 NRSA02J-562X MG RESISTOR C 134 NCB21HK-222X C CAPACITOR R 144 NRSA02J-332X MG RESISTOR C 135 NCB21HK-223X C CAPACITOR R 145 NRSA02J-103X MG RESISTOR C 136 QEKC1HM-105Z E CAPACITOR R 146 NRSA02J-392X MG RESISTOR C 137 NCB21HK-331X C CAPACITOR R 147 NRSA02J-332X MG RESISTOR C 138 NCB21HK-473X C CAPACITOR R 150 NRSA02J-331X MG RESISTOR C 139 NCB21HK-333X C CAPACITOR R 157 NRSA02J-682X MG RESISTOR C 140 NCB21HK-333X C CAPACITOR R 158 NRSA02J-682X MG RESISTOR C 141 NCB21HK-473X C CAPACITOR R 161 NRSA02J-102X MG RESISTOR C 143 NCB21HK-223X C CAPACITOR R 162 NRSA02J-102X MG RESISTOR C 144 NCB21HK-473X C CAPACITOR R 182 NRSA02J-103X MG RESISTOR C 146 QEKC1HM-105Z E CAPACITOR 1.0MF 20% 50V R 183 NRSA02J-103X MG RESISTOR C 147 QEKC1HM-105Z E CAPACITOR 1.0MF 20% 50V R 184 NRSA02J-103X MG RESISTOR C 148 QEKC1HM-224Z E CAPACITOR .22MF 20% 50V RF101 QAU0124-002 FRONT END C 149 QEKC1HM-105Z E CAPACITOR 1.0MF 20% 50V T 111 QQR0796-001 COIL BLOCK C 150 QEKC1CM-226Z E CAPACITOR 22MF 20% 16V T 142 QQR0973-001 IFT C 156 QDGB1HK-102Y C CAPACITOR X 121 QAX0402-001 CRYSTAL 22MF 20% 16V A .47MF 20% 50V 1.0MF 20% 50V C 157 NCB21HK-473X C CAPACITOR C 158 QEKC1CM-226Z E CAPACITOR 22MF 20% 16V C 161 QEK41CM-106 E CAPACITOR 10MF 20% 16V C 162 QEK41CM-106 E CAPACITOR 10MF 20% 16V C 163 NCB21HK-223X C CAPACITOR C 164 NCB21HK-473X C CAPACITOR C 168 QEKC1HM-105Z E CAPACITOR 1.0MF 20% 50V C 184 QEKC1CM-107Z E CAPACITOR 100MF 20% 16V C 185 QEK41CM-106 E CAPACITOR 10MF 20% 16V C 186 QEK41CM-106 E CAPACITOR 10MF 20% 16V CF101 QAX0419-001Z C FILTER CF102 QAX0604-001Z C FILTER CF103 QAX0519-001Z C FILTER CN111 QGB2501K2-12 CONECTOR D 121 1SS133-T2 SI DIODE D 123 1SS133-T2 SI DIODE D 124 1SS133-T2 SI DIODE D 125 1SS133-T2 SI DIODE D 129 1SS133-T2 SI DIODE IC102 LA1838 IC IC121 LC72136N IC Q 102 2SC535/BC/-T TRANSISTOR Q 103 2SC461/BC/-T TRANSISTOR Q 121 KRA103M-T TRANSISTOR R 103 NRSA02J-221X MG RESISTOR R 104 NRSA02J-272X MG RESISTOR R 105 NRSA02J-391X MG RESISTOR R 106 NRSA02J-102X MG RESISTOR R 107 NRSA02J-391X MG RESISTOR R 108 NRSA02J-332X MG RESISTOR R 109 NRSA02J-221X MG RESISTOR FM+B Remarks 68 1/0W Area RX-8010VBK Packing materials and accessories parts list Block No. M 2 M M Block No. M 3 M M P1 A2~A7 P4 1/2 A1 P3 P5 P4 1/2 2/2 P6 P5 P3 2/2 P2 Parts list (Packing) A Item Block No. M2MM Parts number Parts name Q'ty Description P 1 QPA02503505P POLY BAG 1 P 2 LV20989-010A CARTON BOX 1 P 3 LV32034-003A SHEET 2 P 4 LV20947-001A PACKING PAD 1 P 5 LV20948-001A PACKING PAD 1 P 6 QPC06507015P POLY BAG 1 FOR SET Parts list (Accessories) A Item Parts number Area FOR INST Block No. M3MM Parts name Q'ty Description A 1 RM-SRX8010J REMOCON 1 A 2 ----------- BATTERY 1 A 3 LVT0618-001B INST BOOK 1 A 4 EWP503-001C ANT.WIRE 1 A 5 QAL0204-001 AM LOOP ANT 1 A 6 BT-51020-2 J=REGIST CARD 1 A 7 YU20333 SAFETY INST. 1 Area ENG 3-21 RX-8010VBK VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LIMITED AUDIO & COMMUNICATION BUSINESS DIVISION PERSONAL & MOBILE NETWORK BUSINESS UNIT. 10-1,1chome,Ohwatari-machi,Maebashi-city,371-8543,Japan (No.20921) Printed in Japan 200103(V) AUDIO/VIDEO CONTROL RECEIVER RX-8010VBK CATV/DBS VCR 1 TV AUDIO POWER POWER POWER POWER DVD DVD MUILTI CD FM/AM TV/DBS VIDEO CDR PHONO VCR 2 TAPE/MD VCR 1 SURROUND ON/OFF USB DSP ANALOG/DIGITAL SLEEP MODE BASS LINE DIF.ECT BOOST INPUT EFFECT ROOM SIZE 2 3 1 RX-8010V MENU MIDNIGHT MODE TEST FM/AM TUNING CTR TONE LIVENESS 4 5 ∗SUBWFR ∗L/R BAL ∗CENTER ∗DIGITALEQ ∗REAR L ∗REAR R 8 0 10 RETURN CATV/DBS CONTROL TV/VIDEO + FM MODE ∗BAL L ∗ + CH/ LEVEL TV VOL − ∗BAL R MENU STANDBY − PLAY POWER D I G I T A L SURROUND 100+ D I G I T A L SPEAKERS ON/OFF 1 + SURROUND ON/OFF VOLUME − EXIT MASTER VOLUME MEMORY 9 +10 DSP MODE /REW PAUSE INPUT ANALOG/DIGITAL DVD MULTI DVD VCR 1 VCR 2 TV SOUND/DBS DIGITAL LEVEL EQ ADJUST LINE DIRECT EFFECT SETTING BASS BOOST INPUT ATT SOUCE NAME SUBWOOFER OUT ON/OFF VIDEO USB AUDIO VIDEO L—AUDIO—R PHONO CD CDR TAPE / MD USB AUDIO FM / AM FF/ CONTROL DOWN UP SET REC PAUSE VIDEO MIDNIGHT MODE 2 S-VIDEO TEXT DISPLAY AUDIO/VIDEO CONTROL RECEIVER FM MODE 6 ENTER SOUND MUTING 7/P FM/AM PRESET DOWN – TUNING – UP SOUCE NAME STOP CONTROL PHONES RM-SRX8010J A/V CONTROL RECEIVER D I G I T A L INSTRUCTIONS For Customer Use: Enter below the Model No. and Serial No. which are located either on the rear, bottom or side of the cabinet. Retain this information for future reference. Model No. Serial No. LVT0618-001A [J] RX-8010V[J]COVER_f 1 01.1.11, 5:56 PM Warnings, Cautions and Others/ Mises en garde, précautions et indications diverses CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK. DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK) NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated "dangerous voltage" within the product's enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. WARNING: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. Declaration of Conformity Model Number: RX-8010VBK Trade Name: JVC Responsible Party: JVC Americas Corp. Address: 1700 Valley Road, Wayne New Jersey 07470 Telephone Number: 973-315-5000 This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Déclaration de conformité Numéro de modèle: RX-8010VBK Nom de marque: JVC Personne responsable: US JVC CORP. Adresse: 1700 Valley Road Wayne, N.J. 07470 Numéro de téléphone: (973) 315-5000 Cet ensemble se conforme à la partie 15 des règles de la FCC (Federal Communications Commission), Le fonctionnement est sujet aux deux conditions suivantes: (1) Cet appareil ne peut pas causer d’interférences nuisibles, et (2) cet appareil doit accepter toute interférence reçue, comprenant des interférences qui peuvent causer un mauvais fonctionnement. CAUTION To reduce the risk of electrical shocks, fire, etc.: 1. Do not remove screws, covers or cabinet. 2. Do not expose this appliance to rain or moisture. ATTENTION Afin d’éviter tout risque d’électrocution, d’incendie, etc.: 1. Ne pas enlever les vis ni les panneaux et ne pas ouvrir le coffret de l’appareil. 2. Ne pas exposer l’appareil à la pluie ni à l’humidité. Caution –– POWER switch! Disconnect the mains plug to shut the power off completely. The POWER switch in any position does not disconnect the mains line. The power can be remote controlled. Attention –– Commutateur POWER! Déconnecter la fiche de secteur pour couper complètement le courant. Le commutateur POWER ne coupe jamais complètement la ligne de secteur, quelle que soit sa position. Le courant peut être télécommandé. Caution –– SPEAKER LOAD SELECTOR switch! Match the position of SPEAKER LOAD SELECTOR switch on the back panel to the impedance of the speaker connected, to protect from overheating. G-1 RX-8010V[J]Safety_f 1 01.1.11, 5:57 PM For Canada/pour Le Canada THIS DIGITAL APPARATUS DOES NOT EXCEED THE CLASS B LIMITS FOR RADIO NOISE EMISSIONS FROM DIGITAL APPARATUS AS SET OUT IN THE INTERFERENCE-CAUSING EQUIPMENT STANDARD ENTITLED “DIGITAL APPARATUS,” ICES-003 OF THE DEPARTMENT OF COMMUNICATIONS. CET APPAREIL NUMERIQUE RESPECTE LES LIMITES DE BRUITS RADIOELECTRIQUES APPLICABLES AUX APPAREILS NUMERIQUES DE CLASSE B PRESCRITES DANS LA NORME SUR LE MATERIEL BROUILLEUR; “APPAREILS NUMERIQUES”, NMB-003 EDICTEE PAR LE MINISTRE DES COMMUNICATIONS. For Canada/pour le Canada CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, MATCH WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT, FULLY INSERT ATTENTION: POUR EVITER LES CHOCS ELECTRIQUES, INTRODUIRE LA LAME LA PLUS LARGE DE LA FICHE DANS LA BORNE CORRESPONDANTE DE LA PRISE ET POUSSER JUSQUAU FOND This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. Caution: Proper Ventilation To avoide risk of electric shock and fire and to protect from damage. Locate the apparatus as follows: Front: No obstructions open spacing. Sides: No obstructions in 10 cm from the sides. Top: No obstructions in 10 cm from the top. Back: No obstructions in 15 cm from the back Bottom: No obstructions, place on the level surface. In addition, maintain the best possible air circulation as illustrated. Attention: Ventilation Correcte Pour éviter les chocs électriques, l’incendie et tout autre dégât. Disposer l’appareil en tenant compte des impératifs suivants Avant: Rien ne doit gêner le dégagement Flancs: Laisser 10 cm de dégagement latéral Dessus: Laisser 10 cm de dégagement supérieur Arrière: Laisser 15 cm de dégagement arrière Dessous: Rien ne doit obstruer par dessous; poser l’appareil sur une surface plate. Veiller également à ce que l’air circule le mieux possible comme illustré. Spacing 15 cm or more Dégagement de 15 cm ou plus RX-8010VBK Wall or obstructions Mur, ou obstruction Front Avant Stand height 15 cm or more Hauteur du socle: 15 cm ou plus Floor Plancher G-2 RX-8010V[J]Safety_f 2 01.1.11, 5:57 PM Table of Contents Parts Identification ...................................... 2 Creating a Surround Field in Your Room ....... 24 Getting Started ........................................... 3 7 Surround modes .................................................................... 24 7 DSP modes ........................................................................... 24 Reproducing the Sound Field .................................................... 25 Available DSP Modes According to the Speaker Arrangement .. 26 Adjusting the Surround Modes ................................................ 27 Adjusting the DAP Modes ....................................................... 28 Adjusting the Surround Modes with the DAP Modes .............. 30 Adjusting the 5 CH/4 CH Stereo Mode ................................... 32 Adjusting the 3D-PHONIC Modes .......................................... 33 Before Installation ...................................................................... 3 Checking the Supplied Accessories ........................................... 3 Connecting the FM and AM Antennas ....................................... 3 Connecting the Speakers ............................................................ 4 Connecting Audio/Video Components ....................................... 5 7 Analog Connections ............................................................... 5 7 Digital Connections ................................................................ 8 7 USB Connection ..................................................................... 9 Connecting the Power Cord ..................................................... 10 Putting Batteries in the Remote Control .................................. 10 Using the DVD MULTI Playback Mode .......... 35 Activating the DVD MULTI Playback Mode .......................... 35 Basic Operations ....................................... 11 Turning the Power On and Off (Standby) ................................ 11 Selecting the Source to Play ..................................................... 11 Adjusting the Volume ............................................................... 12 Selecting the Front Speakers .................................................... 13 Muting the Sound ..................................................................... 13 Listening at Night — Midnight Mode ..................................... 13 Activating the Subwoofer Sound ............................................. 14 Reinforcing the Bass ................................................................ 14 Attenuating the Input Signal .................................................... 14 Selecting the Line Direct Function .......................................... 14 Adjusting the Equalization Patterns ......................................... 15 Using the Sleep Timer .............................................................. 15 Recording a Source .................................................................. 15 Basic Settings ........................................... 16 Adjusting the Front Speaker Output Balance ........................... 16 Changing the Source Name ...................................................... 16 Selecting the Video Input Terminal .......................................... 16 Setting the Subwoofer Information .......................................... 17 Adjusting the Subwoofer Output Level .................................... 17 Setting the Speakers for a Surround Field ................................ 17 Digital Input (DIGITAL IN) Terminal Setting ......................... 19 Selecting the Analog or Digital Input Mode ............................ 20 Showing the Text Information on the Display ......................... 21 Basic Setting and Adjustment — Auto Memory ...................... 21 Using the On-Screen Menus ........................ 36 7 Showing the MENU on the TV Screen ................................ 36 7 Activating the Surround Modes ............................................ 36 7 Activating the DSP Modes ................................................... 36 7 Selecting the Analog or Digital Input Mode ........................... 36 7 Adjusting the Equalization Pattern ....................................... 37 7 Adjusting the Surround and DSP Modes .............................. 37 7 Adjusting the DVD MULTI Playback Mode ........................ 38 7 Listening at Night — Midnight Mode .................................. 38 7 Attenuating the Input Signal ................................................. 38 7 Selecting the Line Direct Function ....................................... 39 7 Selecting the Bass Boost Function ....................................... 39 7 Activating the Subwoofer Sound .......................................... 39 7 Operating the Tuner .............................................................. 39 7 Storing the Preset Stations .................................................... 39 7 Setting the Basic Setting Items ............................................. 40 COMPU LINK Remote Control System ......... 41 TEXT COMPU LINK Remote Control System .. 42 7 Showing the Disc Information on the TV Screen ................. 43 7 Searching for a Disc (Only for the CD player) .................... 44 7 Entering the Disc Information .............................................. 45 AV COMPU LINK Remote Control System .... 47 Operating JVC’s Audio/Video Components ... 49 Receiving Radio Broadcasts ........................ 22 Tuning in Stations Manually .................................................... 22 Using Preset Tuning ................................................................. 22 Selecting the FM Reception Mode ........................................... 23 Operating Audio Components .................................................. 49 Operating Video Components .................................................. 51 Operating Other Manufacturers’ Video Equipment ............................................ 52 Troubleshooting ......................................... 55 Specifications ............................................ 57 1 EN01_10.RX-8010V[J]_f 1 01.1.11, 5:51 PM Parts Identification Become familiar with the buttons and controls on the receiver before use. Refer to the pages in parentheses for details. 1 3 4 567 8 2 RX-8010V FM/AM TUNING FM/AM PRESET pq w 9 er t y AUDIO/VIDEO CONTROL RECEIVER FM MODE ANALOG STANDBY L C R DGTL AUTO DVD MULTI DIGITAL LS S PRO LOGIC AUTO MUTING TUNED STEREO DSP 3D–PHONIC MIDNIGHT MODE LINEAR PCM SUBWFR LFE MEMORY POWER SPEAKERS 1 2 D I G I T A L MASTER VOLUME HEADPHONE DIGITAL EQ INPUT ATT ONE TOUCH OPERATION RS SLEEP VOLUME D I G I T A L SURROUND SPEAKERS ON/OFF 1 DSP MODE SURROUND ON/OFF INPUT ANALOG/DIGITAL DVD MULTI DVD VCR 1 VCR 2 VIDEO TV SOUND/DBS MIDNIGHT MODE DIGITAL LEVEL ADJUST EQ LINE DIRECT EFFECT SETTING BASS BOOST 2 INPUT ATT SOURCE NAME SUBWOOFER OUT ON/OFF VIDEO USB AUDIO S-VIDEO VIDEO L—AUDIO—R PHONO CD CDR TAPE / MD USB AUDIO FM / AM CONTROL DOWN UP SOURCE NAME PHONES u i o ; a 1 a 2 b CATV/DBS POWER VCR 1 TV AUDIO POWER POWER POWER DVD DVD MUILTI CD FM/AM TV/DBS VIDEO CDR PHONO VCR 1 VCR 2 TAPE/MD USB SURROUND DSP 3 4 5 6 7 ANALOG/DIGITAL SLEEP ON/OFF MODE INPUT LINE DIF.ECT BASS BOOST EFFECT 1 2 MIDNIGHT MODE TEST CTR TONE LIVENESS 4 5 6 8 9 0 = ~ ! ROOM SIZE 3 MENU ENTER SOUND ∗SUBWFR ∗L/R BAL ∗CENTER 8 7/P MUTING CATV/DBS CONTROL TV/VIDEO 10 0 +10 RETURN FM MODE 100+ + ∗BAL L ∗ + + CH/ LEVEL TV VOL − ∗BAL R /REW VOLUME − − PLAY EXIT $ % ^ & * FF/ PAUSE ( SET REC PAUSE # ∗DIGITALEQ ∗REAR L ∗REAR R MENU TEXT DISPLAY 9 @ DOWN – TUNING – UP ) STOP CONTROL RM-SRX8010J A/V CONTROL RECEIVER s d f g h Remote Control Front Panel 1 Display window (11) a. Remote control operation mode indicator b. Signal transmission indicator Lights up when transmitting the remote control signal. 2 POWER buttons (11, 51, 52 – 54) CATV/DBS, VCR 1, TV, AUDIO 3 Source selecting buttons (11) DVD, DVD MULTI, CD, FM/AM, TV/DBS,VIDEO, CDR, PHONO, VCR 1, VCR 2, TAPE/MD, USB 4 SURROUND ON/OFF button (26) 5 DSP MODE button (26) 6 LINE DIRECT button (14) 7 MIDNIGHT MODE button (13) 8 SOUND button (14, 16, 27 – 35, 49) 9 MUTING button (13) 0 CATV/DBS CONTROL button (53) - TV/VIDEO button (51, 52) = MENU button (36 – 40) ~ TEXT DISPLAY button (43 – 46) ! REC PAUSE button (50, 51, 53) @ SLEEP button (15) # ANALOG/DIGITAL INPUT button (20) $ • 10 keys for selecting preset channels (23) • 10 keys for adjusting sound (14, 16, 27 – 35, 49) • 10 keys for operating audio/video components (49 – 54 ) % • LEVEL +/– buttons* (15, 27 – 35) • BAL L and BAL R buttons* (16) • CH +/– buttons (51 – 53) ^ TV VOL +/– buttons (51, 52) & VOLUME +/– buttons (12) * EXIT button (36 – 40, 43 – 45) ( • TUNING UP 3/DOWN 2 buttons (22, 49) • On screen operate buttons (36 – 40, 43 – 46) • Operating buttons for audio/video components (49 – 54) ) CONTROL button (50, 51) 1 POWER button and STANDBY lamp (11) 2 • SPEAKERS ON/OFF 1 button (13) • SPEAKERS ON/OFF 2 button (13) 3 FM/AM TUNING 5/∞ buttons (22) 4 DSP MODE button and lamp (26) 5 FM/AM PRESET 5/∞ buttons (22, 23) 6 • INPUT ANALOG/DIGITAL button (20) • INPUT ATT button (14) 7 FM MODE button (23) 8 MEMORY button (22) 9 Display (11) p EFFECT button (28, 31 – 34) q DIGITAL EQ button (15) w Remote sensor (10) e LEVEL ADJUST button (16, 17, 28 – 35) r SETTING button (16 – 19, 21) t MASTER VOLUME control (12) y LINE DIRECT button and lamp (14) u PHONES jack (13) i SUBWOOFER OUT ON/OFF button (14) o SURROUND ON/OFF button and lamp (26) ; USB AUDIO terminal (9) a VIDEO input terminals (7) s MIDNIGHT MODE button (13) d Source selecting buttons and lamps (11) DVD MULTI, DVD, VCR 1, VCR 2, VIDEO, TV SOUND/DBS, PHONO, CD, CDR, TAPE/MD, USB AUDIO, FM/AM f SOURCE NAME buttons (16) g CONTROL UP 5/DOWN ∞ buttons h BASS BOOST button and lamp (14) * These buttons function only after pressing 10 keys on the remote control which are marked with an asterisk (*). 2 EN01_10.RX-8010V[J]_f 2 01.1.11, 5:51 PM Getting Started This section explains how to connect audio/video components and speakers to the receiver, and how to connect the power supply. Before Installation Connecting the FM and AM Antennas FM Antenna Connections General • Be sure your hands are dry. • Turn the power off to all components. • Read the manuals supplied with the components you are going to connect. A A NN TE AN B 75 FMAXIAL A NN TE AN CO 75 FMAXIAL CO Locations • Install the receiver in a location that is level and protected from moisture. • The temperature around the receiver must be between –5˚ C and 35˚ C (23˚ F and 95˚ F). • Make sure there is good ventilation around the receiver. Poor ventilation could cause overheating and damage the receiver. AMP O LO AM T EX Extend the supplied FM antenna horizontally. ANTENNA FM 75 COAXIAL • Do not insert any metal object into the receiver. • Do not disassemble the receiver or remove screws, covers, or cabinet. • Do not expose the receiver to rain or moisture. Check to be sure you have all of the following items, which are supplied with the receiver. The number in the parentheses indicates quantity of the pieces supplied. • Remote Control (1) AM LOOP Outdoor FM Antenna Cable AM EXT A. Using the Supplied FM Antenna The FM antenna provided can be connected to the FM 75 Ω COAXIAL terminal as temporary measure. B. Using the Standard Type Connector (Not Supplied) A standard type connector should be connected to the FM 75 Ω COAXIAL terminal. • Batteries (2) • AM Loop Antenna (1) Note: • FM Antenna (1) If anything is missing, contact your dealer immediately. If reception is poor, connect the outdoor antenna. Before attaching a 75 Ω coaxial cable (the kind with a round wire going to an outdoor antenna), disconnect the supplied FM antenna. 3 EN01_10.RX-8010V[J]_f AM T EX FM Antenna Handling the receiver Checking the Supplied Accessories AMP O LO 3 01.1.11, 5:51 PM Basic connecting procedure AM Antenna Connections Snap the tabs on the loop into the slots of the base to assemble the AM loop. ANTENNA FM 75 COAXIAL AM LOOP AM Loop Antenna AM EXT 2 1 4 3 1 Cut, twist and remove the insulation at the end of each speaker signal cable (not supplied). 2 Turn the knob counterclockwise. 1 2 3 3 Insert the speaker signal cable. 4 Turn the knob clockwise. Connecting the front speakers Outdoor single vinyl-covered wire (not supplied) Turn the loop until you have the best reception. You can connect two pairs of front speakers (one pair to the FRONT SPEAKERS 1 terminals, and another pair to the FRONT SPEAKERS 2 terminals). FRONT SPEAKERS 1 Right speaker Left speaker Notes: • If the AM loop antenna wire is covered with vinyl, remove the vinyl by twisting it as shown in the diagram. • Make sure the antenna conductors do not touch any other terminals, connecting cords and power cord. This could cause poor reception. • If reception is poor, connect an outdoor single vinyl-covered wire to the AM EXT terminal. (Keep the AM loop antenna connected.) 1 2 + CAUTION : SPEAKER IMPEDANCE Connecting the Speakers RIGHT For each speaker (except for a subwoofer), connect the (+) and (–) terminals on the rear panel to the (+) and (–) terminals marked on the speakers. For connecting a subwoofer, see page 5. CAUTION: Use speakers with the SPEAKER IMPEDANCE indicated by the speaker terminals. RIGHT LEFT – You can connect the following speakers: • Two pairs of front speakers to produce normal stereo sound. • One pair of rear speakers to enjoy the surround effect. • One center speaker to produce more effective surround effect (to emphasize human voices). • One subwoofer to enhance the bass. IMPORTANT: After connecting the speakers listed above, set the speaker setting information properly to obtain the best possible Surround and DSP effect. For details, see page 17. LEFT FRONT SPEAKERS Right speaker 4 6 LOW 8 16 HIGH SPEAKER LOAD SELECTOR FRONT SPEAKERS 2 Left speaker IMPORTANT: To obtain the best possible output power from the receiver, and to prevent the receiver from being overheated, the receiver has the SPEAKER LOAD SELECTOR which has to be set as follows: • Set it to “HIGH” when the impedance of the front speakers connected is within the range of 8 Ω to 16 Ω. • Set it to “LOW” when the impedance of the front speakers connected is within the range of 4 Ω to 6 Ω. 4 EN01_10.RX-8010V[J]_f 4 01.1.12, 3:39 PM Connecting the rear and center speakers Connect rear speakers to the REAR SPEAKERS terminals and a center speaker to the CENTER SPEAKER terminals. Center speaker Analog Connections Audio component connections Use the cables with RCA pin plugs (not supplied). Connect the white plug to the audio left jack, and the red plug to the audio right jack. CAUTION: CENTER SPEAKER REAR SPEAKERS + + – – RIGHT If you connect a sound-enhancing device such as a graphic equalizer between the source components and this receiver, the sound output through this receiver may be distorted. Turntable RIGHT LEFT CAUTION : SPEAKER IMPEDANCE 8 LEFT AUDIO Turntable 16 REAR Right rear speaker Left rear speaker PHONO CD Turntable To audio output Connecting the subwoofer speaker OUT (REC) You can enhance the bass by connecting a subwoofer. Connect the input jack of a powered subwoofer to the SUBWOOFER OUT jack on the rear panel, using a cable with RCA pin plugs (not supplied). SUBWOOFER OUT TAPE MD IN (PLAY) OUT (REC) If an earth cable is provided for your turntable, connect the cable to the screw marked (H) on the rear panel. CDR IN (PLAY) Ex.: This connection is for the turntable with an MM (movingmagnet) type cartridge. Powered subwoofer Connecting Audio/Video Components You can connect the following audio/video components to this receiver. Refer also to the manuals supplied with your components. Audio Components • Turntable • CD player* • Cassette deck or MD recorder* • CD recorder* • Personal computer (PC) • • • • • Video Components DVD player* TV* DBS tuner* VCR(s) Video camera * You can connect these components using the methods described in “Analog connections” (to the right), or in “Digital connections” (see page 8). Note: Any turntables incorporating a small-output cartridge such as an MC (moving-coil) type must be connected to this receiver through a commercial head amplifier or step-up transformer. Direct connection may result in insufficient volume. CD player RIGHT LEFT AUDIO REAR PHONO CD player CD OUT (REC) To audio output TAPE MD IN (PLAY) OUT (REC) CDR IN (PLAY) 5 EN01_10.RX-8010V[J]_f 5 01.1.11, 5:51 PM Cassette deck or MD recorder Cassette deck To audio output To audio input RIGHT AUDIO LEFT REAR Video component connections Use the cables with RCA pin plugs (not supplied). Connect the white plug to the audio left jack, the red plug to the audio right jack, and the yellow plug to the video jack. • If your video components have S-video (Y/C-separation) and/or component video (Y, PB/CB, PR/CR) terminals, connect them using an S-video cable (not supplied) and/or component video cable (not supplied). By using these terminals, you can get a better picture quality in the order — Component video > S-video > Composite video. PHONO IMPORTANT: CD OUT (REC) TAPE MD IN (PLAY) To audio input MD recorder To audio output Note: This receiver is equipped with the following video terminals — composite video, S-video and component video terminals. You can use any of the three to connect a video component. However, remember that the video signals from one type of these input terminals are output only through the video output terminals of the same type. Therefore, if a recording video component and a playing video component are connected to the receiver through the different video terminals, you cannot record the picture from the playing component on the recording component. In addition, if the TV and a playing video component are connected to the receiver through the different video terminals, you cannot view the playback picture from the playing component on the TV. You can connect either a cassette deck or an MD recorder to the TAPE/MD jacks. When connecting an MD recorder to the TAPE/MD jacks, change the source name, which will be shown on the display when selected as the source, to “MD.” See page 16 for details. VCR(s) S-VHS (or VHS) VCR A C D CD recorder B AUDIO RIGHT To audio output To audio input RIGHT LEFT E F VIDEO CD recorder VIDEO LEFT S-VIDEO DVD FRONT TV SOUND DBS AUDIO OUT (REC) REAR VCR1 PHONO IN (PLAY) CD OUT (REC) OUT (REC) VCR2 TAPE MD IN (PLAY) IN (PLAY) MONITOR OUT OUT (REC) CDR A IN (PLAY) B If your audio components have a COMPU LINK or TEXT COMPU LINK jack • See also page 41 for detailed information about the connection and the COMPU LINK remote control system. • See also page 42 for detailed information about the connection and the TEXT COMPU LINK remote control system. Å ı Ç Î ‰ Ï C S-VHS (or VHS) VCR D E F To left/right channel audio output To left/right channel audio input To S-video output To composite video output To composite video input To S-video input 6 EN01_10.RX-8010V[J]_f 6 01.1.11, 5:51 PM TV and/or DBS tuner Video camera When connecting the TV to the AUDIO jacks (TV SOUND/ DBS), DO NOT connect the TV’s video output to these video input terminals. The VIDEO input terminals on the front panel are convenient when connecting and disconnecting the equipment frequently. VIDEO S-VIDEO VIDEO L—AUDIO—R VIDEO AUDIO RIGHT VIDEO LEFT S-VIDEO DVD COMPONENT VIDEO To audio output DVD FRONT TV SOUND DBS VCR1 TV To composite video output MONITOR OUT OUT (REC) A To S-video output DBS PB/CB Y PR/CR IN (PLAY) OUT (REC) DVD player VCR2 IN (PLAY) B D • When you connect the DVD player with stereo output jacks: MONITOR OUT Å To front left/right channel audio output (or to audio mixed output if necessary) ı To composite video output Ç To S-video output Î To component video output C Connect the TV to the MONITOR OUT terminal to view the playback picture from the other connected video components. Å ı Ç Î DVD COMPONENT VIDEO DBS DVD player A D C DVD To audio output To composite video input To S-video input To component video input VIDEO AUDIO RIGHT VIDEO LEFT B S-VIDEO DVD FRONT TV SOUND VIDEO AUDIO RIGHT VIDEO LEFT DVD COMPONENT VIDEO S-VIDEO DVD FRONT TV SOUND DBS A DBS MONITOR OUT DBS tuner Y PB/CB PR/CR DBS D C B • When you connect the DVD player with its analog discrete output (5.1 CH reproduction) jacks: Å ı Ç Î ‰ Ï Ì To subwoofer output To center channel audio output To rear left/right channel audio output To front left/right channel audio output To composite video output DBS To S-video output To component video output DVD player Å ı Ç Î DVD COMPONENT VIDEO G DVD To audio output To composite video output To S-video output To component video output B A D C F E Notes: • When connecting the DBS tuner to the TV SOUND/DBS jacks, change the source name, which will be shown on the display when selected as the source, to “DBS.” See page 16 for details. • When operating the DBS tuner by using the AV COMPU LINK remote control system, change the video input terminal setting correctly. See pages 16 and 47 for details. VIDEO SUB WOOFER CENTER RIGHT LEFT AUDIO RIGHT DVD REAR VIDEO LEFT DVD FRONT Note: When operating the DVD player by using the AV COMPU LINK remote control system, change the video input terminal setting correctly. See pages 16 and 47 for details. 7 EN01_10.RX-8010V[J]_f 7 01.1.11, 5:51 PM S-VIDEO Notes: Digital Connections This receiver is equipped with four DIGITAL IN terminals — one digital coaxial terminal and three digital optical terminals, and one DIGITAL OUT terminal. IMPORTANT: • When connecting the DVD player, digital TV broadcast tuner or DBS tuner using the digital terminals, you also need to connect it to the video terminal on the rear. Without connecting it to the video terminal, you can view no playback picture. • After connecting the components using the DIGITAL IN terminals, set the following correctly if necessary. – Set the digital input (DIGITAL IN) terminal setting correctly. For details, see “Digital Input (DIGITAL IN) Terminal Setting” on page 19. – Select the digital input mode correctly. For details, see “Selecting the Analog or Digital Input Mode” on page 20. Digital input terminals • When shipped from the factory, the DIGITAL IN terminals have been set for use with the following components. – DIGITAL 1 (coaxial): For DVD player – DIGITAL 2 (optical): For CD player – DIGITAL 3 (optical): For digital TV broadcast tuner – DIGITAL 4 (optical): For CD recorder • When you want to operate the CD player, CD recorder, or MD recorder using the COMPU LINK remote control system, connect the target component also as described in “Analog Connections” (see pages 5 and 6). • When you want to operate the DVD player using the AV COMPU LINK remote control system, connect the DVD player also as described in “Analog Connections” (see page 7). Digital output terminal You can connect any digital equipment as follow. CD recorder Digital TV MD recorder DBS tuner DBS Digital optical cable (not supplied) between digital optical terminals DVD player CD player DVD MD recorder CD recorder When the digital recording equipment such as an MD recorder and CD recorder has a digital optical input terminal, connecting it to the DIGITAL OUT terminal enables you to perform digital-todigital recording. Digital coaxial cable (not supplied) between digital coaxial terminals PCM/DOLBY DIGITAL /DTS DIGITAL OUT Digital optical cable (not supplied) between digital optical terminals Note: When the component has a digital coaxial output terminal, connect it to the DIGITAL 1 (DVD) terminal, using the digital coaxial cable (not supplied). When the component has a digital optical output terminal, connect it to the DIGITAL 2 (CD), DIGITAL 3 (TV) or DIGITAL 4 (CDR) terminal, using the digital optical cable (not supplied). Before connecting a digital optical cable, unplug the protective plug. The digital signal format output through the DIGITAL OUT terminal is the same as that of the input signal. This means that when the DTS Digital Surround signals are input, the DTS Digital Surround signals are output. DIGITAL IN DIGITAL 1 (DVD) DIGITAL 2 (CD) DIGITAL 3 (TV) DIGITAL 4 (CDR) 8 EN01_10.RX-8010V[J]_f 8 01.1.11, 5:51 PM USB Connection This receiver is equipped with a USB terminal on the front panel. You can connect your PC to this terminal and enjoy sound reproduced through your PC. When you connect your PC for the first time, follow the procedure below. • Remember you cannot send any signal or data to your PC from this receiver. 5. Check if the drivers are correctly installed. 1. Open the Control Panel on your PC: Select [Start] = [Settings] = [Control Panel] 2. Select [System], then [Device Manager] and click [Sound, video and game controllers] and [Universal Serial Bus controllers.] The following window appears, and you can check whether the drivers are installed. IMPORTANT • Check if your PC equipped with the CD-ROM drive is running on WindowsR 98*, WindowsR Me*, or WindowsR 2000* and prepare its CD-ROM. • Check your PC’s BIOS setting — whether USB is available, and whether USB IRQ is set to “AUTO” or to available IRQ number. How to install the USB drivers The following procedure is described using the English version of WindowsR 98. If your PC is running on a different version of Windows, the screens shown on your PC’s monitor will differ from the ones used in the following procedure. 1. Turn on your PC and start running WindowsR 98, WindowsR Me or WindowsR 2000. If the PC has been turned on, quit all the applications now running. 2. Turn on the receiver, and press USB AUDIO on the front panel or USB on the remote control. The lamp on the USB AUDIO button lights up. 3. Connect the receiver to the PC using a USB cable (not supplied). Your PC automatically recognizes this connection, and shows the following screen on the monitor. S-VIDEO VIDEO The items shown on the PC’s monitor differ depending on your PC settings. 6. Change the PC audio setting. 1. If you have closed Control Panel, open it again: Select [Start] = [Settings] = [Control Panel] 2. Click [Multimedia], then select “USB Audio Device [1]” for “Playback” of “Audio,” and close the window. To play back a CD from CD-ROM drive on PC, click [Multimedia], [CD Music] then check [Enable digital CD audio for this CD-ROM device]. VIDEO USB AUDIO Note: L—AUDIO—R Now PC is ready for playback through the USB connection. PC USB cable After installation is completed, you can use your PC as the playback source. The PC automatically recognizes the receiver whenever a USB cable is connected between the PC and the receiver while the receiver is turned on. • When not using the PC as the playback source, disconnect the USB cable. To play back sounds on the PC, refer to the manuals supplied with the sound reproduction application installed in the PC. Notes: 4. Install the USB drivers following the instructions on the PC’s monitor. • DO NOT turn off the receiver or disconnect the USB cable while installing the drivers and for a several seconds each time your PC is recognizing the receiver. • Use a full speed USB cable (revision 1.0). • If your PC does not recognize the receiver, disconnect the USB cable and connect it again. If this does not work, restart Windows. • The drivers installed can be recognized only when the USB cable is connected between the receiver and your PC. • The sound may not be played back correctly — interrupted or degraded — due to your PC settings and PC specifications. * Microsoft R, WindowsR 98, WindowsR Me and WindowsR 2000 are registered trademarks of Microsoft corporation. 9 EN01_10.RX-8010V[J]_f 9 01.1.11, 6:03 PM Connecting the Power Cord Before plugging the receiver into an AC outlet, make sure that all connections have been made. Putting Batteries in the Remote Control Before using the remote control, put two supplied batteries first. When using the remote control, aim the remote control directly at the remote sensor on the receiver. Plug the power cord into an AC outlet. 1. On the back of the remote control, remove the battery cover. Keep the power cord away from the connecting cables and the antenna. The power cord may cause noise or screen interference. We recommend that you use a coaxial cable to connect the antenna, since it is well-shielded against interference. 2. Insert batteries. Make sure to match the polarity: (+) to (+) and (–) to (–). Note: The preset settings such as preset channels and sound adjustment may be erased in a few days in the following cases: – When you unplug the power cord. – When a power failure occurs. R6P(SUM-3)/AA(15F) CAUTIONS: • Do not touch the power cord with wet hands. • Do not pull on the power cord to unplug the cord. When unplugging the cord, always grasp the plug so as not to damage the cord. 3. Replace the cover. If the range or effectiveness of the remote control decreases, replace the batteries. Use two R6P(SUM-3)/AA(15F) type dry-cell batteries. Note: After replacing the batteries, set the manufacturers’ codes again (see page 52). CAUTION: Follow these precautions to avoid leaking or cracking cells: • Place batteries in the remote control so they match the polarity: (+) to (+) and (–) to (–). • Use the correct type of batteries. Batteries that look similar may differ in voltage. • Always replace both batteries at the same time. • Do not expose batteries to heat or flame. 10 EN01_10.RX-8010V[J]_f 10 01.1.11, 5:51 PM Basic Operations The following operations are commonly used when you play any sound source. Before using the remote control From the remote control: How to confirm the remote control operation mode The display window on the remote control shows following information for about 10 seconds when you press certain buttons on the remote control, so that you can confirm which operation you do. To turn on the power, press AUDIO POWER. The STANDBY lamp on the front panel goes off. The name of the current source and Surround/DSP mode appear on the display. To turn off the power (into standby mode), press AUDIO POWER again. The STANDBY lamp on the front panel lights up. Pressing one of the source selecting buttons, the source name selected appears on the display. Buttons FM/AM CD PHONO TAPE/MD DVD or DVD MULTI CDR USB TV/DBS VCR 1 VCR 2 VIDEO Indications TUNER CD PHONO TAPE DVD CDR USB TV VCR 1 VCR 2 VIDEO AUDIO POWER Selecting the Source to Play Ex.: When you press CD. Press one of the source selecting buttons. The lamp on the front panel button for selected source lights up. • The selected source name and Surround/DSP mode also appear on the display. On the front panel: DVD MULTI DVD VCR 1 VCR 2 VIDEO CD CDR TAPE / MD USB AUDIO TV SOUND/DBS SOURCE NAME PHONO Pressing SOUND before you adjust the sound effect, “SOUND” appears on the display. SOURCE NAME From the remote control: Pressing TEXT DISPLAY or MENU before you use on-screen menu or TEXT COMPU LINK, “MENU” appears on the display (see pages 36 and 42). Pressing CONTROL or CATV/DBS CONTROL before you operate an audio or video equipment connected to the receiver, the remote control operation mode selected appears on the display (see pages 49 and 52). Ex.: When you press CATV/ DBS CONTROL. Turning the Power On and Off (Standby) DVD DVD MUILTI CD FM/AM TV/DBS VIDEO CDR PHONO VCR 1 VCR 2 TAPE/MD USB Selected source name and current Surround/DSP mode appear ANALOG L C R DGTL AUTO DVD MULTI LINEAR PCM SUBWFR LFE DIGITAL LS S L POWER R SPEAKERS VOLUME 1 Current volume level appears To turn off the power (into standby mode), press POWER again. The STANDBY lamp lights up. A small amount of power is consumed in standby mode. To turn the power off completely, unplug the AC power cord. STANDBY POWER DVD MULTI 11 HEADPHONE DIGITAL EQ INPUT ATT ONE TOUCH OPERATION SLEEP VOLUME Select the DVD player for viewing the digital video disc using the analog discrete output mode (5.1CH reproduction). To enjoy the DVD MULTI playback, see page 35. DVD Select the DVD player. VCR 1 Select the video component connected to the VCR 1 terminals. VCR 2 Select the video component connected to the VCR 2 terminals. VIDEO Select video component connected to the VIDEO terminals. TV (SOUND)/DBS Select TV sounds (or the DBS tuner). Select the turntable. PHONO * Select the CD player. CD * CDR * Select the CD recorder. Select the cassette deck (or the MD recorder). TAPE/MD * Select the personal computer (PC) connected USB (AUDIO) * to the USB terminal. FM/AM * Select an FM or AM broadcast. • Each time you press the button, the band alternates between FM and AM. 11 EN11_23.RX-8010V[J]_f DSP 3D–PHONIC MIDNIGHT MODE STANDBY Current source name and Surround/DSP mode appear ANALOG PRO LOGIC AUTO MUTING TUNED STEREO RS SPEAKERS 1 2 On the front panel: To turn on the power, press POWER. The STANDBY lamp goes off. The name of the current source and Surround/DSP mode appear on the display. FM / AM 01.1.11, 5:52 PM On the front panel: Notes: • When connecting an MD recorder (to the TAPE/MD jacks), and a DBS tuner (to the TV SOUND/DBS jacks), change the source names shown on the display. For details, see page 16. • When you press one of the source selecting buttons on the remote control marked with an asterisk (*), the receiver automatically turns on. Signal and speaker indicators on the display The signal indicators light up in the following cases: • Only the indicators for the incoming signals light up. • When analog input is selected, “L” and “R” always light up. • When “DVD MULTI” is selected as the source, “L,” “C,” “R,” “LFE,” “LS” and “RS” light up. The speaker indicators light up only —: The frames of “C,” “LS,” and “RS” light up, when the corresponding speaker is set to “LARGE” or “SMALL”. Signal indicators light up in red: L C Speaker indicators light up in white: R L SUBWFR LFE LS L: R: C: LS: RS: S: LFE: S RS C R SUBWFR LFE LS S RS • When digital input is selected: Lights up when the left channel signal comes in. • When analog input is selected: Always lights up. • When digital input is selected: Lights up when the right channel signal comes in. • When analog input is selected: Always lights up. Lights up when the center channel signal comes in. Lights up when the left rear channel signal comes in. Lights up when the right rear channel signal comes in. Lights up when the monaural rear channel signal comes in. Lights up when the LFE channel signal comes in. DVD MULTI TV SOUND/DBS DVD VCR 1 VCR 2 VIDEO CD CDR TAPE / MD USB AUDIO SOURCE NAME PHONO FM / AM SOURCE NAME From the remote control: DVD TV/DBS VCR 1 DVD MUILTI CD FM/AM VIDEO CDR PHONO VCR 2 TAPE/MD USB Note: Once you have selected a video source, pictures of the selected source are sent to the TV until you select another video source. Adjusting the Volume On the front panel: To increase the volume, turn MASTER VOLUME clockwise. To decrease the volume, turn it counterclockwise. • When you turn MASTER VOLUME rapidly, the volume level also changes rapidly. • When you turn MASTER VOLUME slowly, the volume level also changes slowly. From the remote control: To increase the volume, press VOLUME +. To decrease the volume, press VOLUME –. MASTER VOLUME + VOLUME − CAUTION: Note: When “SUBWOOFER” is set to “YES,” 17). SUBWFR lights up (see page Selecting different sources for picture and sound You can watch picture from a video component while listening to sound from another component. Always set the volume to the minimum before starting any source. If the volume is set at its high level, the sudden blast of sound energy can permanently damage your hearing and/or ruin your speakers. Notes: • The volume level can be adjusted within the range of “0” (minimum) to “90” (maximum). • If you set One Touch Operation to “ON” (see page 21), you do not have to adjust the volume level each time you change the source. It is automatically set to the stored level. Press one of the audio source selecting buttons — PHONO, CD, CDR, TAPE/MD, USB(AUDIO), FM/AM — while viewing the picture from a video component such as the VCR or DVD player, etc. The lamp on the front panel button for selected source lights up. 12 EN11_23.RX-8010V[J]_f 12 01.1.11, 5:52 PM Selecting the Front Speakers Muting the Sound IMPORTANT: You can activate two pairs of the front speakers at the same time only when the SPEAKER LOAD SELECTOR switch on the rear panel is set to “HIGH” and when no signals are sent to the center and rear speakers. Otherwise, activating one pair of the speakers deactivates the other. On the front panel ONLY: When you have connected two pairs of the front speakers, you can select which to use. To use the speakers connected to the FRONT SPEAKERS 1 terminals, press SPEAKERS ON/OFF 1 so that SPEAKERS 1 indicator lights up on the display. Make sure that the SPEAKERS 2 is not lit on the display. From the remote control ONLY: Press MUTING to mute the sound through all speakers and headphones connected. “MUTING” appears on the display and the volume turns off (the volume level indicator goes off). To restore the sound, press MUTING again so that “MUTING OFF” appears on the display. • Turning MASTER VOLUME on the front panel or pressing VOLUME +/– on the remote control also restores the sound. SPEAKERS ON/OFF 1 Listening at Night — Midnight Mode 2 To use the speakers connected to the FRONT SPEAKERS 2 terminals, press SPEAKERS ON/OFF 2 so that SPEAKERS 2 indicator lights up on the display. Make sure that the SPEAKERS 1 is not lit on the display. Using the midnight mode, you can enjoy a powerful sound at night even at a low volume level. • You can do this setting for each source. Press MIDNIGHT MODE to select the midnight mode. To use both sets of the speakers, press SPEAKERS ON/OFF 1 and 2 so that the SPEAKERS 1 and SPEAKERS 2 indicators light up on the display. To use neither sets of the speakers, press SPEAKERS ON/OFF 1 and 2 so that the SPEAKERS 1 and SPEAKERS 2 indicators disappear from the display. The HEADPHONE indicator lights up and “HEADPHONE” appears on the display. • Activating the speaker turns on the Surround and DSP modes previously selected. • Listening only with headphones: You can listen with the headphones without deactivating both pairs of speakers by connecting a pair of headphones to the PHONES jack on the front panel. If you want to use a pair of headphones without outputting sounds from the front speakers, you must turn off both pairs of the front speakers as mentioned above. Notes: MIDNIGHT MODE MIDNIGHT MODE On the front panel From the remote control • Each time you press the button, the midnight mode changes as follow. MIDNIGHT 1 MIDNIGHT 2 NORMAL MIDNIGHT 1: Select this when you want to compress the dynamic range a little. The MIDNIGHT MODE indicator lights up on the display. MIDNIGHT 2: Select this when you want to compress the dynamic range fully. (Useful at midnight). The MIDNIGHT MODE indicator lights up on the display. NORMAL: • If you use any of the Surround and DSP modes using the center or rear speakers with both front speakers activated, the speakers connected to the FRONT SPEAKERS 2 terminals are deactivated. • When you use HEADPHONE DSP mode, you can enjoy spacious stereo effect. (see page 25). Select this when you want to enjoy sound with its full dynamic range. (No effect applied.) The MIDNIGHT MODE indicator goes off from the display. Notes: • When the line direct function is turned on, the midnight mode is canceled temporarily. • The midnight mode is not valid for the DVD MULTI playback mode. CAUTION: Be sure to turn down the volume before connecting or putting on headphones, as high volume can damage both the headphones and your hearing. 13 EN11_23.RX-8010V[J]_f MUTING 13 01.1.11, 5:52 PM Attenuating the Input Signal Activating the Subwoofer Sound You can cancel the subwoofer sound even though you have connected a subwoofer and have set “SUBWOOFER” to “YES” (see page 17). This is useful when enjoying surround sound at night. When the input level of the playing source is too high, the sounds will be distorted. If this happens, you need to attenuate the input signal level to prevent the sound distortion. • You can do this setting for each source. On the front panel ONLY: Press SUBWOOFER OUT ON/OFF to SUBWOOFER OUT ON/OFF cancel the subwoofer sound output. Each time you press the button, the subwoofer sound output is deactivated (“SUBWFR OFF”) or activated (“SUBWFR ON”). – Select “SUBWFR OFF” to deactivate the subwoofer sound output. – Select “SUBWFR ON” to activate it. On the front panel ONLY: Press and hold INPUT ATT (INPUT ANALOG/DIGITAL) so that the INPUT ATT indicator lights up on the display. • Each time you press and hold the button, the input attenuator mode turns on (“ATT ON”) or off (“NORMAL”). Note: • This function is available only for the sources connected using the analog terminals. • When selecting “DVD MULTI” as the source, this effect does not work. You cannot select “SUBWFR OFF” even though “SUBWOOFER” is set to “YES,” when “SMALL” is selected for the front speakers (see page 17.) Reinforcing the Bass INPUT ATT Notes: Selecting the Line Direct Function You can boost the bass level. • You can do this setting for each source. On the front panel: BASS BOOST Press BASS BOOST to select the bass boost function. The BASS BOOST lamp on the front panel button lights up. • Each time you press the button, the bass boost function turns on (“BOOST ON”) and off (“BOOST OFF”). – Select “BOOST ON” to activate the bass boost function. The BASS BOOST lamp on the front panel button lights up. – Select “BOOST OFF” to cancel it. The BASS BOOST lamp on the front panel button goes off. From the remote control: 1. Press SOUND. The 10 keys are activated for sound adjustments. INPUT ANALOG/DIGITAL SOUND You can enjoy the sound closer to original source by skipping the sound adjustments such as digital equalization and midnight mode. Only the volume level is adjustable when the line direct function is turned on. • You can do this setting for each source. Press LINE DIRECT. The LINE DIRECT lamp on the front panel button lights up. LINE DIRECT LINE DIRECT On the front panel From the remote control • Each time you press the button, the line direct function turns on (“DIRECT ON”) and off (“DIRECT OFF”). – Select “DIRECT ON” to activate the line direct function. The LINE DIRECT lamp on the front panel button lights up. – Select “DIRECT OFF” to cancel it. The LINE DIRECT lamp on the front panel button goes off. BASS BOOST 2. Press BASS BOOST to select the bass 1 boost function. The BASS BOOST lamp on the front panel button lights up. • Each time you press the button, the bass boost function turns on (“BOOST ON”) and off (“BOOST OFF”). – Select “BOOST ON” to activate the bass boost function. The BASS BOOST lamp on the front panel button lights up. – Select “BOOST OFF” to cancel it. The BASS BOOST lamp on the front panel button goes off. Notes: • If you turn on the line direct function while using the Surround and DSP modes, the effect changes as follows: Input Mode Analog Digital Surround DSP Not valid Valid Not valid Not valid • Turning off the line direct function activates the sound adjustments previously selected such as the digital equalization and midnight mode. Note: This function does not affect the sounds outputting from the rear speakers. 14 EN11_23.RX-8010V[J]_f 14 01.1.11, 5:52 PM Adjusting the Equalization Patterns Using the Sleep Timer You can adjust equalization to your preference. • You can do this setting for each source. Using the Sleep Timer, you can fall asleep to music and know the receiver will turn off by itself rather than play all night. Before you start, remember.... • There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is canceled before you finish, start from step 1 again. From the remote control ONLY: On the front panel: 1. Press DIGITAL EQ (Equalization) repeatedly to select the frequency. • Each time you press the button, the frequency with its current level changes as follows: EQ63Hz and its level EQ250Hz and its level EQ16kHZ DIGITAL EQ LEVE ADJU and its level and its level CONTROL DOWN UP 3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to adjust the other frequency level. To flat the equalization pattern, Set all the frequency levels to “0” in step 2. The DIGITAL EQ indicator goes off from the display. SOUND 1. Press SOUND. The 10 keys are activated for sound adjustments. 2. Press DIGITAL EQ (Equalization) ∗DIGITALEQ repeatedly to select the frequency you want. 10 “EQ” appears on the remote control display RETURN window. • Each time you press the button, the frequency with its level changes as follows: EQ250Hz and its level EQ16kHZ EQ1kHz and its level 40 and its level 3. Press LEVEL + or − repeatedly to adjust the frequency level. The frequency level changes by 2 dB from –8 dB to +8 dB. The DIGITAL EQ indicator lights up on the display. 70 80 90 To cancel the Sleep Timer Press SLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP 0min” appears on the display. (The SLEEP indicator goes off.) • Turning off the power also cancels the Sleep Timer. Recording a Source You can record any analog source through the receiver to — • the cassette deck (or MD recorder) connected to the TAPE/MD jacks, • the VCRs connected to the VCR 1 and VCR 2 jacks, and • the CD recorder connected to the CDR jacks — at the same time. For digital-to-digital recording You can record the currently selected digital input source through the receiver to a digital recording device connected to the DIGITAL OUT terminal. + ∗BAL L ∗ CH/ LEVEL − • Analog-to-digital and digital-to-analog recordings are not possible. • The output volume level, midnight mode (see page 13), bass boost (see page 14), digital equalization (see the left), Surround modes and DSP modes (see page 24) cannot affect the recording. • The test tone signal (see page 27) does not come out through the DIGITAL OUT terminal. ∗BAL R To flat the equalization pattern, Set all the frequency levels to “0” in step 3. The DIGITAL EQ indicator goes off from the display. Notes: • When the line direct function is turned on, the digital equalization cannot be adjusted. • The digital equalization affects the front speaker sounds only. 15 15 60 To check or change the time remaining until the shut-off time Press SLEEP once. The remaining time until the shut-off time appears in minutes. • To change the shut-off time, press SLEEP repeatedly. 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust the other frequency level. EN11_23.RX-8010V[J]_f 50 Notes: EQ4kHz and its level 30 For analog-to-analog recording From the remote control: and its level 20 When the shut-off time comes The receiver turns off automatically. EQ1kHz 2. Press CONTROL UP 5/DOWN ∞ repeatedly to adjust the frequency level. The frequency level changes by 2 dB from –8 dB to +8 dB. The DIGITAL EQ indicator lights up on the display. EQ63Hz 10 SLEEP 0 (Canceled) EQ4kHz and its level Press SLEEP repeatedly. The SLEEP indicator lights up on the display, and the shut-off time changes as follows (in minutes): 01.1.11, 5:52 PM Basic Settings Some of the following settings are required after connecting and positioning your speakers in your listening room, while others will make operations easier. Adjusting the Front Speaker Output Balance If the sounds you hear from the front right and left speakers are unequal, you can adjust the speaker output balance. • You can do this setting for each source. When changing the source name from “TV” to “DBS”: • Press and hold SOURCE NAME (TV SOUND/DBS) until “ASSGN. DBS” appears on the display. TV SOUND/DBS SOURCE NAME Before you start, remember.... • There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is canceled before you finish, start from step 1 again. To change the source name to “TAPE” or “TV,” repeat the same procedure above — press and hold SOURCE NAME (TAPE/MD) to select “TAPE,” or press and hold SOURCE NAME (TV SOUND/DBS) to select “TV.” On the front panel: Note: 1. Press LEVEL ADJUST repeatedly until “BAL– (with current setting)” appears on the display. L 2. Press CONTROL UP 5/DOWN ∞ to adjust the balance. LEVEL ADJUST CONTROL DOWN UP • Pressing CONTROL UP 5 decreases the left channel output (from CENTER to L–21). • Pressing CONTROL DOWN ∞ decreases the right channel output (from CENTER to R–21). Selecting the Video Input Terminal From the remote control: 1. Press SOUND. SOUND The 10 keys are activated for sound adjustments. 2. Press L/R BAL. “L/R” appears on the remote control display window. Without changing the source name, you can still use the connected components. However, there may be some inconvenience. – “TAPE” or “TV” will appear on the display when you select the MD recorder or DBS tuner. – You cannot use the digital input (see page 19) for the MD recorder. – You cannot use the COMPU LINK remote control system (see page 41) to operate the MD recorder. ∗L/R BAL 8 This receiver is equipped with the component video input terminals for the DVD player and DBS tuner, which give you higher picture quality. When you use the component video input terminals for the DVD player and/or DBS tuner, change the video input terminal setting. Before you start, remember.... • There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is canceled before you finish, start from step 1 again. On the front panel ONLY: 3. Press BAL L or BAL R to adjust the balance. • Pressing BAL L decreases the right channel output (from CENTER to R–21). • Pressing BAL R decreases the left channel output (from CENTER to L–21). + ∗BAL L ∗ CH/ LEVEL − ∗BAL R 1. Press SETTING repeatedly until “VIDEO DVD” or “VIDEO DBS” appears on the display. The display changes to show the current setting. • Select “VIDEO DVD” to select the video input terminal for the DVD player and “VIDEO DBS” for the DBS tuner. 2. Press CONTROL UP 5/DOWN ∞ to select the appropriate video input terminal. Changing the Source Name CT SETTING CONTROL DOWN UP When you have connected an MD recorder to the TAPE/MD jacks or the DBS tuner to the TV SOUND/DBS jacks on the rear panel, change the source name which will be shown on the display when you select the MD recorder or DBS tuner as the source. • Each time you press the button, the display changes to show the following: On the front panel ONLY: COMPNT: Select this when you connect the DVD player or DBS tuner to the component video input terminals. When changing the source name from “TAPE” to “MD”: • Press and hold SOURCE NAME (TAPE/MD) until “ASSGN. MD” appears on the display. S/C: COMPNT S/C (Component) (S-video/Composite) Select this when you connect the DVD player or DBS tuner to the composite video or S-video input terminal. TAPE / MD SOURCE NAME Note: Without changing the video input terminal setting, you can see the picture through the video input terminals, but cannot use the AV COMPU LINK remote control system correctly (see page 47). 16 EN11_23.RX-8010V[J]_f 16 01.1.11, 5:52 PM Setting the Speakers for a Surround Field Setting the Subwoofer Information Register whether you have connected a subwoofer or not. Before you start, remember.... • There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is canceled before you finish, start from step 1 again. On the front panel ONLY: 1. Press SETTING repeatedly until “SUBWOOFER” appears on the display. CT SETTING Before you start, remember.... • There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is canceled before you finish, start from step 1 again. Front, Center, and Rear Speaker Setting The display changes to show the current setting. 2. Press CONTROL UP 5/DOWN ∞ to select “YES” or “NO.” To obtain the best possible surround sound of the Surround and DSP modes, you have to register the information about the speakers arrangement after all connections are completed. CONTROL DOWN UP Register the sizes of all the connected speakers. • When you change your speakers, you need to register the information about the speakers again. On the front panel ONLY: • Each time you press the button, the display alternates between “YES” and “NO.” YES: Select this when a subwoofer is connected. NO: Select this when no subwoofer is used. 1. Press SETTING repeatedly until “FRONT SPK” (Front Speaker), “CTR SPK” (Center Speaker) or “REAR SPK” (Rear Speaker) appears on the display. CT SETTING The display changes to show the current setting. Note: You cannot use SUBWOOFER OUT ON/OFF on the front panel (see page 14) and adjust the subwoofer output level (see below) when “SUBWOOFER” is set to “NO.” Adjusting the Subwoofer Output Level You can adjust the subwoofer output level if you have selected “YES” for the “SUBWOOFER” (see above). Once it has been adjusted, the receiver memorizes the adjustment. • You can do this setting for each source. Before you start, remember.... • There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is canceled before you finish, start from step 1 again. • When the front speakers are all deactivated, the subwoofer level cannot be adjusted. 2. Press CONTROL UP 5/DOWN ∞ to select the appropriate item about the speaker selected in the above step. CONTROL DOWN UP • Each time you press the button, the display changes to show the following: LARGE SMALL NONE LARGE: Select this when the speaker size is relatively large. SMALL: Select this when the speaker size is relatively small. NONE: Select this when you have not connected a speaker. (Not selectable for the front speakers) On the front panel: 1. Press LEVEL ADJUST repeatedly until “SUBWFR” appears on the display. AL LEVEL ADJUST The display changes to show the current setting. 2. Press CONTROL UP 5/DOWN ∞ to adjust the subwoofer output level (from –20 dB to +10 dB). From the remote control: 3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 to select the appropriate items for the other speakers. Notes: CONTROL DOWN UP SOUND 1. Press SOUND. • Keep the following comment in mind as reference when adjusting. – If the size of the cone speaker unit built in your speaker is greater than 4 3/4 inches (12 cm), select “LARGE,” and if it is smaller than 4 3/4 inches (12 cm), select “SMALL.” • If you have selected “NO” for the subwoofer setting, you can only select “LARGE” for the front speaker setting. • If you have selected “SMALL” for the front speaker setting, you cannot select “LARGE” for the center and rear speaker settings. The 10 keys are activated for sound adjustments. ∗SUBWFR 2. Press SUBWFR . 7/P “S-WFR” appears on the remote control display window. 3. Press LEVEL +/– to adjust the subwoofer output level (from –20 dB to +10 dB). + ∗BAL L ∗ CH/ LEVEL − ∗BAL R 17 EN11_23.RX-8010V[J]_f 17 01.1.11, 5:52 PM Center Delay Time Setting Register the delay time of the sound from the center speaker, comparing to that of the sound from the front speakers. If the distance from your listening point to the center speaker is equal to that to the front speakers, select 0 ms. As the distance to the center speaker becomes shorter, increase the delay time. • 1 msec increase (or decrease) in delay time corresponds to 11 13/16 inches (30 cm) decrease (or increase) in distance. • When shipped from the factory, the delay time is set to 0 ms. Left front speaker Center speaker Right front speaker 3.0 m 2.7 m 2.4 m 2.1 m On the front panel ONLY: 1. Press SETTING repeatedly until “CTR DELAY” (Center Delay) appears on the display. CT SETTING The display changes to show the current setting. 2. Press CONTROL UP 5/DOWN ∞ to select the delay time of the center speaker output (from 0 ms to 5 ms). • Center delay time is not valid for the DVD MULTI playback mode. • You cannot adjust the center delay time when you have set “CTR SPK” to “NONE.” Rear Delay Time Setting Register the delay time of the sound from the rear speakers, comparing to that of the sound from the front speakers. If the distance from your listening point to the rear speakers is equal to that to the front speakers, select 0 ms. As the distance to the rear speakers becomes shorter, increase the delay time. • 1 msec increase (or decrease) in delay time corresponds to 11 13/16 inches (30 cm) decrease (or increase) in distance. • Rear delay time for Dolby Digital and DTS Digital Surround is to be set to 5 ms. • When shipped from the factory, the delay time is set to 5 ms. Crossover Frequency Setting Small speakers cannot reproduce the bass sound very well. So, if you have used a small speaker for any of the front, center, and rear channels, this receiver automatically reallocates the bass elements, originally assigned to the channel for which you have connected the small speaker, to another channel (for which you have connected the large speaker). To use this function properly, you need to set the crossover frequency level according to the size of the small speaker connected. • If you have selected “LARGE” for all speakers (see page 17), this function cannot be adjusted. On the front panel ONLY: 1. Press SETTING repeatedly until “CROSS OVER” appears on the display. ECT SETTING The display changes to show the current setting. On the front panel ONLY: ECT SETTING The display changes to show the current setting. 2. Press CONTROL UP 5/DOWN ∞ to select the delay time of the rear speaker output (from 0 ms to 15 ms). Right rear speaker Ex. Set the center delay time to “1 ms” and the rear delay time to “2 ms.” Notes: 1. Press SETTING repeatedly until “REAR DELAY” appears on the display. Left rear speaker CONTROL DOWN UP CONTROL DOWN UP 2. Press CONTROL UP 5/DOWN ∞ to select the crossover frequency level according to the size of the small speaker connected. CONTROL DOWN UP • Each time you press the button, the display changes to show the following: 80Hz 100Hz 120Hz • Use the following comments as reference when adjusting. Notes: • Rear delay time is not valid for the DVD MULTI playback mode. • You cannot adjust the rear delay time when you have set “REAR SPK” to “NONE.” 80Hz: Select this when the cone speaker unit built in the speaker is about 4 3/4 inches (12 cm). 100Hz: Select this when the cone speaker unit built in the speaker is about 3 15/16 inches (10 cm). 120Hz: Select this when the cone speaker unit built in the speaker is about 3 3/16 inches (8 cm). Note: Crossover frequency is not valid for the DVD MULTI playback, 5 CH /4 CH Stereo, 3D-PHONIC, and HEADPHONE DSP modes. 18 EN11_23.RX-8010V[J]_f 18 01.1.11, 5:52 PM Low Frequency Effect Attenuator Setting To set the DIGITAL 2/3/4 terminals: If the bass sound is distorted while playing back a source using Dolby Digital or DTS Digital Surround, follow the procedure below. 1. Press SETTING again until DIGITAL 2/3/4 terminals' setting appears on the display. On the front panel ONLY: 1. Press SETTING repeatedly until “LFE ATT” (Low Frequency Effect Attenuator) appears on the display. T SETTING The display changes to show the current settings. CT SETTING DIGITAL 2 terminal setting The display changes to show the current setting. 2. Press CONTROL UP 5/DOWN ∞ to select the low frequency effect attenuator level. CONTROL DOWN UP DIGITAL 4 terminal setting 2. Press CONTROL UP 5/DOWN ∞ to select the appropriate digital terminal settings. • Each time you press the button, the display changes to show the following: 0dB DIGITAL 3 terminal setting 10dB CONTROL DOWN UP • Each time you press the buttons, the display changes to show the following: 0dB: Normally select this. 10dB: Select this when the bass sound is distorted. When the DGTL COAX (DIGITAL 1) is set to “DVD” 2: CD 3: TV (or DBS* ) 4: CDR “ 2: CD 3: TV (or DBS* ) 4: MD** “ 2: CD 3: MD** 4: CDR “ 2: MD** 3: TV (or DBS* ) 4: CDR “ (back to the beginning) Notes: • Low frequency effect attenuator is not valid for the DVD MULTI playback mode. • This function takes effect only when the Dolby Digital or DTS Digital Surround sounds with LFE signal comes in (with “SUBWOOFER” set to “YES”). When the DGTL COAX (DIGITAL 1) is set to “MD”** 2: CD 3: TV (or DBS*) 4: DVD “ 2: CD 3: DVD 4: CDR “ 2: DVD 3: TV (or DBS*) 4: CDR “ 2: CD 3: TV (or DBS*) 4: CDR “ (back to the beginning) Digital Input (DIGITAL IN) Terminal Setting When the DGTL COAX (DIGITAL 1) is set to “CDR” When you use the digital input terminals, you have to register what components are connected to which terminals (DIGITAL IN 1/2/3/4). 2: MD** 3: TV (or DBS*) 4: DVD “ 2: CD 3: TV (or DBS*) 4: DVD “ 2: CD 3: TV (or DBS*) 4: MD** “ 2: CD 3: MD** 4: DVD “ (back to the beginning) Before you start, remember... • There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is canceled before you finish, start from step 1 again. When the DGTL COAX (DIGITAL 1) is set to “TV” or “DBS” 2: CD 3: MD** 4: CDR “ 2: MD** 3: DVD 4: CDR “ 2: CD 3: DVD 4: CDR “ 2: CD 3: DVD 4: MD** “ (back to the beginning) On the front panel ONLY: To set the DIGITAL 1 terminal: 1. Press SETTING repeatedly until “DGTL COAX” (Digital Coaxial) appears on the display. CT SETTING When the DGTL COAX (DIGITAL 1) is set to “CD” 2: DVD 3: TV (or DBS*) 4: MD** “ 2: DVD 3: MD** 4: CDR “ 2: MD** 3: TV (or DBS*) 4: CDR “ 2: DVD 3: TV (or DBS*) 4: CDR “ (back to the beginning) The display changes to show the current setting for DIGITAL 1 terminal. 2. Press CONTROL UP 5/DOWN ∞ to select the appropriate digital terminal setting. CONTROL DOWN UP • Each time you press the button, the display changes to show the following: 1: DVD “ 1: MD** “ 1: CDR “ 1 : TV (or DBS* ) “ 1: CD “ (back to the beginning) * If you have changed the source name from “TV” to “DBS,” “DBS” appears (see page 16). ** Change the source name to “MD” for TAPE/MD jacks when you use an MD recorder (see page 16). * If you have changed the source name from “TV” to “DBS,” “DBS” appears (see page 16). ** Change the source name to “MD” for TAPE/MD jacks when you use an MD recorder (see page 16). Note: When shipped from the factory, the DIGITAL IN terminals have been set for use with the following components. • DIGITAL 1 (coaxial): For DVD player • DIGITAL 2 (optical): For CD player • DIGITAL 3 (optical): For digital TV broadcast tuner • DIGITAL 4 (optical): For CD recorder 19 EN11_23.RX-8010V[J]_f 19 01.1.11, 5:52 PM Selecting the Analog or Digital Input Mode When you have connected digital source components using the digital terminals (see page 8), you need to change the input mode for these components to the appropriate digital input mode correctly — DGTL AUTO, DGTL DTS, or DGTL D.D. Before you start, remember... • The digital input (DIGITAL IN) terminal setting should be correctly done for the sources you want to select the digital input mode for. Without setting this digital input terminal correctly, you cannot change the input mode from analog input to digital input even if you follow the procedure below. When playing a software encoded with the Dolby Digital or DTS Digital Surround, “DGTL AUTO” may not work properly and the following symptoms may occur: • Sound does not come out at the beginning of playback. • Noise comes out while using the searching or skipping chapters or tracks. In this case press CONTROL UP 5/ DOWN ∞ to select “DGTL D.D” or “DGTL DTS” while “DGTL AUTO” still remains on the display. • Each time you press the button, the input mode changes as follows. DGTL AUTO (Digital) (Digital) 1. Press one of the source selecting button (DVD, TV SOUND/DBS, CD, CDR, or TAPE/MD)* for which you want to change the input mode. The lamp on the front panel button for selected source lights up. DVD VCR 1 VCR 2 VIDEO CD CDR TAPE / MD USB AUDIO TV SOUND/DBS SOURCE NAME PHONO FM / AM SOURCE NAME Note: * Among the source listed above, you can select the digital input only for the sources which you have selected the digital input terminals for. (See “Digital Input (DIGITAL IN) Terminal Setting” on page 19.) INPUT 2. Press INPUT ANALOG/DIGITAL ANALOG/DIGITAL (INPUT ATT) briefly to change the input mode. INPUT ATT • Each time you press the button, the input mode changes as follows. DGTL AUTO ANALOG (Digital) DGTL AUTO: Select this for the digital input mode. The receiver automatically detects the incoming signal. ANALOG: Select this for the analog input mode. always lights up. ANALOG When selecting “DGTL AUTO,” following indicators showing detected signals light up on the display. LINEAR PCM DIGITAL DGTL D.D (Digital Dolby Digital) DGTL DTS On the front panel: DVD MULTI CONTROL DOWN UP : Always lights up. : • Lights up when Linear PCM signals come in. • The frame flashes when detecting signals. • LINEAR PCM without frame flashes when PCM signals are not recognized. : Lights up when Dolby Digital signals come in. : Lights up when DTS Digital Surround signals come in. When selecting “DGTL D.D” or “DGTL DTS,” following indicators showing detected signals light up on the display. : Always lights up. When selecting “DGTL D.D” DIGITAL : • Lights up when Dolby Digital signals come in. • The frame flashes when Dolby Digital signals are not recognized. When selecting “DGTL DTS” : • Lights up when DTS Digital Surround signals come in. • The frame flashes when DTS Digital Surround signals are not recognized. Note: When you turn off the power or select another source, “DGTL D.D” and “DGTL DTS” settings are canceled and the digital input mode is automatically reset to “DGTL AUTO.” To change the input mode back to analog input, select “ANALOG” in step 2. From the remote control: 1. Press the source selecting button (DVD, CD, TV/DBS, CDR, or TAPE/MD)* for which you want to change the input mode. DVD DVD MUILTI CD FM/AM TV/DBS VIDEO CDR PHONO VCR 1 VCR 2 TAPE/MD USB Note: * Among the source listed above, you can select the digital input only for the sources which you have selected the digital input terminals for. (See “Digital Input (DIGITAL IN) Terminal Setting” on page 19.) 2. Press ANALOG/DIGITAL INPUT to change the input mode. ANALOG/DIGITAL INPUT • Each time you press the button, the input mode changes as follows: DGTL AUTO (Digital) ANALOG When playing a software encoded with the Dolby Digital or DTS Digital Surround, “DGTL AUTO” may not happen to work well. In this case press CONTROL UP 5/DOWN ∞ on the front panel to select “DGTL D.D” or “DGTL DTS” (while “DGTL AUTO” remains on the display). Note: You can select “DGTL D.D” or “DGTL DTS” from the remote control by using the On-Screen Menus (see page 36). 20 EN11_23.RX-8010V[J]_f 20 01.1.11, 5:52 PM Showing the Text Information on the Display When you have connected an MD recorder or CD player equipped with TEXT COMPU LINK remote control system (see page 42), you can show the text information, such as disc title or track title, on the display of this receiver. To show it on the display, follow the procedure below. Before you start, remember.... • There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is canceled before you finish, start from step 1 again. On the front panel ONLY: 1. Press SETTING repeatedly until “FL DISP” (Display) appears on the display. CT SETTING The display changes to show the current setting. 2. Press CONTROL UP 5/DOWN ∞ to select either the source name or the text information to be shown on the display. CONTROL DOWN UP • Each time you press the button, the display changes to show the following: NORM (Normal) Basic Setting and Adjustment — Auto Memory Without any setting required, this receiver stores different sound settings for each different playing source automatically whenever you do the following: • Turning on the power (see page 11) • Changing the source to play (see page 11) • Changing the source name (see page 16) So, you do not have to change the sound settings next time you select the same source. The stored settings for the selected source are automatically recalled. The following settings are automatically stored for each source: • Front speaker output balance (see page 16) • Subwoofer setting and its output level (see page 17) • Input attenuator mode (see page 14) • Midnight mode (see page 13) • Bass boost (see page 14) • Digital equalization adjustment (see page 15) • Line direct (see page 14) • Surround mode on/off (see page 26) • Surround/DSP mode setting (see pages 27 – 34) • DVD MULTI playback mode setting (see page 35) • Analog/digital input mode (see page 20) You can assign and store the volume level for each source. See below. TEXT NORM: Source name and Surround/DSP mode appear during play. TEXT: Text information appears during play. Notes: Note: • If the source is FM or AM, you can assign different settings for each band. • You cannot assign and store different settings for each digital input mode. • The Surround modes and DSP modes cannot be used with DVD MULTI playback mode at the same time. Though you have selected “TEXT,” the source name and Surround / DSP mode appear if a playing disc has no text information. To store the volume level Before you start, remember.... • There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is canceled before you finish, start from step 1 again. On the front panel ONLY: 1. Press SETTING repeatedly until “ONE TOUCH” appears on the display. ECT SETTING The display changes to show the current setting. 2. Press CONTROL UP 5/DOWN ∞ to turn on the One Touch Operation. CONTROL DOWN UP The ONE TOUCH OPERATION indicator lights up on the display. • Each time you press the button, the one touch operation function turns on (“ON”) and off (“OFF”). To recall the volume level With the ONE TOUCH OPERATION indicator lit, the volume level for the currently selected source is recalled when the source is selected. To cancel the One Touch Operation Select “OFF” in step 2 above so that the ONE TOUCH OPERATION indicator goes off. (Even though the One Touch Operation is canceled, the recalled volume remains active.) 21 EN11_23.RX-8010V[J]_f 21 01.1.11, 5:52 PM Receiving Radio Broadcasts You can browse through all the stations or use the preset function to go immediately to a particular station. Tuning in Stations Manually Using Preset Tuning On the front panel: 1. Press FM/AM to select the band (FM or AM). FM/AM Once a station is assigned to a channel number, the station can be quickly tuned. You can preset up to 30 FM and 15 AM stations. To store the preset stations The FM/AM lamp on the front panel button lights up. The last received station of the selected band is tuned in. • Each time you press the button, the band alternates between FM and AM. Before you start, remember... • There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is canceled before you finish, start from step 1 again. On the front panel ONLY: ANALOG L TUNED STEREO R 1. Tune in the station you want to preset (see “Tuning in Stations Manually” on the left). SPEAKERS VOLUME 1 2. Press FM/AM TUNING 5/∞ until you find the frequency you want. FM/AM TUNING • Pressing FM/AM TUNING 5 increases the frequency. • Pressing FM/AM TUNING ∞ decreases the frequency. ANALOG L TUNED STEREO R SPEAKERS VOLUME 1 From the remote control: 2. Press MEMORY. MEMORY FM / AM 1. Press FM/AM to select the band (FM or AM). ANALOG The FM/AM lamp on the front panel button lights up. The last received station of the selected band is tuned in. • Each time you press the button, the band alternates between FM and AM. 2. Press TUNING UP 3 or TUNING DOWN 2 until you find the frequency you want. • If you want to store the FM reception mode for this station, select the FM reception mode you want. See “Selecting the FM Reception Mode” on page 23. L R TUNED STEREO SPEAKERS VOLUME 1 The channel number position starts flashing on the display for about 10 seconds. SET DOWN – TUNING – UP • Pressing TUNING UP 3 increases the frequency. • Pressing TUNING DOWN 2 decreases the frequency. 3. Press FM/AM PRESET 5/∞ to select a channel number while the channel number position is flashing. 4. Press MEMORY again while the selected channel number is flashing on the display. FM/AM PRESET MEMORY The selected channel number stops flashing. The station is assigned to the selected channel number. Notes: • When a station of sufficient signal strength is tuned in, the TUNED indicator lights up on the display. • When an FM stereo program is received, the STEREO indicator also lights up. • When you hold the button (and release it) in step 2, the frequency keeps changing until a station is tuned in. ANALOG L R TUNED STEREO SPEAKERS VOLUME 1 5. Repeat steps 1 to 4 until you store all the stations you want. To erase a stored preset station Storing a new station on a used number erases the previously stored one. 22 EN11_23.RX-8010V[J]_f 22 01.1.11, 5:52 PM To tune in a preset station Selecting the FM Reception Mode On the front panel: 1. Press FM/AM to select the band (FM or AM). When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to receive or noisy FM/AM You can change the FM reception mode while receiving an FM broadcast. • You can store the FM reception mode for each preset station. The FM/AM lamp on the front panel button lights up. The last received station of the selected band is tuned in. • Each time you press the button, the band alternates between FM and AM. 2. Press FM/AM PRESET 5/∞ until you find the channel you want. Press FM MODE. • Each time you press the button, the FM reception mode alternates between “AUTOMUTING” and “MONO.” FM/AM PRESET • Pressing FM/AM PRESET 5 increases the number. • Pressing FM/AM PRESET ∞ decreases the number. ∗REAR L FM MODE 0 FM MODE On the front panel From the remote control From the remote control: FM / AM 1. Press FM/AM. ANALOG The last received station of the selected band is tuned in. • Each time you press the button, the band alternates between FM and AM. 2. Press the 10 keys to select a preset channel number. • • • • L R AUTO MUTING TUNED STEREO SPEAKERS VOLUME 1 BASS BOOST EFFECT 1 2 ROOM SIZE TEST CTR TONE 3 MENU LIVENESS For channel number 5, press 5. 4 5 6 ENTER For channel number 15, press +10 then 5. ∗SUBWFR ∗L/R BAL ∗CENTER 8 9 For channel number 20, press +10 then 10. 7/P ∗DIGITALEQ ∗REAR L ∗REAR R For channel number 30, press +10, +10, 10 0 +10 RETURN FM MODE 100+ then 10. Note: When you use the 10 keys on the remote control, be sure that they are activated for the tuner, not for the CD and others. (See page 11.) ANALOG L R TUNED SPEAKERS 1 VOLUME AUTOMUTING: When a program is broadcasted in stereo, you will hear stereo sound; when in monaural, you will hear monaural sounds. This mode is also useful to suppress static noise between stations. The AUTO MUTING indicator lights up on the display. MONO: Reception will be improved although you will lose the stereo effect. In this mode, you will hear noise while tuning into the stations. The AUTO MUTING indicator goes off from the display. Note: When using the FM MODE on the remote control, be sure that the 10 keys are activated for the tuner, not for the CD and others. (See page 11.) 23 EN11_23.RX-8010V[J]_f 23 01.1.11, 5:52 PM Creating a Surround Field in Your Room The built-in Surround Processor provides Surround mode and four types of the DSP (Digital Signal Processor) mode — DAP (Digital Acoustic Processor) mode, 5 CH/4 CH Stereo mode, 3D-PHONIC mode, and HEADPHONE DSP mode. With this receiver, you can use a Surround mode and a DSP mode at the same time. Once you have adjusted Surround and/or DSP modes, the adjustments done for each source are memorized. Surround modes With this receiver, you can use two types of the Surround mode. Following modes cannot be used when only the front speakers are connected to this receiver (without the rear speakers or center speaker). Dolby Surround (Dolby Digital and Dolby Pro Logic) * Used to watch the soundtracks of software encoded with Dolby Digital (bearing the mark ) or with Dolby Surround DOLBY SURROUND ). (bearing the mark Dolby Surround encoding format records the left front channel, right front channel, center channel, and rear channel (total 4 channels) signals into 2 channels. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built in this receiver decode these 2 channel signals into original 4 channel signals — matrix-based multichannel reproduction, and allows you to enjoy the realistic sound field in your listening room. On the other hand, Dolby Digital encoding method (so called a discrete 5.1 channel digital audio format) records and compresses the left front channel, right front channel, center channel, left rear channel, right rear channel, and LFE channel (total 6 channels, but LFE channel is counted as 0.1 channel, therefore called 5.1 channels) signals digitally. Each channel is completely independent from other channel signals to avoid interference, therefore, you can obtain much better sound quality with much stereo and surround effects. The Dolby Digital decoder built in this receiver can create much more realistic sound field in your listening room. You may feel as if you were in a real theater. In addition, Dolby Digital enables stereo rear sounds, and sets the cutoff frequency of the rear treble at 20 kHz, comparing to 7 kHz for Dolby Pro Logic. These facts enhance the sound movement and being-there feelings much more than Dolby Pro Logic. • To enjoy the software encoded with Dolby Digital, you must connect the source component using the digital terminal on the rear of this receiver. (See page 8.) D I G I T A L DTS Digital Surround ** DTS Digital Surround is another discrete 5.1 channel digital audio format available on CD, LD, and DVD software encoded with DTS ). Digital Surround (bearing the mark Comparing to Dolby Digital, audio compression rate is relatively low. This fact allows DTS Digital Surround format to add breadth and depth to the reproduced sounds. As a result, DTS Digital Surround features natural, solid and clear sound. • To enjoy the software encoded with DTS Digital Surround, you must connect the source component using the digital terminal on the rear of this receiver. (See page 8.) * Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby,” “Pro Logic,” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Confidential Unpublished Works. ©1992–1997 Dolby Laboratories, Inc. All rights reserved. DSP modes With this receiver, you can use four types of the DSP mode. DAP modes In order to reproduce a more acoustic sound field in your listening room while playing music sources, you can use DAP modes. This mode can be used when the front speakers are connected to this receiver (without respect to the rear/center speaker connection). THEATER 1: Reproduces the sound field of a large theater (where the seating capacity about 1,000). THEATER 2: Reproduces the sound field of a small theater (where the seating capacity about 300). HALL 1: Gives clear vocal and the feeling of a large concert hall (where the seating capacity about 1,000). HALL 2: Gives clear vocal and the feeling of a small concert hall (where the seating capacity about 300). LIVE CLUB: Gives the feeling of a live music club with a low ceiling. DANCE CLUB: Gives a throbbing bass beat. PAVILION: Gives the spacious feeling of a pavilion with a high ceiling. 5 CH/4 CH Stereo mode You can create more powerful sound field for both of the digital and analog stereo sounds source. The 4 CH Stereo mode reproduces a sound filed through the front left and right speakers and rear left and right speakers. The 5 CH Stereo mode adds the center channel element to the 4 CH Stereo sound field by outputting mixed left and right signals through the center speaker. This mode cannot be used when only the front speakers are connected to this receiver without the rear speakers. Note: “5CH STEREO” is selected when setting the center speaker to “LARGE” or “SMALL,” and “4CH STEREO” is selected when setting the center speaker to “NONE” (see page 17). ** Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. US Pat. No. 5,451,942 and other world-wide patents issues and pending. “DTS” and “DTS Digital Surround” are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. ©1996 Digital Theater Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. 24 EN24_35.RX-8010V[J]_f 24 01.1.11, 9:09 PM 3D-PHONIC modes The 3D-PHONIC mode gives you such a nearly surround effect as is reproduced through the Dolby Surround decoder, which is widely used to reproduce sounds with a feeling of movement like those experienced in movie theaters. The 3D-PHONIC mode is the result of research on sound localization technology carried out at JVC for many years. This mode can be used when the front speakers are connected to this receiver (without respect to the rear/center speaker connection). When the 3D PHONIC mode is reproduced with the center speaker connected, you can feel as if actors on the screen actually speak in your room. • You can select “3D ACTION” only when playing an analog or linear PCM (digital) source. • You can select “3D DIGITAL” only when playing a source encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS Digital Surround. Reproducing the Sound Field The sound heard in a concert hall or club consists of direct sound and indirect sound — early reflections and reflections from behind. Direct sounds reach the listener directly without any reflection. On the other hand, indirect sounds are delayed by the distances of the ceiling and walls. These direct sounds and indirect sounds are the most important elements of the acoustic surround effects. The Surround and DSP modes can create these important elements, and give you a real “being there” feeling. Reflections from behind Early reflections 3D ACTION: Best for action and war movies — where the action is fast and explosive. 3D DIGITAL: Reproduces multichannel source encoded with Dolby Digital or with DTS Digital Surround. HEADPHONE DSP mode The HEADPHONE DSP mode can create the stereo sound as if you listen through the speakers while listening to a source using headphones. So you can feel as if you were in a music room. This mode can be used only when both of the front speakers are deactivated (see page 13.) Direct sounds DVD MULTI Playback Mode This receiver provides the DVD MULTI playback mode for reproducing the analog discrete 5.1 channel output mode of the DVD player or other equipment. You can adjust the DVD MULTI playback mode while playing back a video software such as a DVD using the analog discrete 5.1 channel output mode. • For the DVD MULTI playback mode connection, see page 7. • For details on the DVD MULTI playback mode, see page 35. Notes: • When you select “DVD MULTI” as the source to play, you cannot select or adjust the Surround and DSP modes. • The PRO LOGIC indicator lights up when the Dolby Pro Logic decorder built in this receiver is activated. • When the line direct function is turned on, the Surround and DSP modes are canceled temporarily (see page 14). • No adjustment can be made for the HEADPHONE DSP mode. DSP Modes Available to Input Mode MODE V: Possible / 2: Impossible SURROUND D S P DAP MODE 3D ACTION (DIGITAL) 5 CH/4 CH Stereo INPUT SIGNAL SURROUND SURR. with OFF DAP DSP OFF HEADPHOHE HEADPHONE HEADPHONE DSP ANALOG (2 CH) V (DOLBY PRO LOGIC) V V (3D ACTION) V V V V V DVD MULTI (5.1 CH) 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V LINEAR PCM V (DOLBY PRO LOGIC) V V (3D ACTION) V V V V V DOLBY DIGITAL V (DOLBY DIGITAL) V V V V V V DTS V *2 (DTS SURROUND) V V V V V V *1 *1 *2 V (3D DIGITAL) V (3D DIGITAL) When 2 channel signal comes in, DOLBY PRO LOGIC is selected. When other signals come in, DOLBY DIGITAL is selected. When 2 channel signal comes in, DOLBY PRO LOGIC is selected. When other signals come in, DTS SURROUND is selected. 25 EN24_35.RX-8010V[J]_f 25 01.1.11, 9:09 PM Available DSP Modes According to the Speaker Arrangement Available DSP modes will vary depending on how many speakers are used with this receiver. Make sure that you have set the speaker information correctly (see page 17). Speaker arrangements Front speaker Front speaker TV Center speaker Rear speaker Rear speaker Available DSP modes Each time you press DSP MODE, the DSP modes change as follows: THEATER 1 \ THEATER 2 \ HALL 1 \ HALL 2 \ LIVE CLUB \ DANCE CLUB \ PAVILION \ 5CH STEREO (when using 5 speakers) or 4CH STEREO (when using 4 speakers)* 3D ACTION or 3D DIGITAL \ SURR. OFF (DSP OFF) (Back to the beginning) \ \ To activate the Surround mode, press SURROUND ON/OFF button so that the SURROUND ON/OFF lamp on the front panel button lights up. Notes: Front speaker Front speaker TV Rear speaker Front speaker • If the settings for the center and the rear speakers are changed to “NONE” (see page 17), the Surround mode will be canceled. • When both of the Surround mode and DSP mode are deactivated, “SURR. OFF” appears on the display. * “5CH STEREO” is selected when setting the center speaker to “LARGE” or “SMALL,” and “4CH STEREO” is selected when setting the center speaker to “NONE” (see page 17). Rear speaker Front speaker TV Center speaker THEATER 1 \ THEATER 2 LIVE CLUB \ DANCE CLUB 3D ACTION or 3D DIGITAL (Back to the beginning) \ HALL 1 \ HALL 2 \ \ PAVILION \ \ SURR. OFF (DSP OFF) \ To activate the Surround mode, press SURROUND ON/OFF button so that the SURROUND ON/OFF lamp on the front panel button lights up. Notes: • If the setting for the center speaker is changed to “NONE” (see page 17), the Surround mode will be canceled. • When both of the Surround mode and DSP mode are deactivated, “SURR. OFF” appears on the display. Front speaker Front speaker TV THEATER 1 \ THEATER 2 LIVE CLUB \ DANCE CLUB 3D ACTION or 3D DIGITAL (Back to the beginning) \ HALL 1 \ HALL 2 \ \ PAVILION \ \ SURR. OFF (DSP OFF) \ Note: Surround mode cannot be used when only the front speakers are connected. HEADPHONE j HEADPHONE DSP TV Note: To use the HEADPHONE or HEADPHONE DSP mode, deactivate both of the front speakers (see page 13). 26 EN24_35.RX-8010V[J]_f 26 01.1.11, 9:09 PM 5. Select the speaker you want to adjust. Adjusting the Surround Modes You can also use a Surround mode with a DAP mode (see page 30). • To select the center speaker level, press CENTER. “CTR” appears on the remote control display window. • To select the left rear speaker level, press REAR L. “REARL” appears on the remote control display window. • To select the right rear speaker level, press REAR R. “REARR” appears on the remote control display window. Before you start, remember... • Make sure that you have set the speaker information correctly (see page 17). • There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is canceled before you finish, start from step 3 again. • You cannot adjust the rear speaker output levels when you have set “REAR SPK” to “NONE.” See page 17. • You cannot adjust the center speaker output level and center tone when you have set “CTR SPK” to “NONE.” See page 17. • To adjust the front speaker output balance and subwoofer output level, see pages 16 and 17. 6. Press LEVEL +/– to adjust the speaker output levels (–10 dB to +10 dB). From the remote control: 7. Press SOUND. 1. Select and play a sound source. • To enjoy Dolby Pro Logic, play back a software encoded with DOLBY SURROUND mark. Dolby Surround and labeled with • To enjoy Dolby Digital, play back a software encoded with Dolby Digital and labeled with mark. • To enjoy DTS Digital Surround, play back a software encoded mark. with DTS Digital Surround and labeled with D I G I T A L 2. Press SURROUND ON/OFF to activate an appropriate Surround mode — PRO LOGIC, DOLBY DIGITAL or DTS SURROUND. SURROUND ON/OFF The SURROUND ON/OFF lamp on the front panel button lights up. • Each time you press the button, the Surround mode turns on and off alternately. • When “PRO LOGIC” is selected, the PRO LOGIC indicator lights up on the display. 3. Press SOUND. SOUND The 10 keys are activated for sound adjustments. 4. Press TEST to check the speaker output balance. TEST 4 MENU “TEST TONE L” starts flashing on the display, and a test tone comes out of the speakers in the following order: TEST TONE L TEST TONE C (Left front speaker) (Center speaker) TEST TONE R ∗CENTER ∗REAR L ∗REAR R FM MODE 100+ 0 9 +10 + ∗BAL L ∗ CH/ LEVEL − ∗BAL R SOUND • To adjust other speaker output levels, repeat steps 5 and 6. TEST 8. Press TEST again to stop the test tone. 4 MENU 9. Press CTR TONE to select the center tone level you want. CTR TONE 5 ENTER The center tone adjustment affects the midfrequency range, which the human voice is mostly made up of. • Each time you press the button, the display changes to show the following: CTR TONE 1 CTR TONE 3 CTR TONE 2 (Softer) CTR TONE 5 (Sharper) (Soft) (Flat) CTR TONE 4 (Sharp) To make the dialogue softer, select “CTR TONE 1” or “CTR TONE 2.” To make the dialogue clearer, select “CTR TONE 4” or “CTR TONE 5.” When “CTR TONE 3” is selected, no adjustment is applied. On the front panel: You can also use the buttons on the front panel to adjust the Surround modes. However, no test tone is available when using the buttons on the front panel. So, make adjustments while listening to the sound of the source played back. (Right front speaker) 1. Select and play a sound source. TEST TONE LS TEST TONE RS (Left rear speaker) (Right rear speaker) Notes: • To enjoy Dolby Pro Logic, play back a software encoded with DOLBY SURROUND mark. Dolby Surround and labeled with • To enjoy Dolby Digital, play back a software encoded with mark. Dolby Digital and labeled with • To enjoy DTS Digital Surround, play back a software encoded mark. with DTS Digital Surround and labeled with D I G I T A L • You can adjust the speaker output levels without outputting the test tone. • No test tone comes out of the center speaker when “CTR SPK” is set to “NONE” (see page 17). • No test tone comes out of the rear speakers when “REAR SPK” is set to “NONE” (see page 17). • If the TV is turned on and the proper video input is selected on the TV, the test tone screen will appear on the TV. 27 EN24_35.RX-8010V[J]_f 27 01.1.11, 9:09 PM 2. Press SURROUND ON/OFF to activate an appropriate Surround mode — PRO LOGIC, DOLBY DIGITAL or DTS SURROUND. SURROUND ON/OFF The SURROUND ON/OFF lamp on the front panel button lights up. • Each time you press the button, the Surround mode turns on and off alternately. • When “PRO LOGIC” is selected, the PRO LOGIC indicator lights up on the display. 3. Adjust the speaker output levels. 1) Press LEVEL ADJUST repeatedly until one of the following indications appears on the display. “CENTER”: To adjust the center speaker level. “REAR L”: To adjust the left rear speaker level. “REAR R”: To adjust the right rear speaker level. 2) Press CONTROL UP 5/DOWN ∞ to adjust the selected speaker output level (from –10 dB to +10 dB). 3) Repeat 1) and 2) to adjust the other speaker output levels. 4. Adjust the center tone. CTR TONE 2 (Softer) LEVEL ADJUST CONTROL DOWN UP 1. Press DSP MODE repeatedly until the DAP mode you want to adjust — THEATER 1, THEATER 2, HALL 1, HALL 2, LIVE CLUB, DANCE CLUB, or PAVILION — appears on the display. DSP MODE The DSP MODE lamp on the front panel button lights up, and the DSP indicator also lights up on the display. • When you have set “REAR SPK” to “NONE,” the 3DPHONIC indicator also lights up. 2. Adjust the speaker output levels. 1) Press LEVEL ADJUST repeatedly until one of the following indications appears on the display. “CENTER”: To adjust the center speaker level. “REAR L”: To adjust the left rear speaker level. “REAR R”: To adjust the right rear speaker level. 2) Press CONTROL UP 5/DOWN ∞ to adjust the selected speaker output level (from –10 dB to +10 dB). 3) Repeat 1) and 2) to adjust the other speaker output levels. TAL Q LEVEL ADJUST CONTROL DOWN UP EFFECT SETT 1) Press EFFECT repeatedly until “CTR TONE” appears on the display. The display shows the current setting. 2) Press CONTROL UP 5/DOWN ∞ to select the center tone level you want. • Each time you press the button, the display changes to show the following: CTR TONE 1 TAL Q On the front panel: (Soft) CTR TONE 5 (Sharper) 3. Adjust the center tone. CONTROL DOWN UP CTR TONE 3 (Flat) CTR TONE 4 (Sharp) 1) Press EFFECT repeatedly until “CTR TONE” appears on the display. The display shows the current setting. 2) Press CONTROL UP 5/DOWN ∞ to select the center tone level you want. The center tone adjustment affects the mid-frequency range, which the human voice is mostly made up of. • Each time you press the button, the display changes to show the following: CTR TONE 1 To make the dialogue softer, select “CTR TONE 1” or “CTR TONE 2.” To make the dialogue clearer, select “CTR TONE 4” or “CTR TONE 5.” When “CTR TONE 3” is selected, no adjustment is applied. Adjusting the DAP Modes (Softer) CTR TONE 5 (Sharper) CTR TONE 2 (Soft) EFFECT SETT CONTROL DOWN UP CTR TONE 3 (Flat) CTR TONE 4 (Sharp) To make the dialogue softer, select “CTR TONE 1” or “CTR TONE 2.” To make the dialogue clearer, select “CTR TONE 4” or “CTR TONE 5.” When “CTR TONE 3” is selected, no adjustment is applied. You can also use a DAP mode with a Surround mode (see page 30). Before you start, remember... • Make sure that you have set the speaker information correctly (see page 17). • There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is canceled before you finish, start from step 2 again. • You cannot adjust the rear speaker output level when you have set “REAR SPK” to “NONE.” See page 17. • You cannot adjust the center speaker output level when you have set “CTR SPK” to “NONE.” See page 17. • To adjust the front speaker output balance and subwoofer output level, see pages 16 and 17. Continued to the next page. 28 EN24_35.RX-8010V[J]_f 28 01.1.11, 9:09 PM 4. Adjust the overall levels of the effect. 1) Press EFFECT repeatedly until “EFFECT” appears on the display. The display shows the current setting. 2) Press CONTROL UP 5/DOWN ∞ to select the effect level you want. • Each time you press the button, the display changes to show the following: EFFECT 1 EFFECT 2 EFFECT SETT CONTROL DOWN UP EFFECT 3 1) Press EFFECT repeatedly until “ROOM SIZE” appears on the display. The display shows the current setting. 2) Press CONTROL UP 5/DOWN ∞ to select the room size you want. • Each time you press the button, the display changes to show the following: ROOMSIZE 5 EFFECT SETTIN CONTROL DOWN UP ROOMSIZE 3 4. Press LEVEL +/– to adjust the speaker output levels (–10 dB to +10 dB). + ∗BAL L ∗ CH/ LEVEL − 5. Press SOUND. ∗BAL R SOUND • To adjust other speaker output levels, repeat steps 3 and 4. 6. Press CTR TONE to select the center tone level you want. CTR TONE 5 ENTER CTR TONE 3 CTR TONE 2 CTR TONE 1 (Softer) (Soft) (Flat) CTR TONE 4 (Sharper) 6. Adjust the liveness. (Sharp) To make the dialogue softer, select “CTR TONE 1” or “CTR TONE 2.” To make the dialogue clearer, select “CTR TONE 4” or “CTR TONE 5.” When “CTR TONE 3” is selected, no adjustment is applied. EFFECT SETT 1) Press EFFECT repeatedly until “LIVENESS” appears on the display. The display shows the current setting. 2) Press CONTROL UP 5/DOWN ∞ to select the liveness level you want. • Each time you press the button, the display changes to show the following: 7. Press EFFECT to adjust the overall level of the effect. CONTROL DOWN UP EFFECT 1 LIVENESS 3 EFFECT 2 MENU • Each time you press the button, the effect level changes as follows: EFFECT 2 EFFECT 5 LIVENESS 5 100+ CTR TONE 5 ROOMSIZE 4 LIVENESS 2 +10 • Each time you press the button, the display changes to show the following: As the number increases, the interval between reflections increases so that you will feel as if you were in a larger room. (Normally set it to “ROOMSIZE 3.”) LIVENESS 1 ∗REAR R 0 FM MODE 5. Adjust the room size (sense of spaciousness). ROOMSIZE 2 ∗REAR L 9 As the number increases, the selected DAP effect becomes stronger. (Normally set it to “EFFECT 3.”) ROOMSIZE 1 • To select the center speaker level, press CENTER. “CTR” appears on the remote control display window. • To select the left rear speaker level, press REAR L. “REARL” appears on the remote control display window. • To select the right rear speaker level, press REAR R. “REARR” appears on the remote control display window. ∗CENTER EFFECT 4 EFFECT 5 3. Select the speaker you want to adjust. EFFECT 3 EFFECT 4 As the number increases, the selected DAP effect becomes stronger. (Normally set it to “EFFECT 3.”) LIVENESS 4 As the number increases, the attenuation level of reflections over time decreases so that acoustics change from “Dead” to “Live.” (Normally set it to “LIVENESS 3.”) From the remote control: 8. Press ROOM SIZE to adjust the room size (sense of spaciousness). ROOM SIZE 3 • Each time you press the button, the display changes to show the following: ROOMSIZE 1 ROOMSIZE 2 ROOMSIZE 3 DSP 1. Press DSP MODE repeatedly until the MODE DAP mode you want to adjust — THEATER 1, THEATER 2, HALL 1, HALL 2, LIVE CLUB, DANCE CLUB, or PAVILION — appears on the display. ROOMSIZE 5 The DSP MODE lamp on the front panel button lights up, and the DSP indicator also lights up on the display. • When you have set “REAR SPK” to “NONE,” the 3DPHONIC indicator also lights up. 2. Press SOUND. SOUND The 10 keys are activated for sound adjustments. 29 EN24_35.RX-8010V[J]_f 29 ROOMSIZE 4 As the number increases, the interval between reflections increases so that you will feel as if you were in a larger room. (Normally set it to “ROOMSIZE 3.”) 01.1.11, 9:09 PM 9. Press LIVENESS to adjust the liveness. • Each time you press the button, the display changes to show the following: LIVENESS 1 LIVENESS 2 LIVENESS 5 LIVENESS 6 LIVENESS 3 LIVENESS 4 5. Press TEST to check the speaker output balance. 4 MENU “TEST TONE L” starts flashing on the display, and a test tone comes out of the speakers in the following order: TEST TONE L As the number increases, the attenuation level of reflections over time decreases so that acoustics change from “Dead” to “Live.” (Normally set it to “LIVENESS 3.”) TEST TEST TONE R TEST TONE C (Left front speaker) (Right front speaker) (Center speaker) TEST TONE LS TEST TONE RS (Left rear speaker) (Right rear speaker) Notes: Adjusting the Surround Modes with the DAP Modes Before you start, remember... • Make sure that you have set the speaker information correctly (see page 17). • There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is canceled before you finish, start from step 4 again. • You cannot adjust the rear speaker output levels when you have set “REAR SPK” to “NONE.” See page 17. • You cannot adjust the center speaker output level and center tone when you have set “CTR SPK” to “NONE.” See page 17. • To adjust the front speaker output balance and subwoofer output level, see pages 16 and 17. From the remote control: D I G I T A L SURROUND ON/OFF DSP MODE ∗REAR R 0 +10 100+ FM MODE 7. Press LEVEL +/– to adjust the speaker output levels (–10 dB to +10 dB). + ∗BAL L ∗ CH/ LEVEL − 8. Press SOUND. ∗BAL R SOUND 9. Press TEST again to stop the test tone. 4 MENU CTR TONE 5 ENTER The center tone adjustment affects the midfrequency range, which the human voice is mostly made up of. • Each time you press the button, the display changes to show the following: CTR TONE 2 (Softer) SOUND TEST 10.Press CTR TONE to select the center tone level you want. CTR TONE 1 The DSP MODE lamp on the front panel button lights up, and the DSP indicator also lights up on the display. The 10 keys are activated for sound adjustments. ∗REAR L • To adjust other speaker output levels repeat steps 6 and 7. The SURROUND ON/OFF lamp on the front panel button lights up. • Each time you press the button, the Surround mode turns on and off alternately. • When “PRO LOGIC” is selected, the PRO LOGIC indicator lights up on the display. 4. Press SOUND. • To select the center speaker level, press CENTER. “CTR” appears on the remote control display window. • To select the left rear speaker level, press REAR L. “REARL” appears on the remote control display window. • To select the right rear speaker level, press REAR R. “REARR” appears on the remote control display window. 9 • To enjoy Dolby Pro Logic, play back a software encoded with DOLBY SURROUND mark. Dolby Surround and labeled with • To enjoy Dolby Digital, play back a software encoded with Dolby Digital and labeled with mark. • To enjoy DTS Digital Surround, play back a software encoded with DTS Digital Surround and labeled with mark. 3. Press DSP MODE repeatedly until the DAP mode you want to adjust — THEATER 1, THEATER 2, HALL 1, HALL 2, LIVE CLUB, DANCE CLUB, or PAVILION — appears on the display. 6. Select the speaker you want to adjust. ∗CENTER 1. Select and play a sound source. 2. Press SURROUND ON/OFF to activate an appropriate Surround mode — PRO LOGIC, DOLBY DIGITAL or DTS SURROUND. • You can adjust the speaker output levels without outputting the test tone. • No test tone comes out of the center speaker when “CTR SPK” is set to “NONE” (see page 17). • No test tone comes out of the rear speakers when “REAR SPK” is set to “NONE” (see page 17). • If the TV is turned on and the proper video input is selected on the TV, the test tone screen will appear on the TV. CTR TONE 5 (Sharper) (Soft) CTR TONE 3 (Flat) CTR TONE 4 (Sharp) To make the dialogue softer, select “CTR TONE 1” or “CTR TONE 2.” To make the dialogue clearer, select “CTR TONE 4” or “CTR TONE 5.” When “CTR TONE 3” is selected, no adjustment is applied. Continued to the next page. 30 EN24_35.RX-8010V[J]_f 30 01.1.11, 9:09 PM 11.Press EFFECT to adjust the overall level of the effect. EFFECT 2 MENU • Each time you press the button, the effect level changes as follows: EFFECT 1 EFFECT 2 EFFECT 5 EFFECT 3 EFFECT 4 As the number increases, DAP effect becomes stronger. (Normally set it to “EFFECT 3.”) 12.Press ROOM SIZE to adjust the room size (sense of spaciousness). ROOM SIZE 3 • Each time you press the button, the display changes to show the following: ROOMSIZE 1 ROOMSIZE 2 ROOMSIZE 5 ROOMSIZE 3 ROOMSIZE 4 As the number increases, the interval between reflections increases so that you will feel as if you were in a larger room. (Normally set it to “ROOMSIZE 3.”) 13.Press LIVENESS to adjust the liveness. LIVENESS 6 • Each time you press the button, the display changes to show the following: LIVENESS 1 LIVENESS 2 LIVENESS 5 LIVENESS 3 As the number increases, the attenuation level of reflections over time decreases so that acoustics change from “Dead” to “Live.” (Normally set it to “LIVENESS 3.”) On the front panel: You can also use the buttons on the front panel to adjust the sound with a Surround mode and a DAP mode. However, no test tone is available when using the buttons on the front panel. So, make adjustments while listening to the sound of the source played back. 1. Select and play a sound source. • To enjoy Dolby Pro Logic, play back a software encoded with DOLBY SURROUND mark. Dolby Surround and labeled with • To enjoy Dolby Digital, play back a software encoded with Dolby Digital and labeled with mark. • To enjoy DTS Digital Surround, play back a software encoded with DTS Digital Surround and labeled with mark. D I G I T A L SURROUND ON/OFF The SURROUND ON/OFF lamp on the front panel button lights up. • Each time you press the button, the Surround mode turns on and off alternately. • When “PRO LOGIC” is selected, the PRO LOGIC indicator lights up on the display. The DSP MODE lamp on the front panel button lights up, and the DSP indicator also lights up on the display. 4. Adjust the speaker output levels. 1) Press LEVEL ADJUST repeatedly until one of the following indications appears on the display. “CENTER”: To adjust the center speaker level. “REAR L”: To adjust the left rear speaker level. “REAR R”: To adjust the right rear speaker level. 31 AL 2) Press CONTROL UP 5/DOWN ∞ to adjust the selected speaker output level (from –10 dB to +10 dB). 3) Repeat 1) and 2) to adjust the other speaker output levels. EFFECT SETTIN (Softer) CONTROL DOWN UP CTR TONE 3 CTR TONE 2 CTR TONE 1 LEVEL ADJUST CONTROL DOWN UP 1) Press EFFECT repeatedly until “CTR TONE” appears on the display. The display shows the current setting. 2) Press CONTROL UP 5/DOWN ∞ to select the center tone level you want. • Each time you press the button, the display changes to show the following: (Soft) CTR TONE 5 (Flat) CTR TONE 4 (Sharper) (Sharp) To make the dialogue softer, select “CTR TONE 1” or “CTR TONE 2.” To make the dialogue clearer, select “CTR TONE 4” or “CTR TONE 5.” When “CTR TONE 3” is selected, no adjustment is applied. 6. Adjust the overall levels of the effect. 1) Press EFFECT repeatedly until “EFFECT” appears on the display. The display shows the current setting. 2) Press CONTROL UP 5/DOWN ∞ to select the effect level you want. • Each time you press the button, the display changes to show the following: EFFECT 1 EFFECT 2 EFFECT 5 EFFECT SETT CONTROL DOWN UP EFFECT 3 EFFECT 4 As the number increases, DAP effect becomes stronger. (Normally set it to “EFFECT 3.”) 31 EN24_35.RX-8010V[J]_f DSP MODE 5. Adjust the center tone. LIVENESS 4 2. Press SURROUND ON/OFF to activate an appropriate Surround mode — PRO LOGIC, DOLBY DIGITAL or DTS SURROUND. 3. Press DSP MODE repeatedly until the DAP mode you want to adjust — THEATER 1, THEATER 2, HALL 1, HALL 2, LIVE CLUB, DANCE CLUB, or PAVILION — appears on the display. 01.1.11, 9:09 PM 7. Adjust the room size (sense of spaciousness). 1) Press EFFECT repeatedly until “ROOM SIZE” appears on the display. The display shows the current setting. 2) Press CONTROL UP 5/DOWN ∞ to select the room size you want. • Each time you press the button, the display changes to show the following: ROOMSIZE 1 ROOMSIZE 2 ROOMSIZE 5 EFFECT SETTIN CONTROL DOWN UP ROOMSIZE 3 ROOMSIZE 4 As the number increases, the interval between reflections increases so that you will feel as if you were in a larger room. (Normally set it to “ROOMSIZE 3.”) 8. Adjust the liveness. EFFECT SETT 1) Press EFFECT repeatedly until “LIVENESS” appears on the display. The display shows the current setting. 2) Press CONTROL UP 5/DOWN ∞ to select the liveness level you want. • Each time you press the button, the display changes to show the following: LIVENESS 1 LIVENESS 2 LIVENESS 5 CONTROL DOWN UP LIVENESS 3 LIVENESS 4 As the number increases, the attenuation level of reflections over time decreases so that acoustics change from “Dead” to “Live.” (Normally set it to “LIVENESS 3.”) Adjusting the 5 CH/4 CH Stereo Mode Before you start, remember... • Make sure that you have set the speaker information correctly (see page 17). • There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is canceled before you finish, start from step 2 again. • You cannot adjust the center speaker output level and select the center tone level for 4 CH Stereo mode. • To adjust the front speaker output balance and subwoofer output level, see pages 16 and 17. On the front panel: 1. Press DSP MODE repeatedly until “5CH STEREO” or “4CH STEREO” appears on the display. DSP MODE The DSP MODE lamp on the front panel button lights up, and the DSP indicator also lights up on the display. • “4CH STEREO” appears on the display when you have set “CTR SPK” to “NONE” (see page 17). 2. Adjust the speaker output levels. 1) Press LEVEL ADJUST repeatedly until one of the following indications appears on the display. “CENTER” — for 5 CH Stereo mode only: To adjust the center speaker level. “REAR L”: To adjust the left rear speaker level. “REAR R”: To adjust the right rear speaker level. 2) Press CONTROL UP 5/DOWN ∞ to adjust the selected speaker output level (from –10 dB to +10 dB). 3) Repeat 1) and 2) to adjust the other speaker output levels. TAL Q LEVEL ADJUST CONTROL DOWN UP 3. Adjust the center tone — for 5 CH Stereo mode only. EFFECT SETT 1) Press EFFECT repeatedly until “CTR TONE” appears on the display. The display shows the current setting. 2) Press CONTROL UP 5/DOWN ∞ to select the center tone level you want. The center tone adjustment affects the mid-frequency range, which the human voice is mostly made up of. • Each time you press the button, the display changes to show the following: CTR TONE 1 CTR TONE 3 CTR TONE 2 (Softer) CONTROL DOWN UP (Soft) CTR TONE 5 (Flat) CTR TONE 4 (Sharper) (Sharp) To make the dialogue softer, select “CTR TONE 1” or “CTR TONE 2.” To make the dialogue clearer, select “CTR TONE 4” or “CTR TONE 5.” When “CTR TONE 3” is selected, no adjustment is applied. From the remote control: 1. Press DSP MODE repeatedly until “5CH STEREO” or “4CH STEREO” appears on the display. DSP MODE The DSP MODE lamp on the front panel button lights up, and the DSP indicator also lights up on the display. • “4CH STEREO” appears on the display when you have set “CTR SPK” to “NONE” (see page 17). SOUND 2. Press SOUND. The 10 keys are activated for sound adjustments. 3. Select the speaker you want to adjust. • To select the center speaker level, press CENTER— for 5 CH Stereo mode only. “CTR” appears on the remote control display window. • To select the left rear speaker level, press REAR L. “REARL” appears on the remote control display window. • To select the right rear speaker level, press REAR R. “REARR” appears on the remote control display window. ∗CENTER 9 ∗REAR L ∗REAR R FM MODE 100+ 0 +10 Continued to the next page. 32 EN24_35.RX-8010V[J]_f 32 01.1.11, 9:09 PM + 4. Press LEVEL +/– to adjust the speaker output levels (–10 dB to +10 dB). ∗BAL L ∗ CH/ LEVEL − 5. Press SOUND. ∗BAL R SOUND • To adjust other speaker output levels, repeat steps 3 and 4. 6. Press CTR TONE to select the center tone level you want — for 5 CH Stereo mode only. CTR TONE 5 CTR TONE 2 (Softer) (Soft) CTR TONE 5 CTR TONE 3 On the front panel: 1. Press DSP MODE repeatedly until “3D ACTION” or “3D DIGITAL” appears on the display. DSP MODE The DSP MODE lamp on the front panel button lights up, and the 3D-PHONIC and DSP indicators also light up on the display. (Flat) CTR TONE 4 (Sharper) Before you start, remember... • Make sure that you have set the speaker information correctly (see page 17). • There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is canceled before you finish, start from step 2 again. • You cannot adjust the center speaker output level when you have set “CTR SPK” to “NONE” See page 17. • To adjust the front speaker output balance and subwoofer output level, see pages 16 and 17. ENTER The center tone adjustment affects the midfrequency range, which the human voice is mostly made up of. • Each time you press the button, the display changes to show the following: CTR TONE 1 Adjusting the 3D-PHONIC Modes (Sharp) To make the dialogue softer, select “CTR TONE 1” or “CTR TONE 2.” To make the dialogue clearer, select “CTR TONE 3” or “CTR TONE 4.” When “CTR TONE 3” is selected, no adjustment is applied. 2. Adjust the center speaker output level. 1) Press LEVEL ADJUST repeatedly until “CENTER” appears on the display. 2) Press CONTROL UP 5/DOWN ∞ to adjust the center speaker output level (from –10 dB to +10 dB). L LEVEL ADJUST CONTROL DOWN UP 3. Adjust the center tone. 1) Press EFFECT repeatedly until “CTR TONE” appears on the display. The display shows the current setting. 2) Press CONTROL UP 5/DOWN ∞ to select the center tone level you want. • Each time you press the button, the display changes to show the following: CTR TONE 1 (Softer) CTR TONE 5 (Sharper) CTR TONE 2 (Soft) EFFECT SETT CONTROL DOWN UP CTR TONE 3 (Flat) CTR TONE 4 (Sharp) To make the dialogue softer, select “CTR TONE 1” or “CTR TONE 2.” To make the dialogue clearer, select “CTR TONE 4” or “CTR TONE 5.” When “CTR TONE 3” is selected, no adjustment is applied. 33 EN24_35.RX-8010V[J]_f 33 01.1.11, 9:09 PM 4. Adjust the overall levels of the effect. 1) Press EFFECT repeatedly until “EFFECT” appears on the display. The display shows the current setting. 2) Press CONTROL UP 5/DOWN ∞ to select the effect level you want. • Each time you press the button, the display changes to show the following: EFFECT 1 EFFECT 2 EFFECT 5 EFFECT SETT 6. Press CTR TONE to select the center tone level you want. CTR TONE 5 ENTER • Each time you press the button, the display changes to show the following: CONTROL DOWN UP (Softer) (Soft) (Flat) CTR TONE 5 CTR TONE 4 (Sharper) EFFECT 3 EFFECT 4 As the number increases, the selected 3D effect mode becomes stronger. (Normally set it to “EFFECT 3.”) From the remote control: 1. Press DSP MODE repeatedly until “3D ACTION” or “3D DIGITAL” appears on the display. DSP MODE CTR TONE 3 CTR TONE 2 CTR TONE 1 (Sharp) To make the dialogue softer, select “CTR TONE 1” or “CTR TONE 2.” To make the dialogue clearer, select “CTR TONE 4” or “CTR TONE 5.” When “CTR TONE 3” is selected, no adjustment is applied. 7. Press EFFECT to adjust the overall level of the effect. EFFECT 2 MENU • Each time you press the button, the effect level changes as follows: The DSP MODE lamp on the front panel button lights up, and the 3D-PHONIC and DSP indicators also light up on the display. SOUND 2. Press SOUND. The 10 keys are activated for sound adjustments. EFFECT 1 EFFECT 2 EFFECT 5 EFFECT 3 EFFECT 4 As the number increases, 3D effect mode becomes stronger. (Normally set it to “EFFECT 3.”) ∗CENTER 3. Press CENTER to select the center speaker. 9 • “CTR” appears on the remote control display window. 4. Press LEVEL +/– to adjust the center speaker output levels (from –10 dB to +10 dB). + ∗BAL L ∗ CH/ LEVEL − ∗BAL R SOUND 5. Press SOUND. 34 EN24_35.RX-8010V[J]_f 34 01.1.11, 9:09 PM Using the DVD MULTI Playback Mode This receiver provides the DVD MULTI playback mode for reproducing the analog discrete output mode of the DVD player. Before playing back a DVD, refer also to the manual supplied with the DVD player. Activating the DVD MULTI Playback Mode You can adjust the DVD MULTI playback mode while playing back a DVD using the analog discrete output mode on the DVD player. Once you have made adjustments, the receiver memorizes the adjustments until you change them. You also need to set the DVD player to the analog discrete output mode. Before you start, remember... • There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is canceled before you finish, start from step 3 again. • To adjust the front speaker output balance and subwoofer output level, see pages 16 and 17. From the remote control: 1. Press DVD MULTI so that “DVD MULTI” appears on the display. DVD MUILTI The DVD MULTI lamp on the front panel button lights up. Note: When you select “DVD MULTI” as the source to play, the Surround and DSP modes are canceled, and the SURROUND ON/OFF and DSP MODE buttons do not work. 2. Select the analog discrete output mode on the DVD player, and start playing a DVD. • Refer to the manual supplied with the DVD player. On the front panel: 1. Press DVD MULTI so that “DVD MULTI” appears on the display. DVD MULTI The DVD MULTI lamp on the front panel button lights up. If you need to make any adjustment, go to the following steps. 3. Press SOUND. SOUND The 10 keys are activated for adjusting the sound. Note: When you select “DVD MULTI” as the source to play, the Surround and DSP modes are canceled, and the SURROUND ON/OFF and DSP MODE buttons do not work. 2. Select the analog discrete output mode on the DVD player, and start playing a DVD. • Refer to the manual supplied with the DVD player. If you need to make any adjustment, go to the following steps. 4. Select the speaker you want to adjust. • To select the center speaker level, press CENTER. “CTR” appears on the remote control display window. • To select the left rear speaker level, press REAR L. “REARL” appears on the remote control display window. • To select the right rear speaker level, press REAR R. “REARR” appears on the remote control display window. ∗CENTER 9 ∗REAR L ∗REAR R 0 +10 FM MODE 100+ 3. Adjust the speaker output levels. 1) Press LEVEL ADJUST repeatedly until one of the following indications appears on the display. “CENTER”: To adjust the center speaker level. “REAR L”: To adjust the left rear speaker level. “REAR R”: To adjust the right rear speaker level. 2) Press CONTROL UP 5/DOWN ∞ to adjust the selected speaker output level (from –10 dB to +10 dB). 3) Repeat 1) and 2) to adjust the other speaker output levels. AL LEVEL ADJUST 5. Press LEVEL +/– to adjust the speaker output levels (from –10 dB to +10 dB). • You cannot adjust the center tone level. • You cannot use the midnight mode for DVD MULTI playback mode (see page 13). • When using a pair of headphones, the sounds of front left and right are output from the headphones. 35 35 ∗ − • To adjust other speaker output levels, then repeat steps 4 and 5. CONTROL DOWN UP 01.1.11, 9:09 PM ∗BAL L CH/ LEVEL 6. Press SOUND. Notes: EN24_35.RX-8010V[J]_f + ∗BAL R SOUND Using the On-Screen Menus You can use the Menus on the TV screen to control the receiver. To use this function, you need to connect the TV to the MONITOR OUT jack on the rear panel (see page 7), and set the TV’s input mode to the proper position to which the receiver is connected. • When the TV’s input mode is incorrect; for example, a different video input or TV tuner mode is selected, you cannot show the Menus on the TV screen. On-Screen Operation buttons (on the remote control) Activating the Surround Modes (Also see page 27) 1. Press MENU. CATV/DBS POWER VCR 1 TV AUDIO POWER POWER POWER DVD DVD MUILTI CD FM/AM TV/DBS VIDEO CDR PHONO VCR 1 VCR 2 TAPE/MD USB SURROUND DSP ON/OFF MODE INPUT EFFECT 1 2 TEST CTR TONE 4 MUTING 3 ∗ LIVENESS 5 SUBWFR 7/P ∗ 6 ENTER L/R BAL 8 ∗ CENTER 9 ∗DIGITALEQ ∗REAR L ∗REAR R 10 0 +10 RETURN FM MODE 100+ CATV/DBS CONTROL TV/VIDEO ROOM SIZE MENU MIDNIGHT MODE + ∗BAL L ∗ + CH/ LEVEL TV VOL − ∗BAL R MENU TEXT DISPLAY /REW − PLAY MENU EXIT + VOLUME PLAY PAUSE − /REW EXIT PAUSE FF/ SET FF/ SET REC PAUSE 2. Press 5 / ∞ to move to “SURROUND.” 3. Press 2 / 3 to select the Surround mode you want to use. ANALOG/DIGITAL SLEEP BASS LINE DIF.ECT BOOST SOUND When you press MENU, “MENU” appears on the display window for about 10 seconds. The MENU appears on the TV. • Pressing one of the 5 / ∞ / 2 / 3 buttons also displays the MENU. DOWN – TUNING – UP DOWN – TUNING – UP STOP CONTROL RM-SRX8010J STOP A/V CONTROL RECEIVER 4. When you finish, press EXIT. The menu disappears from the TV. Activating the DSP Modes (Also see page 28) 1. Press MENU. The MENU appears on the TV. • Pressing one of the 5 / ∞ / 2 / 3 buttons also displays the MENU. 2. Press 5 / ∞ to move to “DSP MODE.” Showing the MENU on the TV Screen Press MENU. The MENU appears on the TV. • Pressing one of the 5 / ∞ / 2 / 3 buttons also displays the MENU. 3. Press 2 / 3 to select the DSP mode you want to use. 4. When you finish, press EXIT. The menu disappears from the TV. Note Use 5 / ∞ to move up and down, and 2 / 3 to select, adjust or set the item. If “DVD MULTI” is selected as a playing source, the “SURROUND MODE” and “DSP MODE” do not appear on the display. Selecting the Analog or Digital Input Mode (Also see page 20) This selection is only possible when the digital input (DIGITAL IN) terminal setting has been correctly done for the digital source currently selected (see page 19). Notes: • “INPUT” appears only when the digital input (DIGITAL IN) terminal setting has been correctly done for the digital source currently selected. (See page 19.) • The on-screen display will disappear if no operation is done for about 1 minute. • The on-screen display is shown in black and white. 1. Press MENU. The MENU appears on the TV. • Pressing one of the 5 / ∞ / 2 / 3 buttons also displays the MENU. 2. Press 5 / ∞ to move to “INPUT.” 3. Press 2 / 3 to select the analog or digital input mode you want. 4. When you finish, press EXIT. The menu disappears from the TV. 36 EN36_46.RX-8010V[J]_f 36 01.1.11, 9:10 PM For Surround mode, Surround mode with DAP mode: “TEST TONE”: Output a test tone. “L/R BALANCE”: Adjust the right and left balance of the front speakers. “CENTER LEVEL”: Adjust the center speaker output level. * “REAR L LEVEL”: Adjust the left rear speaker output level. ** “REAR R LEVEL”: Adjust the right rear speaker output level. ** “SUBWFR LEVEL”: Adjust the subwoofer output level. *** For DAP mode: “L/R BALANCE”: Adjust the right and left balance of the front speakers. “CENTER LEVEL”: Adjust the center speaker output level. * “REAR L LEVEL”: Adjust the left rear speaker output level. ** “REAR R LEVEL”: Adjust the right rear speaker output level. ** “SUBWFR LEVEL”: Adjust the subwoofer output level. *** Adjusting the Equalization Pattern (Also see page 15) 1. Press MENU. The MENU appears on the TV. • Pressing one of the 5 / ∞ / 2 / 3 buttons also displays the MENU. 2. Press 5 / ∞ to move to “SOUND CONTROL,” then press 2 / 3. The SOUND CONTROL menu appears. 3. Press 5 / ∞ to move to “DIGITAL EQ,” then press 2 / 3. The DIGITAL EQ menu appears. 4. Press 5 / ∞ to move to the frequency you want to adjust. 5. Press 2 / 3 to adjust the frequency level you want. The frequency level changes by 2 dB from –8 dB to +8 dB. For 5 CH/4 CH Stereo mode: “L/R BALANCE”: Adjust the right and left balance of the front speakers. “CENTER LEVEL”: Adjust the center speaker output level. **** “REAR L LEVEL”: Adjust the left rear speaker output level. ** “REAR R LEVEL”: Adjust the right rear speaker output level. ** “SUBWFR LEVEL”: Adjust the subwoofer output level. *** 6. When you finish, press EXIT repeatedly until the menu disappears from the TV. Adjusting the Surround and DSP Modes (Also see pages 27 – 34) You can use a Surround mode with a DAP mode, but not with the 5 CH/4 CH Stereo mode and 3D PHONIC mode. 1. Press MENU. For 3D-PHONIC mode: “L/R BALANCE”: Adjust the right and left balance of the front speakers. “CENTER LEVEL”: Adjust the center speaker output level. * “SUBWFR LEVEL”: Adjust the subwoofer output level.*** The MENU appears on the TV. • Pressing one of the 5 / ∞ / 2 / 3 buttons also displays the MENU. 2. Select Surround mode and/or DSP mode you like to adjust (see page 36). 3. Press 5 / ∞ to move to “SOUND CONTROL,” then press 2 / 3. For Surround off and DSP OFF: “L/R BALANCE”: Adjust the right and left balance of the front speakers. “SUBWFR LEVEL”: Adjust the subwoofer output level.*** The SOUND CONTROL menu appears. 4. Press 5 / ∞ to move to “LEVEL ADJUST,” then press 2 / 3. Notes: You cannot select “CENTER LEVEL” when “CTR SPK” is set to “NONE” (see page 17). ** You cannot select “REAR L LEVEL” and “REAR R LEVEL” when “REAR SPK” is set to “NONE” (see page 17). *** You cannot select “SUBWFR LEVEL” when “SUBWOOFER” is set to “NO” (see page 17). **** You cannot select “CENTER LEVEL” when 4 CH Stereo mode is selected. * The LEVEL ADJUST menu appears. 5. Press 5 / ∞ to move to the item you want to set or adjust, then press 2 / 3. On these adjustment menus, you can do the followings: 6. Press EXIT once. 37 EN36_46.RX-8010V[J]_f 37 01.1.11, 9:10 PM 7. Press 5 / ∞ to move to “EFFECT ADJUST,” then press 2 / 3. 5. Press 5 / ∞ to move to the item you want to set or adjust, then press 2 / 3. On this adjustment menu, you can do the following: “L/R BALANCE”: Adjust the right and left balance of the front speakers. “CENTER LEVEL”: Adjust the center speaker output level. “REAR L LEVEL”: Adjust the left rear speaker output level. “REAR R LEVEL”: Adjust the right rear speaker output level. “SUBWFR LEVEL”: Adjust the subwoofer output level. The EFFECT ADJUST menu appears. 8. Press 5 / ∞ to move to the item you want to set or adjust, then press 2 / 3. On these adjustment menus, you can do the followings. 6. When you finish, press EXIT repeatedly until the menu disappears from the TV. For Surround mode: “CENTER TONE”: Select the center tone level. * For DAP mode, Surround mode with DAP: “EFFECT LEVEL”: Adjust the surround effect level. “ROOM SIZE”: Adjust the room size effect. “LIVENESS”: Adjust the liveness level. “CENTER TONE”: Select the center tone level. * For 3D-PHONIC mode: “EFFECT LEVEL”: Adjust the surround effect level. “CENTER TONE”: Select the center tone level. * Note: * You cannot select “EFFECT ADJUST” in step 7, when both of the Surround and DSP modes are deactivated. You cannot select “CENTER TONE” when “CTR SPK” is set to “NONE” (see page 17). 9. When you finish, press EXIT repeatedly until the menu disappears from the TV. Adjusting the DVD MULTI Playback Mode (Also see page 35) The MENU appears on the TV. • Pressing one of the 5 / ∞ / 2 / 3 buttons also displays the MENU. The SOUND CONTROL menu appears. 3. Press 5 / ∞ to move to “MIDNIGHT MODE.” 4. Press 2 / 3 to select the mode you want to use. 5. When you finish, press EXIT repeatedly until the menu disappears from the TV. Attenuating the Input Signal (Also see page 14) 1. Press MENU. The MENU appears on the TV. • Pressing one of the 5 / ∞ / 2 / 3 buttons also displays the MENU. 1. Select DVD MULTI as the playing source. Press DVD MULTI. 2. Press MENU. The MENU appears on the TV. • Pressing one of the 5 / ∞ / 2 / 3 buttons also displays the MENU. 3. Press 5 / ∞ to move to “SOUND CONTROL,” then press 2 / 3. 2. Press 5 / ∞ to move to “SOUND CONTROL,” then press 2 / 3. The SOUND CONTROL menu appears. 3. Press 5 / ∞ to move to “INPUT ATT.” The SOUND CONTROL menu appears. 4. Press 5 / ∞ to move to “LEVEL ADJUST,” then press 2 / 3. 1. Press MENU. 2. Press 5 / ∞ to move to “SOUND CONTROL,” then press 2 / 3. For 5 CH Stereo mode: “CENTER TONE”: Select the center tone level. • Listening at Night — Midnight Mode (Also see page 13) 4. Press 2 / 3 to select the Input Attenuator mode “ATT ON” or “NORMAL.” The LEVEL ADJUST menu appears. 5. When you finish, press EXIT repeatedly until the menu disappears from the TV. 38 EN36_46.RX-8010V[J]_f 38 01.1.11, 9:10 PM Selecting the Line Direct Function (Also see page 14) Operating the Tuner (Also see pages 22 and 23) 1. Select FM or AM as the playing source. 1. Press MENU. Press FM/AM. The MENU appears on the TV. • Pressing one of the 5 / ∞ / 2 / 3 buttons also displays the MENU. 2. Press 5 / ∞ to move to “SOUND CONTROL,” then press 2 / 3. The SOUND CONTROL menu appears. 3. Press 5 / ∞ to move to “LINE DIRECT.” 4. Press 2 / 3 to turn the line direct function “ON” or “OFF.” Selecting the Bass Boost Function (Also see page 14) 1. Press MENU. The MENU appears on the TV. • Pressing one of the 5 / ∞ / 2 / 3 buttons also displays the MENU. 2. Press 5 / ∞ to move to “SOUND CONTROL,” then press 2 / 3. 3. Press 5 / ∞ to move to “TUNER CONTROL,” then press 2 / 3. 4. Press 5 / ∞ to move to the item you want to set or adjust, then press 2 / 3. On the TUNER CONTROL menu, you can do the following: “BAND”: Select the band. “PRESET CH”: Select a preset channel station. “FREQUENCY”: Tune in a station manually. “FM MODE”: Select the FM reception mode.* “PRESET MEMORY”: See “Storing the Preset Stations.” * Not displayed when an AM station is selected. 3. Press 5 / ∞ to move to “BASS BOOST.” 5. When you finish, press EXIT repeatedly until the menu disappears from the TV. Storing the Preset Stations (Also see page 22) 1. Press MENU. The MENU appears on the TV. • Pressing one of the 5 / ∞ / 2 / 3 buttons also displays the MENU. 5. When you finish, press EXIT repeatedly until the menu disappears from the TV. 2. Press 5 / ∞ to move to “TUNER CONTROL,” then press 2 / 3. Activating the Subwoofer Sound (Also see page 14) The TUNER CONTROL menu appears. 3. Tune into a station on the TUNER CONTROL menu, referring to “Operating the Tuner”. 1. Press MENU. The MENU appears on the TV. • Pressing one of the 5 / ∞ / 2 / 3 buttons also displays the MENU. 2. Press 5 / ∞ to move to “SOUND CONTROL,” then press 2 / 3. 4. Press 5 / ∞ to move to “PRESET MEMORY,” then press 2 / 3. moves to “PRESET CH” and the channel number starts flashing. The SOUND CONTROL menu appears. 3. Press 5 / ∞ to move to “SUBWOOFER.” 5. When you finish, press EXIT repeatedly until the menu disappears from the TV. 39 5. Press 2 / 3 to select a preset station number you want. 6. Press SET to store the setting. The selected channel number stops flashing. 7. When you finish, press EXIT repeatedly until the menu disappears from the TV. 39 EN36_46.RX-8010V[J]_f Note: The SOUND CONTROL menu appears. 4. Press 2 / 3 to turn the subwoofer output “ON” or “OFF.” The MENU appears on the TV. • Pressing one of the 5 / ∞ / 2 / 3 buttons also displays the MENU. The TUNER CONTROL menu appears. 5. When you finish, press EXIT repeatedly until the menu disappears from the TV. 4. Press 2 / 3 to turn the bass boost function “ON” or “OFF.” 2. Press MENU. 01.1.11, 9:10 PM SETTING 2 menu “DIGITAL 1/2/3/4”: Set the digital input terminal 1/2/3/4 (see page 19). “VIDEO DVD”: Set the video input terminal for the DVD player (see page 16). “VIDEO DBS”: Set the video input terminal for the DBS tuner (see page 16). “LFE ATT”: Set the low frequency effect attenuator level (see page 19). “FL DISPLAY”: Shows the disc text information on the display (see page 21). Setting the Basic Setting Items (Also see pages 16 – 21) 1. Press MENU. The MENU appears on the TV. • Pressing one of the 5 / ∞ / 2 / 3 buttons also displays the MENU. 2. Press 5 / ∞ to move to “SETTING,” then press 2 / 3. The SETTING 1 appears. 3. Press 5 / ∞ to move to the item you want to set or adjust, then press 2 / 3. • To go to the SETTING 2 to “NEXT menu, move PAGE,” then press 2 / 3. • To go back to the SETTING 1 menu, move to “PREVIOUS PAGE,” then press 2 / 3. Notes: * You cannot select “CNTR DELAY” when “CTR SPK” is set to “NONE” (see page 17). ** You cannot select “REAR DELAY” when “REAR SPK” is set to “NONE” (see page 17). 4. When you finish, press EXIT repeatedly until the menu disappears from the TV. On the SETTING 1 and 2 menus, you can do the following: SETTING 1 menu “SUBWOOFER”: Set the subwoofer information (see page 17). “FRONT SPK”: Set the front speaker information (see page 17). “CENTER SPK”: Set the center speaker information (see page 17). “REAR SPK”: Set the rear speaker information (see page 17). “CNTR DELAY”: Adjust the delay time of the center speaker output (see page 18). * “REAR DELAY”: Adjust the delay time of the rear speaker output (see page 18). ** “CROSSOVER”: Set the crossover frequency (see page 18). “ONE TOUCH OPR”: Set the one touch operation (see page 21). 40 EN36_46.RX-8010V[J]_f 40 01.1.11, 9:10 PM COMPU LINK Remote Control System The COMPU LINK remote control system allows you to operate JVC audio components through the remote sensor on the receiver. To use this remote control system, you need to connect JVC audio components through the COMPU LINK (SYNCHRO) jacks (see below) in addition to the connections using cables with RCA pin plugs (see pages 5 and 6). • Make sure that the AC power cords of these components are unplugged before connection. Plug the AC power cords only after all connections are complete. Automatic Source Selection When you press the play (3 3) button on a connected component or on its own remote control, the receiver automatically turns on and changes the source to the component. On the other hand, if you select a new source on the receiver or on the remote control, the selected component begins playing immediately. In both cases, the previously selected source continues playing without sound for a few seconds. CD player Automatic Power On/Off (Standby): only possible with the COMPU LINK-3 and COMPU LINK--4 connection CD recorder The connected components turn on and off (standby) along with the receiver. When you turn on the receiver, one of the connected components will turn on automatically, depending on which component has been previously selected. When you turn off the receiver, the connected components will turn off (standby). Cassette deck or MD recorder COMPU LINK – 4 (SYNCHRO) Turntable Synchronized Recording Synchronized recording means the cassette deck (or MD recorder) starts recording as soon as a CD or a record begins playing. To use synchronized recording, follow these steps: 1. Put a tape in the cassette deck (or an MD in the MD recorder), and a disc in the CD player (or a record on the turntable). Notes: • There are four versions of COMPU LINK remote control system. This receiver is equipped with the fourth version — COMPU LINK4. This version is added systematic operations with the CD recorder to the previous version — COMPU LINK-3. • If your audio component has two COMPU LINK jacks, you can use either one. If it has only one COMPU LINK jack, connect it so that it is the last item in the series of components. (For example, the turntable or CD player in the diagram above.) • To operate the cassette deck or MD recorder using the COMPU LINK remote control system, set the source name correctly. (See page 16.) • Refer also to the manuals supplied with your audio components. This remote control system allows you to use four functions listed below. 2. Press the record (¶) button and the pause (8) button on the cassette deck (or MD recorder) at the same time. This puts the cassette deck (or MD recorder) into recording pause. If you do not press the record (¶) button and pause (8) button at the same time, the synchronized recording feature will not operate. 3. Press the play (3) button on the CD player or on the turntable. The source changes on the receiver, and as soon as play starts, the cassette deck (or MD recorder) starts recording. When the play ends, the cassette deck (or MD recorder) enters recording pause, and stops about 4 seconds later. Notes: Remote Control through the Remote Sensor on the Receiver You can control the connected audio components through the remote sensor on the receiver using this remote control. Aim the remote control directly at the remote sensor on the receiver. For details, see pages 49 and 50. • During synchronized recording, the selected source cannot be changed. • If the power of any component is shut off during synchronized recording, the COMPU LINK remote control system may not operate properly. In this case, you must start again from the beginning. 41 EN36_46.RX-8010V[J]_f 41 01.1.11, 9:10 PM TEXT COMPU LINK Remote Control System The TEXT COMPU LINK remote control system has been developed to deal with the disc information recorded in the CD Text* and MDs. Using these information in the discs, you can operate the CD player or MD recorder equipped with the TEXT COMPU LINK remote control system through the receiver. CONNECTIONS: FUNCTIONS: To use this remote control system, you need to connect the CD player and/or MD recorder you want to operate, following the procedures below. 1. If you have already plugged your CD player, MD recorder, and this receiver into the AC outlets, unplug their AC power cords first. 2. Connect your CD player, MD recorder, and this receiver as follows, through the COMPU LINK jacks and TEXT COMPU LINK jacks. This remote control system allows you to use the functions listed below. Displaying the Disc Information on the TV screen Disc information such as its performer and disc title (and track titles only when a CD Text is selected) is shown on the TV screen. Disc Search: Only for CD Player This remote control system can allow you to search for discs by the performer, disc title, and music genre. With this disc search, you can easily find the disc you want to play. Disc Title Input: 1) COMPU LINK jacks: Use the cables with the monaural mini-plugs (not supplied with this receiver). CD player MD recorder If your CD player or MD recorder has the disc memory function, you can input the following information about the normal audio CDs or MDs on the TV screen. • For CDs: Performer, disc title, and music genre • For MDs: Disc title and song titles *What is a CD Text? In a CD Text, some information about the disc (its disc title, performer, composer, arranger, etc.) is recorded. COMPU LINK – 4 (SYNCHRO) 2) TEXT COMPU LINK jacks: Use the cables with the stereo mini-plugs (not supplied with this receiver). CD player MD recorder TEXT COMPU LINK 3. Connect your CD player, MD recorder and this receiver, using the cables with RCA pin plugs (see pages 5 and 6). 4. Plug the AC power cords of these components above into the AC outlets. 5. When turning on these components for the first time, turn on the connected components first, then turn on this receiver. Notes: • If your audio component has two COMPU LINK jacks, you can use either one. If it has only one COMPU LINK jack, connect it so that it is the last item in the series of components. (For example, the CD player in the diagram in the left column.) • If your audio component has two TEXT COMPU LINK jacks, you can use either one. If it has only one TEXT COMPU LINK jack, connect it so that it is the last item in the series of components. (For example, the CD player in the diagram in the left column.) • “TEXT COMPULINK SOURCE NOT CONNECTED” appears on the display in the following cases: – When the connections explained in the left column are not correctly done. – When you try to use the TEXT COMPULINK function a few seconds after you turn on the connected equipment. This is not a malfunction of the units. • Refer also to the manuals supplied with your CD player or MD recorder. IMPORTANT: If you turn on the receiver before turning on the other components after connecting the components, the TEXT COMPU LINK remote control system does not work correctly. If this happens: 1. Turn off all the components including this receiver. 2. Turn on the connected components. 3. Turn on this receiver. 42 EN36_46.RX-8010V[J]_f 42 01.1.11, 9:10 PM OPERATIONS: To use this remote control system, you need to connect the TV to the MONITOR OUT jack on the rear panel (see page 7), and set the TV’s input mode to the proper position to which the receiver is connected. Make sure you have connected the CD player or MD recorder equipped with the TEXT COMPU LINK remote control system. If not, you cannot use the following functions. On-Screen Operation buttons (on the remote control) CATV/DBS POWER VCR 1 TV AUDIO POWER POWER POWER DVD DVD MUILTI CD FM/AM TV/DBS VIDEO CDR PHONO VCR 1 VCR 2 TAPE/MD USB SURROUND DSP ON/OFF MODE LINE DIF.ECT BASS BOOST When you press TEXT DISPLAY, “MENU” appears on the display window for about 10 seconds. ANALOG/DIGITAL SLEEP INPUT ROOM SIZE EFFECT 1 2 TEST CTR TONE 4 5 3 MENU MIDNIGHT MODE LIVENESS 6 ENTER SOUND ∗SUBWFR ∗L/R BAL ∗CENTER 8 7/P MUTING ∗ DIGITAL EQ 10 0 RETURN FM MODE CATV/DBS CONTROL TV/VIDEO ∗ REAR L + ∗BAL L ∗ + CH/ LEVEL TV VOL − ∗BAL R MENU TEXT DISPLAY /REW − PLAY PAUSE 9 ∗ REAR R +10 PLAY 100+ Note on 7: EXIT + The following information will appear on the display: • For CD Texts — Disc title, Performer, Genre, Song writer, Composer, Arranger, Message Only recorded information will be shown. If there is no data, “NO DATA” will appear. • For MDs — Disc title If there is no data, “NO DATA” will appear. VOLUME − EXIT TEXT DISPLAY /REW PAUSE FF/ SET FF/ SET REC PAUSE 1 Source name: CD or MD or , then press SET to change the disc. 2 Select 3 Track numbers and track titles. • When you move to a track number, you can change the track information by pressing 2 / 3. Each time you press the button, track information alternates between its track title and its performer. (You can also start playing the track by pressing SET.) in front), then press SET to go to 4 Select this (move the DISC SEARCH screen (see page 44). in front), then press SET to go to 5 Select this (move the TITLE INPUT screen (see page 45). 6 This appears only when a CD Text is selected. 7 Disc information such as the disc title, performer, and music genre. in front), you can change the When this is selected ( disc information by pressing 2 / 3. Each time you press the button, disc information (see “Note on 7”) changes. or , then press SET to change the track. 8 Select 9 Usable buttons and their functions for the current selection. Indication here will be changed according to what is in front) on the screen. See “Note currently selected ( on 9.” DOWN – TUNING – UP DOWN – TUNING – UP STOP CONTROL RM-SRX8010J STOP A/V CONTROL RECEIVER Note on 9: For example, the SET button will be used to start play (PLAY), to go to the next screen (ENTER), and to determine the selection (ENTER). To exit from the Disc information screen: Press EXIT. Notes: Showing the Disc Information on the TV Screen Press TEXT DISPLAY while “CD” or “MD” is selected as the source. The Disc Information screen appears on the TV. • The on-screen display will disappear in the following cases: – if no operation is done for about 10 minutes. – if you do any operation other than explained in this section. • To control the MD recorder using the TEXT COMPU LINK remote control system, you have to change the source name shown on the display from “TAPE” to “MD.” (See page 16.) • Some special characters and marks cannot be displayed correctly. • The on-screen display is shown in black and white. 1 6 2 7 3 8 4 5 9 43 EN36_46.RX-8010V[J]_f 43 01.1.11, 9:10 PM Searching for a Disc (Only for the CD player) Search for a disc by its performer: 1. Press TEXT DISPLAY while “CD” is selected as the source. The Disc Information screen appears on the TV. 2. Press 5 / ∞ to move to “SEARCH,” then press SET. 1. Press TEXT DISPLAY while “CD” is selected as the source. The Disc Information screen appears on the TV. 2. Press 5 / ∞ to move to “SEARCH,” then press SET. The DISC SEARCH screen appears. The DISC SEARCH screen appears . 3. Press 5 / ∞ to move to “PERFORMER”, then press SET. Search for a disc by its disc title: 3. Press 5 / ∞ to move to “DISC TITLE,” then press SET. The DISC TITLE SEARCH screen appears. The PERFORMER SEARCH screen appears. 4. Press 5 / ∞ / 2 / 3 to move in front of the first character of the performer you want to search for, then press SET. To correct the incorrect entry, press 5 / ∞ / 2 / 3 to move in front of the correct character, then press SET. 4. Press 5 / ∞ / 2 / 3 to move in front of the first character of the disc title you want to search for, then press SET. To correct the incorrect entry, press 5 / ∞ / 2 / 3 to move in front of the correct character, then press SET. Note: Symbols such as @, # or $ cannot be available for search. Note: Symbols such as @, # or $ cannot be available for search. 5. Press SET again. Disc search starts, then the SEARCH RESULT screen, showing the performers, appears. 6. On the SEARCH RESULT screen, you can do the following: • Changing the indication of the disc information: Press 5 / to a searched disc, then press 2 / 3. Each time ∞ to move you press 2 / 3, the disc information alternates between its performer and its disc title. • Starting a disc play and going to the Disc Information screen (see page 43): Press 5 / ∞ to move to a searched disc, then press SET. • Showing unseen disc information (if more than 5 discs are listed as a result of the search): Press 5 / ∞ until they appear. • Going back to the PERFORMER SEARCH screen: Press EXIT. 5. Press SET again. Disc search starts, then the SEARCH RESULT screen, showing the disc titles, appears. 6. On the SEARCH RESULT screen, you can do the following: • Changing the indication of the disc information: Press 5 / to a searched disc, then press 2 / 3. Each time ∞ to move you press 2 / 3, the disc information alternates between its disc title and its performer. • Starting a disc play and going to the Disc Information screen (see page 43): Press 5 / ∞ to move to a searched disc, then press SET. • Showing unseen disc information (if more than 5 discs are listed as a result of the search): Press 5 / ∞ until they appear. • Going back to the DISC TITLE SEARCH screen: Press EXIT. 44 EN36_46.RX-8010V[J]_f 44 01.1.11, 9:10 PM Search for a disc by its genre: Entering the Disc Information 1. Press TEXT DISPLAY while “CD” is selected as the source. The Disc Information screen appears on the TV. 2. Press 5 / ∞ to move to “SEARCH,” then press SET. The DISC SEARCH screen appears. 3. Press 5 / ∞ to move to “GENRE”, then press SET. The GENRE SEARCH screen appears. You can use the disc memory function through this receiver. The disc information (its performer, disc title, and music genre) of normal audio CDs will be stored into the memory built in the CD player. For the disc memory function, refer to the manual supplied with your CD player. • The performer, disc title, and music genre information are usually recorded in a CD Text. However, if a CD Text has no genre information recorded in the disc itself, you can input its music genre by yourself. Note: You can enter the TITLE INPUT screens for a CD Text and input its titles. However, you cannot store the titles you have input for a CD Text. Example: Entering the following information for Disc 1 Performer: “MICHAEL” Disc title: “MY FAVORITE” 4. Press 5 / ∞ to move to the genre you want to search for, then press SET. To show the unseen genres, press 5 / ∞ until they appear. For the CD Player with the disc memory function: 1. Press TEXT DISPLAY while “CD” is selected as the source. Disc search starts, then the SEARCH RESULT screen, showing the disc titles, appears. 5. On the SEARCH RESULT screen, you can do the following: • Changing the indication of the disc information: Press 5 / ∞ to move to a searched disc, then press 2 / 3. Each time you press 2 / 3, the disc information alternates between its disc title and its performer. • Starting a disc play and going to the Disc Information to a searched screen (see page 43): Press 5 / ∞ to move disc, then press SET. • Showing unseen disc information (if more than 5 discs are listed as a result of the search): Press 5 / ∞ until they appear. The Disc Information screen appears on the TV. 2. Press 5 / ∞ to move to “TITLE INPUT,” then press SET. The TITLE INPUT/ PERFORMER screen appears. 3. Press 5 / ∞ / 2 / 3 to move in front of a character you want, then press SET to enter the character. • If the current CD is a CD Text, go to step 5 without entering the performer. To use the lower case letters, press 5 / ∞ / 2 / 3 to move to , then press SET. To use the upper case letters again, press 5 / ∞ / 2 / 3 to move to , then press SET. • Going back to the GENRE SEARCH screen: Press EXIT. Continued to the next page. 45 EN36_46.RX-8010V[J]_f 45 01.1.11, 9:10 PM 4. Repeat step 3 until you finish putting a performer name (up to 32 characters). To insert a space, press 5 / ∞ to , / 2 / 3 to move then press SET. To correct an incorrect character: 1) Press 5 / ∞ / 2 / 3 to move to + or =, then press SET until the incorrect character is selected. to , then press SET 2) Press 5 / ∞ / 2 / 3 to move to erase the character. 3) Press 5 / ∞ / 2 / 3 to move in front of the correct character, then press SET to enter the correct character. 5. Press 5 / ∞ / 2 / 3 to move to “DISC 1: MICHAEL (in this example),” then press SET. • If the current CD is a CD Text, go to the next step without entering the disc title. 7. Press 5 / ∞ / 2 / 3 to move to “DISC 1: MY FAVORITE (in this example),” then press SET. The Disc Information screen appears on the TV. 2. Press 5 / ∞ to move to “TITLE INPUT,” then press SET. 3. Enter the title, referring to steps 3 and 4 of “For the CD Player with the disc memory function.” • You can enter up to 32 characters for the disc title. 4. Press 5 / ∞ / 2 / 3 to move to the disc title you have just entered, then press SET. The TITLE INPUT: DISC 1 GENRE screen appears. 8. Press 5 / ∞ to move then press SET. 1. Press TEXT DISPLAY while “MD” is selected as the source. The DISC TITLE INPUT screen appears. The TITLE INPUT: DISC TITLE screen appears. 6. Enter the disc title, referring to steps 3 and 4. For the MD recorder: You can write the disc information (disc title and song titles) into the disc. You can only write the song title for the song currently selected. • If you have the CD-MD combination deck, you can also enter the disc information (its performer, disc title, and its music genre) of normal audio CDs into the memory built in the CD-MD combination deck. (To do this, follow the procedure of “For the CD Player with the disc memory function.”) • If you change the disc or song title with more than 32 characters, the characters following 32nd will be erased from the title. The disc title is stored into the memory, and the SONG TITLE INPUT screen for the currently selected song appears. • You can enter a song title for the song currently selected. to the genre you want, The Disc Information screen appears again. To show the unseen genres, press 5 / ∞ until they appear. 5. Enter the song title, referring to steps 3 and 4 of “For the CD Player with the disc memory function.” • You can enter up to 32 characters for the song title. 6. Press 5 / ∞ / 2 / 3 to move to the song title you have just entered, then press SET. The song title is stored into the memory, and the Disc Information screen appears again. 46 EN36_46.RX-8010V[J]_f 46 01.1.11, 9:10 PM AV COMPU LINK Remote Control System The AV COMPU LINK remote control system allows you to operate JVC video components (TV, VCR, and DVD player) through the receiver. This receiver is equipped with the AV COMPU LINK-III, which added a function to operate JVC video components through the video components terminals. To use this remote control system, you need to connect the video components you want to operate, following the diagrams below and the procedure on the next page. CONNECTIONS 1: AV COMPU LINK Connection VCR 1 DVD player TV VHS DVD CAUTION: AV COMPU LINK AV COMPU LINK III AV COMPU LINK You can only connect to the TV with the AV COMPU LINK EX or AV COMPU LINK III terminal. DO NOT connect to the TV with AV COMPU LINK RECEIVER/ AMP terminal. AV COMPU LINK EX AV COMPU LINK III IMPORTANT: The AV COMPU LINK remote control system cannot control the DBS tuner connected to the TV SOUND/DBS and DBS component video terminals, and video components connected to the VIDEO and VCR 2 terminals on the receiver. Notes: • When connecting the receiver and a TV with the AV COMPU LINK EX terminal by using a component video cable, you cannot use Automatic Selection of TV’s Input Mode (see page 48). • When connecting only the VCR 1 or DVD player to this receiver, connect it directly to the receiver using cables with the monaural mini-plugs. • Refer also to the manuals supplied with your video components. CONNECTIONS 2: Video Cable Connection This receiver is equipped with three types of the video terminals — S-video, composite video, or component video, and the signals coming into this receiver through one type of video terminals can output only through the same type of the terminal. So you need to connect the VCR and/or DVD player to the TV using one of the following three ways: CASE 1 When connecting the source equipment to the receiver using the S-video terminals, connect also this receiver to the TV’s Video Input 1 terminal using S-video cables. Source Equipment S-video cable RX-8010VBK S-video cable TV To Video Input 1 Note: If you connect the DVD player and the DBS tuner to this receiver using the S-video terminals, change the video input terminal setting to "S/C" (see page 16). CASE 2 When connecting the source equipment to the receiver using the composite video terminals, connect also this receiver to the TV's Video Input 2 terminal (composite video input) using composite video cables. Source Equipment Composite video cable RX-8010VBK Composite video cable TV To Video Input 2 (Composite) Note: If you connect the DVD player and the DBS tuner to this receiver using the composite video terminals, change the video input terminal setting to "S/C" (see page 16). CASE 3 When connecting the source equipment to the receiver using the component video terminals, connect also this receiver to the TV's Video Input 2 terminals (component video input) using component video cables. Source Equipment Note: Component video cable RX-8010VBK Component video cable TV To Video Input 2 (Component) If you connect the DVD player and the DBS tuner to this receiver using the video component terminals, change the video input terminal setting to "COMPNT" (see page 16). 47 EN47_58.RX-8010V[J]_f 47 01.1.11, 9:11 PM 1. If you have already plugged your VCR 1 (VCR connected to the VCR 1 jacks), DVD player, TV and this receiver into the AC outlets, unplug their AC power cords first. 2. Connect your VCR 1, DVD player, TV and this receiver as follows, using the cables with the monaural mini-plugs (not supplied). • See “CONNECTIONS 1” on the previous page. 3. Connect the audio input/output jacks on VCR 1, DVD player, TV and this receiver using the cables with RCA pin plug. • See pages 6 and 7. 4. Connect the video input/output jacks on VCR 1, DVD player, TV and this receiver, using the cables with RCA pin plug, with S-video plug or with component video plugs. • See “CONNECTIONS 2” on the previous page. 5. Plug the AC power cords of the components into the AC outlets. 6. When turning on the TV for the first time after the AV COMPU LINK connection, turn the TV volume to the minimum using the TV volume control on the TV. 7. Turn on the other connected components first, then turn on this receiver. • When turning on the VCR 1, use the remote control supplied with this receiver (press VCR 1 POWER). The AV COMPU LINK remote control system allows you to use the five basic functions listed below. Remote Control of the TV, DVD player, and VCR Using This Remote Control See page 51 for details. • Aim the remote control directly at the remote sensor on each target component. One-Touch Video Play Simply by inserting a video cassette without its safety tab into the VCR 1 (the VCR connected to the VCR 1 jacks), you can enjoy the video playback without setting other switches manually. The receiver automatically turns on and changes the source to “VCR 1.” The TV automatically turns on and changes the input mode to the position so that you can view the playback picture. When you insert a video cassette with its safety tab, press the play 3) button on the VCR 1 or on the remote control. So, you can get (3 the same result. One-Touch DVD Play Simply by starting playback on the DVD player, you can enjoy the DVD playback without setting other switches manually. • When the DVD player is connected through the analog input jacks on this receiver (and analog input is selected), the receiver automatically turns on and changes the source to “DVD” or “DVD MULTI.” • When the DVD player is connected through the digital input terminal on this receiver (and digital input is selected), the receiver automatically turns on and changes the source to “DVD DGTL.” The TV automatically turns on and changes the input mode to the appropriate position so that you can view the playback picture. Automatic Selection of TV’s Input Mode • When you select “TV” as the source to play on the receiver, the TV automatically changes the input mode to the TV tuner so that you can watch TV. • When you select “DVD,” “DVD MULTI,” “VCR 1,” “VCR 2,” “VIDEO” or “DBS” as the source to play on the receiver, the TV automatically changes the input mode to the appropriate position (either Video Input 1 or Video Input 2) so that you can view the playback picture. Notes: • When connecting a TV with the AV COMPU LINK EX terminal to this receiver, you cannot use a component video cable (as case 3 on page 47). Connect the TV using a S-video or composite video cable (as cases 1 and 2). • When you select “TV” as the source on the receiver, you cannot see the menu on the TV screen since the AV COMPU LINK remote control system automatically changes the TV’s input mode to the TV tuner. If you do not mind stopping listening to the TV sounds, you can then show the on-screen displays after changing the TV’s input mode to the appropriate position the receiver is connected to. Automatic Power On/Off The TV, VCR 1 (the VCR connected to the VCR 1 jacks), and DVD player turn on and off along with the receiver. When you turn on the receiver; • If the previously selected source is “VCR 1,” the TV and VCR 1 will turn on automatically. • If the previously selected source is “VIDEO,” “VCR 2,” or “TV” or “DBS,” only the TV will turn on automatically. • If the previously selected source is “DVD” or “DVD MULTI,” the TV and DVD player will turn on automatically. When you turn off the receiver, the TV, VCR 1 and the DVD player will turn off. Note: If you turn off the receiver while recording on the VCR 1, the VCR 1 will not turn off, but continue recording. 48 EN47_58.RX-8010V[J]_f 48 01.1.11, 9:11 PM Operating JVC’s Audio/Video Components You can operate JVC’s audio and video components with this receiver’s remote control, since control signals for JVC components are preset in the remote control. Operating Audio Components IMPORTANT: Tuner You can always perform the following operations: FM/AM: To operate JVC’s audio components using this remote control: • You need to connect JVC audio components through the COMPU LINK (SYNCHRO) jacks (see page 41) in addition to the connections using cables with RCA pin plugs (see pages 5 and 6). • Aim the remote control directly at the remote sensor on the receiver. • If you use the buttons on the front panel or the menu function to choose a source, the remote control will not operate that source. To operate a source with the remote control, the source must be selected using source selecting buttons on the remote control. • To operate the cassette deck or MD recorder using the COMPU LINK remote control system, set the source name correctly. (See page 16.) • Refer also to the manuals supplied with your components. Alternates between FM and AM. After pressing FM/AM, you can perform the following operations: 1 – 10, +10: TUNING UP 3/DOWN 2: FM MODE: Selects a preset channel number directly. For channel number 5, press 5. For channel number 15, press +10, then 5. For channel number 20, press +10, then 10. Tunes into stations. Changes the FM reception mode. Sound control section (Amplifier) You can always perform the following operations: SURROUND ON/OFF: Turns on or off the Surround modes – Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital, and DTS Digital Surround. Selects the DSP modes. DSP MODE: After pressing SOUND, you can perform the following operations: CATV/DBS POWER VCR 1 POWER TV POWER AUDIO POWER DVD DVD MUILTI CD FM/AM TV/DBS VIDEO CDR PHONO VCR 1 VCR 2 TAPE/MD USB SURROUND DSP ANALOG/DIGITAL SLEEP ON/OFF MODE INPUT LINE DIF.ECT BASS BOOST EFFECT ROOM SIZE 1 2 TEST CTR TONE LIVENESS 4 5 3 6 MENU MIDNIGHT MODE ENTER SOUND ∗SUBWFR ∗L/R BAL ∗CENTER 8 7/P MUTING 0 +10 FM MODE 100+ 10 RETURN CATV/DBS CONTROL TV/VIDEO 9 ∗DIGITALEQ ∗REAR L ∗REAR R + ∗BAL L ∗ + CH/ LEVEL TV VOL − ∗BAL R MENU TEXT DISPLAY /REW − PLAY PAUSE + VOLUME − SUBWFR then LEVEL +/ –: Adjusts the subwoofer output level. CENTER then LEVEL +/ –: Adjusts the center speaker output level. REAR L then LEVEL +/ –: Adjusts the left rear speaker output level. REAR R then LEVEL +/ –: Adjusts the right rear speaker output level. DIGITAL EQ then LEVEL+/ –:Selects the audio band and adjusts its frequency level. EFFECT: Selects the effect level. TEST: Turns on or off the test tone output. CTR TONE: Selects the center tone. ROOM SIZE: Selects the room size. LIVENESS: Selects the liveness. EXIT Note: FF/ SET REC PAUSE DOWN – TUNING – UP STOP CONTROL After adjusting sounds, press the corresponding source selecting button to operate your target source by using the 10 keys; otherwise, the 10 keys cannot be used for operating your target source. RM-SRX8010J A/V CONTROL RECEIVER CD player Note: When you press one of the following buttons mentioned in this section, the operation mode appears on the display window for about 10 seconds. For example, the above illustration shows that you have pressed CD. Buttons FM/AM CD CDR PHONO TAPE/MD CONTROL (repeatedly) SOUND 49 EN47_58.RX-8010V[J]_f 49 Indications TUNER CD CDR PHONO TAPE VCR 1 TAPE CDR CDDSC SOUND After pressing CD, you can perform the following operations on the CD player: 3 PLAY: 4: ¢: 7 STOP: 8 PAUSE: 1 – 10, +10: Starts playing. Returns to the beginning of the current (or previous) track. Skips to the beginning of the next track. Stops playing. Pauses playing. To release it, press 3 PLAY. Selects a track number directly. For track number 5, press 5. For track number 15, press +10, then 5. For track number 20, press +10, then 10. For track number 30, press +10, +10, then 10. 01.1.11, 9:11 PM CD changer After selecting “CDDSC” by pressing CONTROL repeatedly, you can perform the following operations on a CD changer: 3 PLAY: 4: ¢: 7 STOP: 8 PAUSE: 1 – 6, 7/P: Starts playing. Returns to the beginning of the current (or previous) track. Skips to the beginning of the next track. Stops playing. Pauses playing. To release it, press 3 PLAY. Selects the number of a disc installed in a CD changer. CD recorder After pressing CDR (or selecting “CDR” by pressing CONTROL repeatedly), you can perform the following operations on a CD recorder: 3 PLAY: 4: Starts playing. Returns to the beginning of the current (or previous) track. Skips to the beginning of the next track. Stops playing. Pauses playing. To release it, press 3 PLAY. Selects a track number directly. For track number 5, press 5. For track number 15, press +10, then 5. For track number 20, press +10, then 10. For track number 30, press +10, +10, then 10. ¢: 7 STOP: 8 PAUSE: 1 – 10, +10: After pressing CD, you can perform the following operations on the CD changer: 1 – 10, +10: Selects a track number directly. For track number 5, press 5. For track number 15, press +10, then 5. For track number 20, press +10, then 10. For track number 30, press +10, +10, then 10. EXAMPLE: • Selecting disc number 4, track number 12, and starting playback. 1. Press CONTROL repeatedly until “CDDSC” appears on the display window, then press 4. 2. Press CD, then press +10, 2. If your CD changer is of 200-disc loading capability (except for XL-MC100 and XL-MC301) you can do the following operations using the number buttons after pressing CD. 1. Select a disc number. 2. Then select a track number (always enter two digits). 3. Start playback. EXAMPLES: • Selecting disc number 3, track number 2, and starting playback. Press 3, then, 0, 2, then 3 PLAY. • Selecting disc number 10, track number 5, and starting playback. Press 1, 0, then, 0, 5, then 3 PLAY. • Selecting disc number 105, track number 12, and starting playback. Press 1, 0, 5, then 1, 2 then 3 PLAY. Turntable After pressing PHONO, you can perform the following operations on a turntable: 3 PLAY: 7 STOP: Starts playing. Stops operations. Notes: • When you start recording on the CD recorder, use the buttons on the CD recorder itself or on the remote control supplied with it. • You can use either CDR or CONTROL to activate the buttons listed above. If you press CDR, the playing source also changes. On the other hand, if you press CONTROL repeatedly to select “CDR,” the playing source does not change. Cassette deck After pressing TAPE/MD (or selecting “TAPE” by pressing CONTROL repeatedly), you can perform the following operations on a cassette deck: 3 PLAY: REW: FF: 7 STOP: 8 PAUSE: REC PAUSE: Starts playing. Fast winds the tape from right to left. Fast winds the tape from left to right. Stops operations. Pauses playing. To release it, press 3 PLAY. Enters recording pause. Notes: • You can use either TAPE/MD or CONTROL to activate the buttons listed above. If you press TAPE/MD, the playing source also changes. On the other hand, if you press CONTROL repeatedly to select “TAPE,” the playing source does not change. • When you use a cassette deck, change the source name connected to TAPE/MD jacks correctly (see page 16). MD recorder After pressing TAPE/MD, you can perform the following operations on the MD recorder: 3 PLAY: 4: ¢: 7 STOP: 8 PAUSE: REC PAUSE: Starts playing. Returns to the beginning of the current (or previous) track. Skips to the beginning of the next track. Stops playing. Pauses playing. To release it, press 3 PLAY. Enters recording pause. Note: When you use an MD recorder, change the source name connected to TAPE/MD jacks correctly (see page 16). 50 EN47_58.RX-8010V[J]_f 50 01.1.11, 9:11 PM VCR 1 (VCR connected to the VCR 1 jacks) You can always perform the following operations: Operating Video Components VCR 1 POWER: IMPORTANT: To operate JVC’s video components using this remote control: • You need to connect JVC video components through the AV COMPU LINK jacks (see page 47) in addition to the connections using cables with RCA pin plugs (see pages 6 and 7). • Some JVC VCRs can accept two types of the control signals — remote code “A” and “B.” Before using this remote control, make sure that the remote control code of the VCR connected to the VCR 1 jacks is set to code “A.” – When another JVC VCR is connected to the VCR 2 or VIDEO terminals, set its remote control code to code “B.” (This remote control cannot emit the control signals of code “B.”) • When using the remote control: – For the DVD player and VCR 1 operations, aim the remote control directly at the remote sensor on each component, not on the receiver. – For the TV having the AV COMPU LINK EX or AV COMPU LINK III terminal, aim the remote control directly at the remote sensor on the TV. Turns on or off the VCR 1. After pressing VCR 1 (or selecting “VCR 1” by pressing CONTROL repeatedly), you can perform the following operations on the VCR 1: 1 – 9, 0: 3 PLAY: REW: FF: 7 STOP: 8 PAUSE: REC PAUSE: CH +/–: Selects the TV channels on the VCR. Starts playing. Rewinds a tape. Fast winds a tape. Stops operations. Pauses playing. To release it, press 3 PLAY. Enters recording pause. Changes the TV channels on the VCR. Note: You can use either VCR 1 or CONTROL to activate the buttons listed above. If you press VCR 1, the playing source also changes. On the other hand, if you press CONTROL repeatedly to select “VCR 1,” the playing source does not change. DVD player After pressing DVD or DVD MULTI, you can perform the following operations on a DVD player: 3 PLAY: 4: CATV/DBS POWER VCR 1 TV AUDIO POWER POWER POWER DVD DVD MUILTI CD FM/AM TV/DBS VIDEO CDR PHONO VCR 1 VCR 2 TAPE/MD USB SURROUND DSP ¢: 7 STOP: 8 PAUSE: ANALOG/DIGITAL SLEEP ON/OFF MODE INPUT LINE DIF.ECT BASS BOOST EFFECT 1 2 MIDNIGHT MODE TEST CTR TONE LIVENESS 4 5 6 ROOM SIZE 3 MENU After pressing DVD or DVD MULTI, these buttons can be used for the DVD menu operations. ENTER ∗SUBWFR ∗L/R BAL ∗CENTER SOUND 8 7/P MUTING 9 ∗DIGITALEQ ∗REAR L ∗REAR R 10 0 +10 RETURN FM MODE 100+ CATV/DBS CONTROL TV/VIDEO Starts playing. Returns to the beginning of the current (or previous) track. Skips to the beginning of the next track. Stops playing. Stops playing temporarily. To release it, press 3 PLAY. + ∗BAL L ∗ + CH/ LEVEL TV VOL − ∗BAL R MENU TEXT DISPLAY /REW − PLAY PAUSE + − FF/ SET REC PAUSE 3 MENU CTR TONE LIVENESS 5 6 ENTER For detailed menu operations, refer to the instructions supplied with the discs or the DVD player. EXIT 2 TEST 4 Note: VOLUME ROOM SIZE EFFECT ∗L/R BAL 8 DOWN – TUNING – UP STOP CONTROL RM-SRX8010J TV A/V CONTROL RECEIVER You can always perform the following operations: Note: When you press one of the following buttons mentioned in this section, the operation mode appears on the display window for about 10 seconds. For example, above illustration shows that you have pressed VCR 1. Buttons VCR 1 DVD or DVD MULTI TV/DBS CONTROL (repeatedly) Indications VCR 1 DVD TV VCR 1 CDDSC TAPE CDR TV POWER: TV VOL +/–: TV/VIDEO: Turns on or off the TV. Adjusts the volume. Sets the input mode (either TV or VIDEO). After pressing TV/DBS, you can perform the following operations on a TV: CH +/–: 1 – 9, 0, 100+: RETURN: Changes the channels. Selects the channels. Alternates between the previously selected channel and the current channel. 51 EN47_58.RX-8010V[J]_f 51 01.1.11, 9:11 PM Operating Other Manufacturers’ Video Equipment This remote control supplied with the receiver can transmit control signals for other manufacturers’ VCRs, TVs, CATV converters, DBS tuners and DVD players. By changing the transmittable signals from preset ones to the other manufacturers’, you can operate the other manufacturer’s components using this remote control. To change the transmittable signals for operating another manufacturer’s TV When operating the other manufacturers’ components, refer also to the manuals supplied with them. To operate these components with the remote control, first you need to set the manufacturer’s code each for VCR, TV, CATV converters, DBS tuners and DVD players. 2. Press TV/DBS. After replacing batteries for the remote control, you need to set the manufactures’ codes again. 1. Press and hold TV POWER. 3. Enter manufacturer’s code using buttons 1–9, and 0. See the list below to find the code. 4. Release TV POWER. The following buttons can be used for operating the TV: TV POWER: TV VOL +/–: TV/VIDEO: Turns on and off the TV. Adjusts the volume. Sets the input mode (either TV or VIDEO). After pressing TV/DBS, you can perform the following operations on a TV: CATV/DBS POWER VCR 1 TV AUDIO POWER POWER POWER DVD DVD MUILTI CD FM/AM TV/DBS VIDEO CDR PHONO VCR 1 VCR 2 TAPE/MD USB SURROUND DSP CH +/–: 1 – 10, 0, 100+ (+10): ANALOG/DIGITAL SLEEP ON/OFF MODE INPUT LINE DIF.ECT BASS BOOST EFFECT 1 2 ROOM SIZE 3 Note: MENU MIDNIGHT MODE TEST CTR TONE LIVENESS 4 5 6 Refer to the manual supplied with your TV. ENTER SOUND ∗SUBWFR ∗L/R BAL ∗CENTER MUTING ∗DIGITALEQ ∗REAR L ∗REAR R 8 7/P 0 +10 100+ + ∗BAL L ∗ + CH/ LEVEL TV VOL − TV/VIDEO ∗BAL R MENU TEXT DISPLAY /REW 9 FM MODE 10 RETURN CATV/DBS CONTROL Changes the channels. Selects the channels. The 10 button will function as the ENTER button if your TV requires pressing ENTER after selecting a channel number. − PLAY PAUSE 5. Try to operate your TV by pressing TV POWER. When your TV turns on or off, you have entered the correct code. If there are more than one code listed for your brand of TV, try each one until the correct one is entered. + VOLUME − EXIT FF/ SET REC PAUSE DOWN – TUNING – UP STOP CONTROL Manufacturer JVC RM-SRX8010J A/V CONTROL RECEIVER Note: When you press one of the following buttons mentioned in this section, the operation mode appears on the display window for about 10 seconds. For example, the above illustration shows that you have pressed TV/DBS. Buttons TV/DBS CATV/DBS CONTROL VCR 1 DVD or DVD MULTI Codes Indications TV DBS VCR 1 DVD 00, 02, 13, 14, 47, 74 AKAI 01, 02 BLAUPUNKT 03, 04, FISHER 01, 05 GRUNDIG 03, 06, 07 HITACHI 08, 09, 10, 49 IRADDIO 02 ITT/NOKIA 11, 12 LOEWE 06, 15, 16 MAGNAVOX 08, 17, 49 METS 50, 51, 52, 53 MITSUBISHI 08, 18, 19, 20 MIVAR 21 NORDMENDE 22, 23 OKANO 15 PANASONIC 24, 25, 26, 27 76 PHILIPS 15, 17, 28, 75 Manufacturer Codes QUELLE 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59, 60, 61, 62, 63, 64, 65, 66, 67 RCA/ 08, 24, 29, 30, PROSCAN 31, 48 SABA 32, 33, 68, 69, 70 SAMSUNG 06, 08, 16, 34, 35, 49 SANYO 01, 05 SCHNEIDER 02, 15, 36 SHARP 37, 38, 77 SONY 39 TELEFUNKEN 40, 41, 42, 69 THOMSON 71, 72 TOSHIBA 37, 43, 44 ZENITH 45, 46 Manufacturers’ codes are subject to change without notice. If they are changed, this remote control cannot operate the equipment. 52 EN47_58.RX-8010V[J]_f 52 01.1.11, 9:11 PM To change the transmittable signals for operating a CATV converter or DBS tuner 1. Press and hold CATV/DBS POWER. 2. Press CATV/DBS CONTROL. 3 Enter manufacturer’s code using buttons 1–9, and 0. See the following lists to find the code. 4. Release CATV/DBS POWER. The following buttons can be used for the CATV converter and DBS tuner: CATV/DBS POWER: CH +/–: 1 – 10, 0, 100+ (+10): Turns on and off the CATV converter or DBS tuner. Changes the channels. Selects the channels. The 10 button will function as the ENTER button if your equipment requires pressing ENTER after selecting a channel number. Note: Refer to the manual supplied with your CATV converter or DBS tuner. 5. Try to operate your CATV converter or DBS tuner by pressing CATV/DBS POWER. When your CATV converter or DBS tuner turns on or off, you have entered the correct code. If there are more than one code listed for your brand of CATV converter or DBS tuner, try each one until the correct one is entered. For CATV converter Manufacturer Codes GENERAL INSTRUMENT 06, 07, 08, 09, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 29 HAMLIN/REGAL 01, 02, 03, 04, 05 JERROLD 06, 07, 08, 09, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14 OAK 15, 16, 17 PANASONIC 18, 19, 20 PIONEER 21, 22 SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA 23, 24, 25 TOCOM 26 ZENITH 27, 28 Manufacturers’ codes are subject to change without notice. If they are changed, this remote control cannot operate the equipment. To change the transmittable signals for operating another manufacturer’s VCR 1. Press and hold VCR 1 POWER. 2. Press VCR 1. 3. Enter manufacturer’s code using buttons 1–9, and 0. See the list on the next page to find the code. 4. Release VCR 1 POWER. The following button can be used for operating the VCR: Note: VCR 1 POWER: You cannot use both of the CATV converter and DBS tuner at the same time. After pressing VCR 1, you can perform the following operations on the VCR: CH +/–: For DBS tuner Manufacturer Codes JVC AMSTRAD BLAUPUNKT ECHOSTAR GOLDSTAR GRUNDIG HIRSHMANN INSTRUMENT ITT/NOKIA KATHREIN NEC ORBITECH PHILIPS RCA SAMSUNG SCHWAIGER SIEMENS SONY TECHNISAT 56, 57, 67 43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49 30 50, 51, 67 31 32, 33 48, 52, 53, 54, 55 68 34 52, 58, 59, 60, 61, 62, 63 35, 36 48 37, 38 65 39, 40 61, 64 41, 42 66 48 Manufacturers’ codes are subject to change without notice. If they are changed, this remote control cannot operate the equipment. 1 – 10, 0, 100+ (+10): 3 PLAY: REW: FF: 7 STOP: 8 PAUSE: REC PAUSE: 53 Changes the TV channels on the VCR. Selects the TV channels. The 10 button will function as the ENTER button if your VCR requires pressing ENTER after selecting a channel number. Starts playback. Rewinds a video tape. Fast winds a video tape. Stops operation. Pauses. Enters recording pause. Note: Refer to the manual supplied with your VCR. 5. Try to operate your VCR by pressing VCR 1 POWER. When your VCR turns on or off, you have entered the correct code. If there are more than one code listed for your brand of VCR, try each one until the correct one is entered. 53 EN47_58.RX-8010V[J]_f Turns on and off the VCR. 01.1.11, 9:11 PM Manufacturer Codes JVC AIWA BELL & HOWELL BLAUPUNKT CGM EMERSON FISHER FUNAI GE GOLDSTAR GOODMANS GRUNDIG HITACHI LOEWE MAGNAVOX MITSUBISHI NEC NOKIA NORDMENDE ORION PANASONIC PHILIPS PHONOLA RCA/PROSCAN SABA SAMSUNG SANYO SHARP SIEMENS SONY TELEFUNKEN TOSHIBA ZENITH 00, 26, 27, 28, 29, 58 01, 02 03 04, 05 06, 07 08, 10, 11, 12, 64, 65 03, 14, 15, 16, 17 01 18, 19, 20 07 13, 21 06, 22 18, 23, 24, 25, 66 07, 21 04, 19, 24 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35 26, 27 03, 36 38 09 19, 24, 39, 40 04, 19, 21, 24, 41, 42 21 04, 18, 19, 23, 24, 43, 44, 45 38, 46 45, 47, 59, 61, 62, 63 03, 48, 49 37, 50 03, 51 52, 53, 54 55, 60 43, 44 56, 57 Manufacturers’ codes are subject to change without notice. If they are changed, this remote control cannot operate the equipment. After pressing DVD, these buttons can be used for the DVD menu operations. ROOM SIZE EFFECT 2 3 MENU Note: TEST CTR TONE LIVENESS 4 5 6 ENTER ∗L/R BAL For detailed menu operations, refer to the instructions supplied with the discs or the DVD player. 8 Note: Refer to the manual supplied with your DVD player. 5. Try to operate your DVD player by pressing one of the above buttons. • DO NOT forget to turn on the DVD player before pressing one of the above buttons. If there are more than one code listed for your brand of DVD, try each one until the correct one is entered. Manufacturer JVC DENON PANASONIC PHILIPS PIONEER RCA SAMSUNG SONY TOSHIBA YAMAHA Codes 00, 02 01 03 13 04, 05, 06 07 08 09 10 11, 12 Manufacturers’ codes are subject to change without notice. If they are changed, this remote control cannot operate the equipment. To change the transmittable signals for operating a DVD player 1. Press and hold AUDIO POWER. 2 Press DVD. 3. Enter manufacturer’s code using buttons 1–9, and 0. See the following list to find the code. 4. Release AUDIO POWER. After pressing DVD or DVD MULTI, you can perform the following operations on a DVD player: 3 PLAY: 4: Starts playing. Returns to the beginning of the current (or previous) track. Skips to the beginning of the next track. Stops playing. Stops playing temporarily. To release it, press 3 PLAY. ¢: 7 STOP: 8 PAUSE: 54 EN47_58.RX-8010V[J]_f 54 01.1.11, 9:11 PM Troubleshooting Use this chart to help you solve daily operational problems. If there is any problem you cannot solve, contact your JVC service center. PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE SOLUTION The display does not light up. The power cord is not plugged in. Plug the power cord into an AC outlet. (See page 10.) No sound from speakers. Speaker signal cables are not connected. Check speaker wiring and reconnect if necessary. (See pages 4 and 5.) The SPEAKERS ON/OFF 1 and SPEAKERS ON/OFF 2 buttons are not set correctly. Press SPEAKERS ON/OFF 1 and SPEAKERS ON/OFF 2 correctly. (See page 13.) An incorrect source is selected. Select the correct source. Muting is activated. Press MUTING to cancel the mute. (See page 13.) An incorrect input mode (analog or digital) is selected. Select the correct input mode (analog or digital). (See page 20.) Connections are incorrect. Check connections. For analog connections, see page 5. For digital connections, see page 8. For USB connection, see page 9. Speaker signal cables are not connected properly. Check speaker wiring and reconnect if necessary. (See pages 4 and 5.) The balance is set to one extreme. Adjust the balance properly. (See page 16.) USB device is not selected on the computer. Select “USB Audio Device [1]” for “Playback” of “Audio” (see page 9). Refer to the manuals supplied with your PC. “Mute” is selected on the PC. Check if the volume is set at low level. Refer to the manuals supplied with your PC. Noise while reproducing PC sound connected with a USB cable. Strong electromagnetic wave is emitted from such as television. Move the PC away from the device such as TV emitting strong electromagnetic wave. Sound from PC connected with a USB cable is intermittent. PC is subjected to excessive load due to using other applications. Close the applications you do not use. Continuous hiss or buzzing during FM reception. Incoming signal is too weak. Connect an outdoor FM antenna or contact your dealer. (See page 3.) The station is too far away. Select a new station. An incorrect antenna is used. Check with your dealer to be sure you have the correct antenna. Antennas are not connected properly. Check connections. (See page 3.) Occasional cracking noise during FM reception. Ignition noise from automobiles. Move the antenna farther from automobile traffic. Noise is heard An earth (H) cable is not connected to the AM (H) terminal on the rear panel. Connect the cable to the AM (H) terminal on the rear panel. No sound effect such as DSP mode and digital equalization. The line direct function is turned on. Turn off the line direct function. (See page 14.) Howling during record playing. Your turntable is too close to the speakers. Move the speakers away from the turntable. Sound from one speaker only. No sound from PC connected with a USB cable. 55 EN47_58.RX-8010V[J]_f 55 01.1.12, 9:23 AM PROBLEM “OVERLOAD” starts flashing on the display. POSSIBLE CAUSE SOLUTION Speakers are overloaded because of high volume. 1. Press POWER on the front panel to turn off the receiver. 2. Stop the playback source. 3. Turn on the receiver again, and adjust the volume. Speakers are overloaded because of short circuit of speaker terminals. Press POWER on the front panel, then check the speaker wiring. If “OVERLOAD” does not disappear, unplug the AC power cord, then plug it back again. If speaker wiring is not short-circuited, contact your dealer. The STANDBY lamp lights up after turning on the power, but soon the receiver turns off again (into standby mode). The receiver is overloaded because of a high voltage. Press POWER on the front panel to turn off the receiver. After unplugging the AC power cord, consult your dealer. Remote control does not work. There is an obstruction in front of the remote sensor on the receiver. Remove the obstruction. Batteries are weak. Replace batteries. (See page 10.) An incorrect remote control operation mode is selected. Select the correct remote control operation mode. (See page 52.) Remote control does not work intendedly. 56 EN47_58.RX-8010V[J]_f 56 01.1.11, 9:11 PM Specifications Amplifier Output Power: At Stereo operation: Front channels: 120 W per channel, min. RMS, driven into 8 Ω, 20 Hz to 20 kHz with no more than 0.08% total harmonic distortion. At Surround operation: Audio Audio Input Sensitivity/Impedance (1 kHz): Audio Input (DIGITAL IN)* : Front channels: 100 W per channel, min. RMS, driven into 8 Ω at 1 kHz with no more than 0.8% total harmonic distortion. Center channel: 100 W, min. RMS, driven into 8 Ω at 1 kHz, with no more than 0.8% total harmonic distortion. Rear channels: 100 W per channel, min. RMS, driven into 8 Ω at 1 kHz, with no more than 0.8% total harmonic distortion. PHONO (MM): 2.5 mV/47 kΩ DVD, VCR 1, VCR 2, VIDEO, TV SOUND/DBS, CD, CDR, TAPE/MD: 200 mV/47 kΩ Coaxial: DIGITAL 1 (DVD): 0.5 V(p-p)/75 Ω Optical: DIGITAL 2 (CD), DIGITAL 3 (TV), DIGITAL 4 (CDR): –21 dBm to –15 dBm (660 nm ±30 nm) *Corresponding to Linear PCM, Dolby Digital, and DTS Digital Surround (with sampling frequency — 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz). USB: Audio Output Level: Digital output: Signal-to-Noise Ratio (’66 IHF/’78 IHF): Revision 1.0, full-speed (with sampling frequency — 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz) VCR 1, VCR 2, CDR, TAPE/MD: 200 mV Optical: DIGITAL OUTPUT: Signal wave length: 660 nm Output level: –21 dBm to –15 dBm PHONO (MM): 70 dB/78 dB (at REC OUT) DVD, VCR 1, VCR 2, VIDEO, TV SOUND/DBS, CD, CDR, TAPE/MD: 92 dB/80 dB (LINE DIRECT ON) Frequency Response (8 Ω): PHONO: 20 Hz to 20 kHz (±1 dB) DVD, VCR 1, VCR 2, VIDEO, TV SOUND/DBS, CD, CDR, TAPE/MD: 20 Hz to 100 kHz (+1 dB, –3 dB) USB: 20 Hz to 20 kHz (+1 dB, –3 dB) RIAA Phono Equalization: ±1.0 dB (20 Hz to 20 kHz) Bass boost: +6 dB ±1.0 dB at 100 Hz Video Video Input Sensitivity/Impedance: Composite video: S-video: Component video: Video Output Level: Composite video: S-video: Component video: Synchronization: 57 EN47_58.RX-8010V[J]_f DVD, VCR 1, VCR 2, VIDEO, TV SOUND/DBS: DVD, VCR 1, VCR 2, VIDEO, TV SOUND/DBS: (Y: luminance): (C: chrominance, burst): DVD, DBS: (Y: luminance): (PB, PR): VCR 1, VCR 2, MONITOR OUT: VCR 1, VCR 2, MONITOR OUT: MONITOR OUT: Negative Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 45 dB On-Screen Color System: NTSC 57 (Y: luminance): (C: chrominance, burst): (Y: luminance): (PB, PR): 01.1.11, 9:11 PM 1 V(p-p)/75 Ω 1 V(p-p)/75 Ω 0.286 V(p-p)/75 Ω 1 V(p-p)/75 Ω 0.7 V(p-p)/75 Ω 1 V(p-p)/75 Ω 1 V(p-p)/75 Ω 0.286 V(p-p)/75 Ω 1 V(p-p)/75 Ω 0.7 V(p-p)/75 Ω FM tuner (IHF) Tuning Range: 87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz Usable Sensitivity: Monaural: 12.8 dBf (1.2 µV/75 Ω) 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity: Monaural: 21.3 dBf (3.2 µV/75 Ω) Stereo: 41.3 dBf (31.5 µV/75 Ω) Signal-to-Noise Ratio (IHF-A weighted): Monaural: Stereo: 78 dB at 85 dBf 73 dB at 85 dBf Total Harmonic Distortion: Monaural: Stereo: 0.4% at 1 kHz 0.6% at 1 kHz Stereo Separation at REC OUT: Alternate Channel Selectivity: Frequency Response: 35 dB at 1 kHz 45 dB: (±400 kHz) 30 Hz to 15 kHz: (+0.5 dB, –3 dB) AM tuner Tuning Range: Usable Sensitivity: 530 kHz to 1 710 kHz Loop antenna Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 400 µV/m 50 dB (100 mV/m) General Power Requirements: AC 120V Power Consumption: 320 W/440 VA (at operation) 2 W (in standby mode) Dimensions (W x H x D): Mass: , 60 Hz 435 mm x 156.5 mm x 425 mm (17 3/16 in. x 6 3/16 in. x 16 3/4 in.) 11.5 kg (25.4 lbs) Designs & specifications are subject to change without notice. 58 EN47_58.RX-8010V[J]_f 58 01.1.11, 9:11 PM QUALITY SERVICE HOW TO LOCATE YOUR JVC SERVICE CENTER TOLL FREE : 1-800-537-5722 http://www.jvcservice.com Dear customer: In order to receive the most satisfaction from your purchase, read the instruction booklet before operating the unit. In the event that repair is necessary, or for the address nearest your location, please refer to the factory service center list below or within the Continental United States, Call 1-800-537-5722 for your authorized servicer. Remember to retain your Bill of Sale for Warranty Service. —JVC JVC SERVICE & ENGINEERING COMPANY OF AMERICA DIVISION OF JVC AMERICAS CORP. FACTORY SERVICE CENTER LOCATIONS 10 New Maple Avenue Pine Brook, NJ 07058-9641 (973) 396-1000 1500 Lakes Parkway Lawrenceville, GA 30243-5857 (770) 339-2582 705 Enterprise Street Aurora, IL 60504-8149 (630) 851-7855 5665 Corporate Avenue Cypress, CA 90630-0024 (714) 229-8011 2969 Mapunapuna Place Honolulu, HI 96819-2040 (808) 833-5828 10700 Hammerly, Suite 110 Houston, TX 77043 (713) 935-9331 13 Cummings Park Woburn, MA 01801 (781) 376-9100 8192 State Road 84 Davie, FL 33324 (954) 472-1960 890 Dubuque Avenue South San Francisco, CA 94080-1804 (650) 871-2666 Sophisticated electronic products may require occasional service. Just as quality is a keyword in the engineering and production of the wide array of JVC products, service is the key to maintaining the high level of performance for which JVC is world famous. The JVC service and engineering organization stands behind our products. NATIONAL HEADQUARTERS JVC SERVICE & ENGINEERING COMPANY OF AMERICA DIVISION OF JVC AMERICAS CORP. 1700 Valley Road Wayne, NJ 07470 If you ship the product • • • Pack your JVC unit in the original carton or one of equivalent size and strength. Enclose, with the unit, a letter stating the problem or symptom that exists and also a copy of the receipt or bill of sale you received when you purchased your JVC unit. Print your home return address on the outside and the inside of the carton. Send to the appropriate JVC Factory Service Center as listed above. Don’t service it yourself. CAUTION To prevent electrical shock, do not open the cabinet. No user serviceable parts inside. Refer servicing to qualified service personnel. ACCESSORIES To purchase accessories for your JVC product, you may contact your local JVC Dealer. Or from the 48 Continental United States call toll free : 800-882-2345 (1099) RX-8010V[J]Warranty_f 2 01.1.11, 5:57 PM LIMITED WARRANTY AUDIO-2 JVC COMPANY OF AMERICA warrants this product and all parts thereof, except as set forth below ONLY TO THE ORIGINAL PURCHASER AT RETAIL to be FREE FROM DEFECTIVE MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP from the date of original retail purchase for the period as shown below. (“The Warranty Period.”) PARTS LABOR 2YR 2YR THIS LIMITED WARRANTY IS VALID ONLY IN THE FIFTY(50) UNITED STATES, THE DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA AND IN COMMONWEALTH OF PUERTO RICO. WHAT WE WILL DO: If this product is found to be defective, JVC will repair or replace defective parts at no charge to the original owner. Such repair and replacement services shall be rendered by JVC during normal business hours at JVC authorized service centers. Parts used for replacement are warranted only for the remainder of the Warranty Period. All products and parts thereof may be brought to a JVC authorized service center on a carry-in basis except for Television sets having a screen size 25 inches and above which are covered on an in-home basis. WHAT YOU MUST DO FOR WARRANTY SERVICE: Return your product to a JVC authorized service center with a copy of your bill of sale. For your nearest JVC authorized service center, please call toll free: (800)537-5722. If service is not available locally, box the product carefully, preferably in the original carton, and ship, insured, with a copy of your bill of sale plus and letter of explanation of the problem to the nearest JVC Factory Service Center, the name and location of which will be given to you by the toll-free number. If you have any questions concerning your JVC Product, please contact our Customer Relations Department. WHAT IS NOT COVERED: This limited warranty provided by JVC does not cover: 1. Products which have been subject to abuse, accident, alteration, modification, tampering, negligence, misuse, faulty installation, lack of reasonable care, or if repaired or serviced by anyone other than a service facility authorized by JVC to render such service, or if affixed to any attachment not provided with the products, or if the model number or serial number has been altered, tampered with, defaced or removed; 2. Initial installation and installation and removal for repair; 3. Operational adjustments covered in the Owner’s Manual, normal maintenance, video and audio head cleaning; 4. Damage that occurs in shipment, due to act of God, and cosmetic damage; 5. Signal reception problems and failures due to line power surge; 6. Video Pick-up Tubes/CCD Image Sensor, Cartridge, Stylus(Needle) are covered for 90 days from the date of purchase; 7. Accessories; 8. Batteries (except the Rechargeable Batteries are covered for 90 days from the date of purchase); There are no express warranties except as listed above. THE DURATION OF ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, IS LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTY HEREIN. JVC SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR THE LOSS OF USE OF THE PRODUCT, INCONVENIENCE, LOSS OR ANY OTHER DAMAGES, WHETHER DIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGE TO TAPES, RECORDS OR DISCS) RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THIS PRODUCT, OR ARISING OUT OF ANY BREACH OF THIS WARRANTY. ALL EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO THE WARRANTY PERIOD SET FORTH ABOVE. Some states do not allow the exclusion of incidental or consequential damages or limitations on how long an implied warranty last, so these limitations or exclusions may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other rights which vary from state to state. JVC COMPANY OF AMERICA DIVISION OF JVC AMERICAS CORP. 1700 Valley Road Wayne, NJ 07470 REFURBISHED PRODUCTS CARRY A SEPARATE WARRANTY, THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT APPLY. FOR DETAILS OF REFURBISHED PRO DUCT WARRANTY, PLEASE REFER TO THE REFURBISHED PRODUCT WARRANTY INFORMATION PACKAGED WITH EACH REFURBISHED PRODUCT. For customer use: Enter below the Model No. and Serial No. which is located either on the rear, bottom or side of the cabinet. Retain this information for future reference. RX-8010V[J]Warranty_f Model No.: Serial No.: Purchase date: Name of dealer: 3 01.1.11, 5:57 PM VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LIMITED V EN RX-8010V[J]COVER_f J 2 01.1.11, 5:56 PM C 0101NHMMDWJEIN